JP2017196516A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of efficiently controlling a display device by LEDs with improved visibility.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a digit counter for storing digit data from among a plurality of LED segments; each kind of segment table for storing each lighting pattern for a group of LED segments in each digit; an RWM work area for determining a lighting pattern of a group of LED segments from each kind of segment table; a segment output port for storing lighting pattern selection information of a group of LED segments determined based on lighting pattern selection information of the RWM work area as information for instructing an on state or an off state for a plurality of light emitting elements of a partial light emitting element group; and a display switching timer for storing a counter value updated by interruption processing at a predetermined period. The game machine updates a value of the digit counter to a different value each time when interruption processing is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 23

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine that uses a game ball or a game medal as a game medium.

In general, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines are provided with a main control board that controls the game and a sub-control board that performs control processing based on a command from the main control board. And among these, as a sub control board of a pachinko game machine, a payout control board, an effect control board, various display control boards, an electrical decoration control board, an acoustic control board, etc. can be illustrated. Furthermore, in pachinko machines, the main control board displays normal symbols and special symbols representing the results of various lotteries in the game, and the normal and special symbols displayed on the main control board are displayed on the board. The main control display device is equipped with a digit such as a 7-segment display or an LED indicator (see paragraph 0069 of Patent Document 1).
JP 2014-209933 A

  By the way, since the main control display device as described above does not bear an effect for the player, a display device having a limited function such as a 7-segment display or an LED is used. However, since the main control display device has a wide variety of functions and can affect the processing load on the main control board, it is necessary to display information on the main control display device efficiently with high visibility. There is.

  The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently controlling a display device such as a main control display device using LEDs and the like with high visibility. There is to do.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a main control means (such as a main board) for controlling the progress of the game,
In accordance with the output of the main control means, a light-emitting display unit (main control display device etc.) composed of a plurality of light-emitting elements (LED segments etc.) each turned on or off,
A game area where game media can flow down;
A first starting area (such as a first starting prize opening) arranged in the gaming area and capable of detecting gaming media;
A second start-up area (second) which is arranged in the game area and is capable of detecting a game medium and which can take a closed state which is relatively disadvantageous to the player and an open state which is more advantageous to the player than the closed state. Starting prize opening etc.),
A third starting area (each operating port, etc.) arranged in the gaming area and capable of detecting gaming media;
And one or a plurality of variable winning holes (such as each big winning hole) that are arranged in the gaming area and can be in a winning impossible state and a winning possible state,
The main control means includes
A first jackpot lottery for the first starting area is performed using a jackpot random value acquired based on the detection of the game medium in the first starting area, and a first jackpot lottery result for the first starting area is shown. When the special symbol is stopped after the variable display, and the result of the big win lottery related to the first starting area is a big win, the variable winning opening is in the state where the winning is possible after the stop display of the first special symbol And execute a special game
A second for performing a big hit lottery related to the second start area using the big hit random value obtained based on the detection of the game medium in the second start area, and showing a result of the big hit lottery related to the second start area When the special symbol is stopped after the variable display, and the result of the big win lottery related to the second start area is a big win, the variable winning opening is in the state where the winning is possible after the stop display of the second special symbol And execute a special game
If a predetermined special symbol variation start condition related to the first special symbol is not satisfied even if a game medium is detected in the first starting area, first special symbol hold storage information including the big hit random number value is predetermined. Memorize it within a number (eg 4),
Even if a game medium is detected in the second starting area, if the predetermined special symbol variation start condition relating to the second special symbol is not satisfied, the second special symbol hold storage information including the big hit random number value is predetermined. Memorize it within a number (eg 4),
Selecting a special symbol variation pattern that defines a variation time related to the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by a special symbol variation pattern lottery,
A lottery for normal symbols is performed using a random number for normal symbols acquired based on the detection of the game medium in the third starting area, and the normal symbols for showing the results of the lottery for normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. If the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a win, the second starting area is set to the open state after the stop display of the normal symbol,
When a predetermined variation start condition related to the normal symbol is not satisfied even if a game medium is detected in the third starting area, a predetermined number (4 pieces of normal symbol holding storage information including the normal symbol per lottery) Etc.)
The light emitting display unit includes at least a light emitting element used as a special symbol display unit, a light emitting element used as a special symbol hold number display unit, a light emitting element used as a normal symbol display unit, and a normal symbol hold number display unit. And a light emitting element used as:
The main control means includes
Group designating data for storing group designating data (eg data for selecting digits) designating a part of the light emitting device groups (eg, each digit of the main control display device) among the plurality of light emitting devices of the light emitting display section. Storage area (digit counter, etc.)
Lighting pattern tables (various segment tables) each storing lighting patterns for identification display unit element groups (such as LED segment groups in each digit) composed of one or a plurality of light emitting elements constituting the partial light emitting element group. etc,
A lighting pattern that stores lighting pattern selection information (such as a predetermined value stored in a predetermined work area related to an LED output in the RWM) for determining a lighting pattern of the identification display unit element group from the lighting pattern table. A selection information storage area (such as a work area related to LED output in the RWM);
The lighting pattern selection information of the identification display unit element group determined based on information in the lighting pattern selection information storage area (designated predetermined work area or the like) is used as a plurality of light emitting elements of the partial light emitting element group. On the other hand, a lighting state designation information storage area (such as a segment output port) that is stored as information for instructing either the lighting state or the extinguishing state;
A timer storage area (such as a display switching timer) that stores a counter value that is updated in an interrupt process (such as a game progress interrupt process) that is executed at a predetermined period (such as 4 ms) by the main control means;
Have
The main control means includes
Each time the interrupt process is performed, the value of the group designation data storage area is updated to a different value,
In the interrupt processing in which the timer storage area is updated and the number of updates reaches a predetermined value (25 or the like), information in the lighting pattern selection information storage area is set to a lighting state or a light-off state for a plurality of light emitting elements of the light emitting display unit. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it can be updated to information to be performed (such as an offset value designating whether flashing is present or not), and light emission control is enabled in a flashing display mode.

  According to the present invention, a gaming machine capable of efficiently controlling a display device with high visibility can be provided.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the function of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the main board | substrate structures of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the basic functional means of a main board | substrate, a sub main board | substrate, and a sub sub board | substrate. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a main control display apparatus, (b) is a graph which shows the relationship between each indicator lamp and name in a main control display apparatus. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the change of the effect symbol in an effect display apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display during the stop of an effect symbol similarly. (A) is a chart showing a success / failure determination table, and (b) is a chart showing a deviation variation pattern table. (A) is a chart showing a big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery, (b) is a chart showing a big hit symbol determination table for the second lottery, and (c) is a small hit symbol determination table used at the time of a small hit. It is a chart. (A) is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at the time of loss, (b) is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at 16R big hit, (c) is a chart showing a fluctuation pattern table used at 4R big hit and small hit. It is. It is a flowchart which shows the control start process in a main board | substrate. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a control start process following FIG. 11. It is a flowchart which shows the game progress interruption process in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process in a main board | substrate. (A) is a chart showing an initial value random number update table, and (b) is a chart showing an initial value update type random number update table. (A) is description which shows a 1st status indicator lamp, a 2nd status indicator lamp, and a main control error indicator lamp, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the classification | category of a digit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of various hits in a main control display apparatus, (b) is a chart which shows the operation | movement aspect of the LED indicator lamp in various hold displays. It is explanatory drawing which shows the principal part in the circuit structure for the data output to a main control display apparatus. (A) is a chart showing a digit data table, and (b) is a chart showing a digit 1 segment table to a digit 5 segment table. It is a chart which shows various segment tables. It is a chart which shows a special symbol segment table. It is a graph which shows the principal part of the RWM work area | region in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the LED output process in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the display number switching process in a main board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process of the power-off confirmation information setting in a main board | substrate. The other example which concerns on a normal symbol display part is shown, (a) is a timing chart which shows the display mode whose variation time is 64 ms, (b) is a timing chart which shows the display mode whose variation time is 44 ms, ( c) is a timing chart showing a display mode in which the variation time is 84 ms. It is a flowchart which shows the principal part which concerns on the other Example of the control start process in a main board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process of the power-off confirmation information setting in a main board | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the power-supply required time in a main board | substrate.

Examples of pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention will be described below. Here, first, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described, and then the gaming procedure, effects, control mode, etc. in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
<Basic configuration of pachinko machine>

  FIG. 1 shows a front configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 10, a gaming board 50 is mounted on a gaming machine frame 11 described later. Among these, the game board 50 has different components such as accessory devices and designs depending on the model of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Further, the gaming board 50 can be separated from the gaming machine frame 11 by releasing the electrical connection relationship and the structural connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11.

  Further, by sharing the structural and electrical connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11 for a plurality of types of gaming boards 50, it is possible to change the so-called model in which the gaming machine frame 11 is shared between different models. Yes. In the following, the gaming machine frame 11 will be described first, and then the board configuration of the gaming board 50 will be described.

  The gaming machine frame 11 described above has an outer frame 12, a front frame 13, and a lower front plate 14. Furthermore, a glass door 15 and a dish unit 16 are mounted on the front frame 13. Among these, the outer frame 12 is a rectangular frame used for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 10 to a predetermined position in the island facility in the game hall (game store). As shown in FIG. The front frame 13 having the door 15 and the dish unit 16 and the above-described lower front plate 14 have an opening portion whose front side is closed.

  In addition, nailing is generally performed as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island facility. Then, wood is used as a material of at least a part of the outer frame 12 for fixing to the island facility. Instead of wood, it is possible to employ, for example, a plastic material that can be nail-dried. In addition, as a method for installing the outer frame 12 in the island facility, a method other than nailing can be employed.

  The front frame 13 has a structure having an outer shape that matches the opening of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 via hinge mechanisms 15A and 15B shown on the left side in FIG. The front frame 13 is opened from the closed state with respect to the outer frame 12 by swinging forward with the left edge in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge as a free end. Further, the front frame 13 swings backward from the open state, enters the outer frame 12 and is locked therein, and then becomes the closed state again. And the front frame 13 closes the site | part from the upper short part of the outer frame 12 to the above-mentioned lower front board 14 at the time of closure.

  The locking of the front frame 13 to the outer frame 12 and the release from the outer frame 12 are performed via a lock device (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, the cylinder portion 17 of the locking device is disposed on the free end side of the front frame 13, and the cylinder portion 17 covers the lower part of the front frame 13. 16, the keyhole is directed to the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Then, when the game shop clerk inserts the key into the key hole of the 17 parts of the cylinder and rotates this key, for example, counterclockwise, the free end side of the front frame 13 is released from the lock device, and the front frame 13 is in the open state. Become.

  With respect to such a front frame 13, the lower front plate 14 described above does not have a configuration for opening and closing like the front frame 13, and is fixed to the outer frame 12 so as not to move. The lower front plate 14 always closes the lower end of the front surface of the outer frame 12.

  The glass door 15 disposed at the front portion of the front frame 13 and the dish unit 16 are attached to the front frame 13 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). Further, both the glass door 15 and the dish unit 16 can swing independently with the left edge in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge as a free end. Then, the glass door 15 and the dish unit 16 are brought into an open state by, for example, a game shop clerk swinging horizontally forward and swinging backward from the open state to be locked to the front frame 13. It will be in a closed state.

  The locking of the glass door 15 to the front frame 13 and the release from the front frame 13 are performed via the aforementioned locking device (not shown). That is, when a game shop clerk inserts a key into the key hole of the above-described cylinder 17 and turns this key, for example, in the clockwise direction opposite to when the front frame 13 is opened, the free end side of the glass door 15 is locked. The glass door 15 is opened. Then, the glass door 15 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13, and the glass door 15 is pushed so as to be parallel to the front frame 13. Lock to the frame 13.

  Further, by opening the glass door 15, a locking mechanism (not shown) of the tray unit 16 appears and can be operated, and an operation part (not shown) of this locking mechanism can be operated by a game shop clerk in a downward direction, for example. By performing the pushing operation, the dish unit 16 is opened. Further, the dish unit 16 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13 and the dish unit 16 is pushed so as to be parallel to the front frame 13. Lock to the front frame 13.

  Further, the glass door 15 holds, for example, two parallel transparent plates so as to be detachable. When the glass door 15 is in a closed state, the gaming board 50 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through these transparent plates. I am doing so. As the transparent plate, in addition to a glass plate, a transparent resin plate or the like can be used. Further, by opening the glass door 15, the front surface of the game board 50 held on the front frame 13 by the game board holding mechanism (not shown) is exposed. Further, although not shown, the front frame 13 has a game ball passage for guiding and collecting game balls as game media.

  The dish unit 16 has an upper ball dish 18, a lower ball dish 19, a firing handle 20, and the like on the front surface thereof. Among these, the upper ball tray 18 stores the game balls, supplies the game balls to the launching device 43 (see FIGS. 2 and 4) operated via the launch handle 20, and plays the games to the lower ball tray 19. Mechanisms for various functions such as ball discharge are provided. The lower ball tray 19 stores game balls, receives game balls sent from the upper ball tray 18, and stores game balls in a ball box (so-called dollar box) placed outside the pachinko gaming machine 10. Mechanisms for various functions such as discharge are provided.

  In this embodiment, various speakers 21 are provided in the upper corner of the glass door 15, the lower front plate 14, and the like, and through these speakers 21, depending on the gaming state, the production pattern, and the like. BGM and various sound effects are output.

  Furthermore, an operation button 22 that can be operated by the player is provided at a portion of the upper ball tray 18 facing the player. The operation button 22 is provided on the outer wall surface of the upper part of the upper ball dish 18 and is located near the center of the upper ball dish 18 in the left-right direction. Further, the operation button 22 includes an operation button light emitter therein, and performs light output according to the effect pattern to be executed.

Note that the operation button 22 may be protruded upward in a predetermined case using a drive source such as a motor. Although not shown, a cross key is provided in addition to the operation button 22, and the player can set various environments by using the cross key. The contents of the environment setting can be exemplified by volume adjustment of the speaker 21, brightness adjustment or light amount adjustment of an effect display described later, or change of an effect mode described later. Further, for example, the front frame 13 or the like of the gaming machine frame 11 can be provided with a display capable of performing an effect related to the game and a display related to the environment setting described above.
<Back view of pachinko machine>

  Next, a basic configuration on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, a set base 31 having a game ball passage for guiding or collecting game balls is attached to the back of the front frame 13, and a gaming machine is provided below the set base 31. A power supply unit 32 for supplying power to the whole and a payout control board 103 for controlling the gaming machine frame side are attached. On the back side of the game board 50, a main board (main control board) 102 that performs overall control of the entire game, and a sub board 104 that executes effect control based on control commands from the main board 102 are set base 31. Are provided in a positional relationship corresponding to the openings.

  In the set base 31, a prize ball tank 33 is provided above the opening. The prize ball tank 33 stores game balls which are supplied from the island facility and become prize balls. Further, below the prize ball tank 33, a prize ball passage 34, a payout unit 35, and a prize ball discharge passage 36 are provided. The prize ball passage 34, the payout unit 35, and the prize ball discharge passage 36 are arranged along the right side from the upper side of the game board 50 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the back as shown in FIG. Has been.

  The above-mentioned prize ball passage 34 guides and guides the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 to the downstream side. Further, the above-mentioned payout unit 35 can communicate with the prize ball passage 34 and discharge the balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 downward in units of one ball. Further, the prize ball discharge passage 36 guides the game balls flowing down from the payout unit 35 to the ball bowl (the upper ball dish 18 or the lower ball dish 19) as a prize ball.

  The power supply unit 32 described above is provided at a lower left portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the back as shown in FIG. The power supply unit 32 converts AC power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine into various voltages used in the gaming machine and supplies it to the payout control board 103, the main board 102, the sub board 104, and the like. The power supply unit 32 is provided with a power switch 40 that is a tilt switch. The power switch 40 is installed so as to be turned on when the lower part of the power switch 40 is pushed down and tilted downward so that it does not turn off even if the dropped game ball hits directly.

  The above-described payout control board 103 is disposed at the lower right portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the back as shown in FIG. The payout control board 103 has a payout control function for controlling the payout unit 35 in accordance with a command relating to payout from the main board 102 and a loan request from the outside. The payout control board 103 also has a launch control function for controlling the launch device 43 so as to launch a game ball into the game area with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the launch handle 20 (see FIG. 1).

  The above-mentioned main board 102 is disposed at the center lower part on the back side of the game board 50, and is mainly used for various lottery functions, control functions for the payout control board 103 and the sub board 104, and the like. 10 has a central processing function. The above-described sub-board 104 is disposed at the center upper part on the back side of the game board 50 and mainly has a function for controlling various effects described later.

The main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the sub board 104 constitute a game control device, which will be described later in detail. As for the sub-board 104, a main sub-board (sub-main board 301 in this embodiment) responsible for the main function of effect control and a sub-sub-board specialized for a specific effect function such as image creation (this implementation). In the example, it is divided into the sub-sub board 302), but the term “sub-board” includes these. Details of the sub main board 301 and the sub sub board 302 will be described later. In addition, an external relay terminal board 46 that relays signals from the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like to devices outside the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided at the upper right portion on the back side of the set board 31.
<Board configuration of game board>

  Next, the game board 50 described above and components (board surface parts) arranged on the board surface of the game board 50 will be described. In this embodiment, the game board 50 is composed of a plurality of parts made of a transparent resin material (for example, a transparent acrylic resin). The game board 50 is formed in a hollow plate shape, and has a game ball passage for guiding the game ball to the back side of the game board 50, a predetermined space, and the like. The gaming board 50 is attached to the front frame 13 of the gaming machine frame 11 with the board surface on which various board surface parts described later are attached facing forward, and is closed by the glass door 15 or the like in the closed state. The front is covered. Further, on the front side of the game board 50, a game area 52 is defined by combining an inner rail and an outer rail formed in a curved belt shape, and the game area 52 is formed via a transparent plate of the glass door 15. And is visible.

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the present embodiment, in the game area 52, the first start winning port 62 and the second starting winning port 63, which are two start winning ports, and the first two winning ports are the first. A big winning port 91 and a second big winning port 92, two operating ports, that is, a left operating port 68a and a right operating port 68b, a plurality of general winning ports 72, an out port 58 and the like are provided. Further, the game area 52 is provided with an effect display device 60 composed of a liquid crystal display device capable of performing display for effects, a center ornament 64 for decorating the periphery of the effect display device 60, and the like.

  The first start winning opening 62 described above is disposed at the lower center of the game area 52, and the second starting winning opening 63 is disposed below the first start winning opening 62. The first grand prize winning port 91 is disposed below the second start winning prize port 63 and is located above the out port 58. The second grand prize winning port 92 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game area 52 and is located at the upper right of the out port 58. Furthermore, the left operation port 68 a is disposed at the upper left portion of the game area 52, and the right operation port 68 b is disposed at the upper right portion of the second grand prize winning port 92.

  The general winning opening 72 is disposed on the left side of the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63, and the out opening 58 is below the first major winning opening 91, and is a gaming area. 52 is arranged in the lowermost region. Further, the center decoration 64 has a size that occupies most of the upper area from the center of the game area 52, and is arranged at a position displaced slightly to the right from the center in the horizontal direction of the game area 52. Has been. The effect display device 60 is disposed behind the transparent game board 50, and the display area 194 can be visually recognized through the game board 50 from the center opening of the game board center decoration 64.

The game area 52 is provided with a number of game nails, windmills, and the like (not shown). Further, a main control display device 53 is provided outside the game board 50 at the lower left of the game area 52. A specific configuration and function of the main control display device 53 will be described later. Moreover, the above-mentioned board surface structure of the game board 50 can differ variously according to the game property etc. which were employ | adopted for the pachinko game machine 10, for example. Other embodiments related to the board configuration will be described later.
<Functions of panel parts>

  Next, specific functions and configurations related to the individual panel parts described above will be described. First, the first start winning opening 62 is a start winning opening relating to the first game, and is of a type that always opens the entrance of the game ball and does not change the size of the entrance of the game ball. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the first start winning opening 62 includes a first start winning detection device 74. The first start winning detection device 74 has a sensor for detecting a game ball entering the first start winning opening 62, and an output signal of this sensor is input to the main board 102 described above. . Then, the first start winning detection device 74 changes the output signal of the sensor in accordance with the presence / absence of a ball.

  The above-mentioned second start winning opening 63 is a start winning opening relating to the second game, and is arranged immediately below the first start winning opening 62. The entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 63 is normally inhibited by the first starting winning opening 62. However, the second start winning opening 63 is a normal electric accessory (so-called “electric tulip” or “electric chew”), and a blade that opens when a normal symbol (to be described later) is stopped and displayed in a winning manner. (Not shown). Hereinafter, the blades of the second start winning opening 63 are referred to as “opening / closing blades”. Then, the second start winning opening 63 is opened by opening and closing the opening / closing blades for a predetermined time, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening 63. The opening of the second start winning opening 63 in this way to enable the entry is also called so-called “electric chew support” or “electric support”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second start winning opening 63 includes a second start winning detection device 75 and a normal electric accessory solenoid 76 for opening and closing the above-described opening and closing blades. The second start winning detection device 75 has a sensor for detecting a game ball entering the second start winning opening 63, and an output signal of this sensor is input to the main board 102. Then, the second start winning detection device 75 changes the output signal of the sensor in accordance with the presence or absence of a ball.

  In the present embodiment, when the opening / closing blade is expanded, the ease of entering the second start winning opening 63 becomes higher than the ease of entering the first start winning opening 62. However, the relationship between the ease of entering the ball at the first start winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63 should be set as appropriate according to the circumstances such as profits based on the results of the first game and the second game. Is possible. Then, for example, when the opening / closing blades of the second start winning opening 63 are not expanded, the first start winning port 62 and the second start are prevented from entering any ball or by expanding the opening / closing blades. It is possible to make the ease of entering the winning hole 63 the same level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types are provided as modes in which the second start winning opening 63 is opened. These opening modes include a relatively short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) (referred to as “short opening” or “short opening”), or a relatively long time (for example, about 5 seconds). There are modes (referred to as “long open”, “long open”, etc.). It is also possible to provide a middle opening mode set at the opening time between short opening and long opening. Various opening modes related to the second start winning opening 63 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the aforementioned general winning opening 72 includes a general winning detecting device 73 for detecting the entering of a game ball. The general winning detection device 73 has a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 72, and an output signal thereof is input to the main board 102. Then, the general winning detection device 73 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence / absence of a ball. Note that the general winning detection device 73 may be provided individually for the general winning opening 72, or one general winning detection device 73 may be shared by a plurality of general winning openings 72.

  When the general winning detection device 73 is shared by the plurality of general winning ports 72, the game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning ports 72 are gathered at the place where the general winning detection device 73 is arranged and detected. Is possible. Moreover, it is possible to group the plurality of general winning openings 72 for each positional relationship, and to share the general winning detecting device 73 for each group. Furthermore, when the number of prize balls to be paid out is different for the plurality of general prize openings 72, it is possible to group the general prize openings 72 for each prize ball quantity. A specific aspect relating to the payout of prize balls will be described later.

  The aforementioned first grand prize opening 91 is provided as a big prize opening corresponding to the first game, and has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the first grand prize winning opening 91 includes a first opening / closing door (not shown) for opening and closing the above-described opening. Then, the first big winning opening 91 performs an opening operation in a predetermined manner when a predetermined hit occurs in the first game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the first large winning opening 91 is a first large winning detecting device 78 for detecting the entering of a game ball and the first large opening / closing door that opens and closes the first opening / closing door. A prize opening solenoid 80 is provided. Among these, the first grand prize detection device 78 has a sensor for detecting a game ball entering the first grand prize opening 91, and its output signal is input to the main board 102.

  The aforementioned second grand prize opening 92 is provided as a big prize opening corresponding to the second game, and has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape. Furthermore, the second grand prize winning opening 92 includes a second opening / closing door (not shown) for opening and closing the above-described opening. Then, the second winning prize opening 92 performs an opening operation in a predetermined manner when a predetermined hit occurs in the second game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second large winning opening 92 is a second large winning detecting device 79 for detecting the entering of a game ball and the second large opening for opening and closing the second opening / closing door. A prize opening solenoid 81 is provided. Among these, the second grand prize detection device 79 has a sensor for detecting a game ball entering the first grand prize winning port 91, and an output signal thereof is input to the main board 102.

  In this embodiment, decorative plates 91b and 92b are respectively provided in front of the first grand prize winning port 91 and the second big winning prize port 92. The decorative plates 91b and 92b are made of a transparent material so that the player can visually recognize the first opening / closing door, the second opening / closing door, the first big winning opening 91, and the second big winning opening 92. However, the decorative plates 91b and 92b may be opaque. In addition, characters and figures for decorating the game area 52 may be drawn on each decorative board, but in this case, characters and figures are also displayed in the first grand prize winning port 91 and the second grand prize winning port 92. It is desirable that the game ball that does not interfere with the visual recognition of the entered game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the left working port 68a includes a left passage detecting device 69a, and the right working port 68b includes a right passage detecting device 69b. Further, these passage detection devices 69a and 69b have sensors for detecting the passage of game balls at the corresponding operation ports 68a and 68b. And the output signal of the sensor in each passage detection device 69a, 69b is input into the main board 102, and each passage detection device 69a, 69b changes the output signal of a sensor according to the presence or absence of a ball.

  The center decoration 64 has a production function and the like, and an LED substrate on which a large number of chip-type LEDs are mounted is provided inside the center decoration 64. Then, by driving the LED of the center decoration 64, the light of the LED passes through the center decoration 64, and the center decoration 64 performs the light decoration.

  Further, the center decoration 64 is provided with movable effect members 93, 94, etc., and these movable effect members 93, 94 constitute a gimmick for effect. Further, a game ball passage portion 65 is formed in the right part of the center decoration 64 when viewed from the front, and the center decoration 64 has a function of the flow path of the game ball in addition to the above-described effect function. Have. In addition, an effect display device 60 is provided behind the center ornament 64, and the display screen of the effect display device 60 can be visually recognized through the center ornament 64 in the approximate center of the game area 52.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the main control display device 53 described above has a large number of 7-segment display bodies and LED indicator lamps arranged on a symbol display board (main symbol display board) 256. The main control display device 53 includes a normal symbol display unit 59 that displays the above-described normal symbols, a first special symbol display unit 70 that displays a first special symbol (described later) corresponding to the first game, and a second game. A second special symbol display unit 71 for displaying a second special symbol corresponding to (described later) and other various display units are formed. The normal symbol display unit 59 described above constitutes a normal symbol display device. Moreover, the 1st special symbol display part 70 comprises the 1st special symbol display apparatus, and the 2nd special symbol display part 71 comprises the 2nd special symbol display apparatus. Details of each display unit formed in the main control display device 53 will be described later.

In the following, the normal symbol is “normal”, the special symbol is “special”, the first special symbol is “first special” or “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol is “second special”. Or “Special Figure 2”. Further, the first special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol 1” or “symbol 1”, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol 2” or “symbol 2”.
<Basic game procedure>

  Then, the game procedure in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, in a situation where a game ball is supplied to the upper ball tray 18, when the player operates and turns the launch handle 20, the upper ball tray 18 has a strength according to the rotation angle. The game balls stored in are fired one by one at predetermined intervals. The game balls are guided by the inner rail and the outer rail described above, reach the upper part of the game area 52, and are discharged to the game area 52 from between the inner rail and the outer rail.

  In a normal game, the player launches so that the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 52, and aims at the first start winning opening 62 located at the lower center of the game area 52. Such a mode of launching mainly using the left side of the game area 52 is called left-handed. In addition, while the player operates the launch handle 20, the launch of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined time interval (for example, an interval not exceeding 100 shots per minute) by the launch device 43 described above. Then, the game ball continuously released to the game area 52 falls in a direction according to factors such as speed and incident angle (or reflection angle) while interfering with a plurality of game nails and windmills.

  When the game ball falls into various winning ports such as the aforementioned general winning port 72 and the first start winning port 62, the ball is detected and gaming ball payout control is performed as will be described later. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper ball tray 18 as prize balls via the above-described payout unit 35 according to the type of the winning opening entered. In addition, when the upper ball tray 18 is filled with many game balls and the subsequent game balls that have been paid out cannot enter the upper ball tray 18, these game balls are guided to the lower ball tray 19 as overflow balls. .

  In addition, the game balls dropped into various winning holes become safe balls and are guided from the front side to the back side of the game board 50. In addition, the game ball that has not become a safe ball reaches the lower end of the game area 52, falls into the out port 58, and is guided to the back side of the game board 50. Then, the game ball that has reached the back side of the game board 50 is guided downward through a predetermined guide rod or game ball passage in the set base 31, and from the pachinko game machine 10 toward the above-mentioned island facility side. Discharged.

  Unlike the winning opening that generates the safe ball, the left operating port 68a and the right operating port 68b are gates through which game balls pass. In the following description, the left operation port 68a and the right operation port 68b are referred to as “winning ports”, and the terms “incoming”, “entering ball”, and “winning” in this embodiment are “passing” related to the gate. Including meaning.

  When a game ball enters the operation port (here, the left operation port 68a or the right operation port 68b), the main control is performed if a predetermined variation start condition (a general-purpose variation start condition) described later is satisfied. On the display device 53, a normal symbol (described later) is variably displayed. The normal symbol displayed on the main control display unit 53 indicates the result of random number lottery (ordinary drawing lottery) executed based on the entrance to the operation port, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time. The When the result of the general drawing lottery is a win, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner. When the result of the general drawing lottery is out of the way, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. The The details of the regular drawing lottery and normal symbols will be described later.

  When a game ball enters a starting port (here, the first starting winning port 62 or the second starting winning port 63), a predetermined variation start condition (special figure variation start condition) as will be described later is satisfied. For example, a special symbol (described later) is variably displayed on the main control display device 53. The special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 shows the result of random number lottery (big hit lottery) executed based on the entrance to the starting port, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time. . When the result of the random number lottery is a big hit, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode. When the result of the random number lottery is lost, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost mode.

  Details of the jackpot lottery and special symbols will be described later. In addition, when there is a ball in the starting port (here, the first starting winning port 62 or the second starting winning port 63), it is possible to output a specific sound effect or to illuminate the starting port. .

  In the above-described effect display device 60, effect display related to the special symbol is performed. This effect display is different depending on whether the special symbol is variably displayed or stopped, and whether the special symbol's stop display mode is a big hit or off. In relation to this, the production of various aspects determined in advance is performed. When the result of the big hit lottery is out of place, the display on the main control display device 53 shifts from the special symbol stop display to the variable display related to the next lottery result. Furthermore, the effect performed by the effect display device 60 is also related to the next lottery result after the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, if the result of the big hit lottery is a big win, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game (normal game) after the special symbol stop display or the effect display related to the big win Migrate to In this special game, the above-described special winning opening (the first large winning opening 91 or the second large winning opening 92) is opened and closed. In this embodiment, when a big hit is generated based on the ball entering the first start winning port 62, the first big winning port 91 is opened and closed, and a big hit is generated based on the ball entering the second start winning port 63. In such a case, the second big prize opening 92 opens and closes.

  In the special game, a unit game in which the first grand prize opening 91 or the second big prize opening 92 is opened is repeated a plurality of times. Furthermore, there are special games in which a unit game is repeated a maximum number of times, and a unit game is repeated a number of times less than the maximum number of times. As the maximum number of times, 16 times (16R (round)) can be exemplified, and as the number of times less than the maximum number, 4 times (4R) can be exemplified.

  In the present embodiment, the types of special games such as these correspond to the types of jackpots, but specific jackpot types will be described later. In each unit game, when a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls are detected at the corresponding grand prize opening (the first grand prize opening 91 or the second grand prize opening 92), or released. When a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, the end condition is satisfied, and the corresponding big prize opening is closed.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, a game characteristic in which a plurality of (here, two) games corresponding to the conventional first type pachinko gaming machine are mixed is employed. That is, in the present embodiment, the plurality of games described above are divided into the first game in which the left operation port 68a, the first start winning port 62, and the first big winning port 91 are used, the right operation port 68b, and the second start. The winning game 63 can be divided into the second game in which the second winning game port 92 is used. The second game is prioritized over the first game, and the first game and the second game are not executed simultaneously. Here, the details of the game property in which the second game is prioritized over the first game will be described later.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the specific game may be executed after the special game is ended, depending on the result of the big hit lottery. This specific game is in a mode different from the above-mentioned special game and is in a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In the present embodiment, a probability variation game (hereinafter referred to as “probability variation”), a variation time shortening game (hereinafter referred to as “time reduction”), and an easy-to-enter game are provided as specific games. Furthermore, in this embodiment, during this specific game, a so-called right-hand hit is performed in which a game ball is fired toward the right side of the game area 52. Details of these specific games will be described later.

  When the specific game is executed, an effect for urging the player to make a right turn is executed by an image or sound of the effect display device 60. Then, when the player increases the amount of rotation of the launch handle 20 clockwise to increase the firing force and launches the game ball toward the area on the right side of the game area 52, the game ball passing above the center ornament 64 is Then, it enters the game ball passage portion 65 of the center decoration 64 and flows down the center decoration 64. Further, the game ball released from the center ornament 64 falls in a direction according to the way of hitting while hitting a plurality of game nails and other structures.

  A part of the large number of game balls emitted from the center decoration 64 passes through the right operation port 68b (see FIG. 1) and is detected by the right passage detection device 69b (see FIG. 3). As described above, when the game ball passes through the right operation port 68b, the above-mentioned normal symbol is variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 6 (a)) for a predetermined time, and the normal symbol variation display is displayed. When stopped in a predetermined hit state, the ordinary electric accessory of the second start winning opening 63 is expanded for a predetermined time, and electric chew support during a specific game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball reaching the right side of the game area 52 can be guided to the vicinity of the second start winning opening 63 and the second big winning opening 92 by a nail or the like. When the ordinary electric accessory at the winning opening 63 is expanded once, in many cases, one game ball can enter the second starting winning opening 63 depending on the situation. . Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time is added during the specific game, and during the time reduction, the normal electric accessory is opened and extended, and the above-described long opening is executed.

  Further, as described above, since the second big prize opening 92 is arranged on the right side of the game area 52, when the big hit relating to the second game occurs and the second big prize opening 92 opens, the player It is necessary to make the above-mentioned right-handed aiming at the second big winning opening 92.

  In addition, when the big hit of the first game occurs and the special game related to the first game is executed, the first big prize opening 91 is opened. During the special game related to the first game, the player Can be made to be right-handed. In this case, before starting the special game related to the first game, it is conceivable to execute an effect that prompts the player to make a right strike by using an image or sound of the effect display device 60. Furthermore, it is possible to adopt a board surface configuration for guiding the right-handed game ball to the first grand prize winning port 91 or a board surface configuration in which the first big winning hole 91 is arranged on the right side of the game area 52. It is also possible to integrate the first grand prize winning port 91 with the second grand prize winning port 92 and adopt a panel configuration in which the grand prize winning port is only the second grand prize winning port 92.

Further, the game ball passage portion 65 through which the right-handed game ball flows down may not be provided in the center decoration 64 but may be secured on the right outside of the center decoration 64, for example. In this case, when hitting right, the game ball passes through the right outside of the center ornament 64 and goes to the area where the right operation port 68b and the second grand prize winning port 92 are arranged. It is also possible to adopt a board surface configuration in which a game ball passage 65 in the center decoration 64 and a game ball flow path formed on the right outside of the center decoration 64 coexist.
<Type of jackpot>

  Next, the types of jackpots in the first game and the second game described above will be described. First, in this embodiment, as a big hit, a big hit that repeats the above unit game 16 times (hereinafter also referred to as “16R big hit” as appropriate) or a big hit that repeats a unit game four times (hereinafter also referred to as “4R big hit” as appropriate). Is provided. These jackpot lottery modes will be described later.

  The above unit game is started in conjunction with the opening of the first grand prize opening 91 (or the second big prize opening 92) in a special game, and when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, When a predetermined number (for example, 9 or more) of game balls have dropped into the winning opening 91 (or the second large winning opening 92), the first large winning opening 91 (or the second large winning opening 92) is closed. To do. A special game that repeats such unit games is based on a game that accompanies a so-called out-of-ball game with the aim of allowing a player to acquire a game ball. Furthermore, among the various big hits, the 16R big hit and the 4R big hit are intended to cause the player to acquire a relatively large number of game balls.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as one kind of big hit, it is possible to provide, for example, a 16R big hit or a part of the 16R big hit that does not change reliably (16R normal or 4R normal). In addition, for example, even if it is 16R big hit, the opening period of the first big winning opening 91 (or the second big winning opening 92) is short, and it is possible to acquire only the same number of balls as the 4R big winning (16R Probability change (actual 4R)) can be provided, or even in the case of 4R big hit, it is possible to provide a thing in which it is almost impossible to get a start (4R no start).

  In the present embodiment, the specific gaming state such as the above-described probability change and time reduction occurs for all the big hits. For this reason, all of the 16R big hits in this embodiment are 16R big hits with probability variation (hereinafter referred to as “16R probability variation”), and all 4R big hits are 4R big hits with probability variation (hereinafter referred to as “4R probability variation”). Called).

However, the combination of the big hit, the probability change, the time reduction, etc. is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and various combinations can be employed. For example, it is possible to provide a big hit that does not give at least one of the privilege functions such as probability change, time saving, and easy entry game. More specifically, it is conceivable to provide a big hit with only a probability change or a big hit with only a short time. Furthermore, the type of jackpot can be made different depending on the difference in the duration of probability change or the difference in duration of the shorter time. Further, when the electric chew support is also executed during the time saving, the “shortening duration” can be rephrased as “the duration of electric chewing support”. Furthermore, it is also conceivable that only the electric Chu support is executed out of the time reduction and the electric Chu support.
<Hits other than jackpot>

In this embodiment, small hits are provided as types of hits other than big hits. In the first game (or the second game), when this small hit occurs, the first big winning opening 91 (or the second big winning opening 92) is opened for a short time so as not to expect to enter. For example, it is performed once. The small lottery mode will be described later.
<Main control display device>
<< Configuration of main control display device >>

  Next, the aforementioned main control display device 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6, 16, 17, and the like. The main control display device 53 is configured by arranging a segment display body and a large number of LED indicator lamps on a symbol display board 256 and overlapping a transparent plate in front of various display bodies. Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, the main control display device 53 has a first status indicator lamp 231 and a second status indicator lamp 232 in order from the left in the upper left part of the symbol display board 256 when viewed from the front. The main control error indicator lamp 233 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), the first status indicator lamp 231 includes a first status indicator lamp first segment 231a and a first status indicator lamp second segment 231b, which are two linear LED segments. Are arranged in a line in the upward direction to form a digit in the form of a number “1”. The second status indicator lamp 232 is a combination of seven segments of the second status indicator first segment 232a to the second status indicator seventh segment 232g, which are seven linear LED segments. ”Form a digit. Further, the main control error indicator lamp 233 is configured by a circular main control error indicator lamp dot 233 a attached to the lower right of the second status indicator lamp 232.

  The first status indicator lamp 231 and the second status indicator lamp 232 described above can display numbers 0 to 18, numbers, alphabets, hyphens, and other symbols by selectively lighting the LEDs of each segment. It has become. Furthermore, it is possible to display more various information by blinking the LED and changing the blinking pattern. The first status indicator lamp 231 and the second status indicator lamp 232 are used, for example, to display the number of rounds when a big hit occurs in the first game or the second game described above and a special game is executed. . Further, the main control error indicator lamp 233 can be used for, for example, display relating to an error.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6A, on the symbol display board 256, two, four, ten, and ten LED indicator lamps are arranged horizontally at a predetermined pitch from the top. The total 26 LED indicator lamps are the remaining parts on the symbol display board 256 relative to the part where the first status indicator lamp 231, the second status indicator lamp 232, and the main control error indicator lamp 233 are arranged. Are neatly arranged. Here, in FIG. 6A, for convenience of explanation, symbols A to Z are described on a total of 26 LED indicator lamps. And in the following description, the LED indicator lamps may be distinguished by reference numerals A to Z given in FIG.

  These LED indicator lamps A to Z can also display predetermined information in accordance with the presence or absence of lighting or a blinking pattern. FIG. 6B shows a relationship between the LED indicator lights A to Z shown in FIG. Among these, the LED indicator lamps A to C are a normal symbol memory display first LED, a normal symbol memory display second LED, and a normal symbol display LED according to a normal symbol described later. The LED indicator lamps D and E are a third status indicator lamp and a fourth status indicator lamp, and the LED indicator lamp F is a right-handed indicator lamp that is lit, for example, when the right-handing is to be performed. Among these, the third state indicator lamp (D) is used to display the operation state of the probability variation function related to the special symbol, and the fourth state indicator lamp (E) is the operation state of the probability variation function related to the normal symbol. Used for display.

  Further, eight LED indicators G to N constitute a first special symbol display unit 70, and LED indicator lights O and P respectively include a first LED for first special symbol memory display and a first special symbol memory. This is the second LED for display. The eight LED indicators Q to X constitute a second special symbol display unit 71, and the LED indicator lamps Y and Z are a second special symbol memory display first LED and a second special symbol memory, respectively. This is the second LED for display. In FIG. 6 (a), the normal symbol display unit 59, the first special symbol display unit 70, and the second special symbol display unit 71 are provided with reference numerals, and the respective LED indicator lamps are enclosed by brace symbols. It shows.

  The above-described normal symbol display unit 59 is configured by one LED indicator lamp C, and the normal symbol variation display and stop display are performed by the operation mode of the LED indicator lamp C. As an operation of the normal symbol display unit 59, it is possible to distinguish and display a large number (for example, three or more) types of information depending on differences in lighting and blinking, differences in blinking cycle, and the like. In addition, from the viewpoint of clarity related to the stop display of the normal symbol, it is desirable to display the lottery result related to the normal symbol by turning on or off. For this reason, the number of the LED indicator lamps which comprise the normal symbol display part 59 may be made into 2 or more, for example, and the stop symbol of a normal symbol may be represented by the combination of lighting and light extinction.

  Further, in this embodiment, the normal symbol variation display is performed by blinking one LED indicator lamp C. However, for example, when the normal symbol display unit is composed of two LED indicators, one LED is turned on and the other LED is turned off (represented by “● ○”), and one LED is turned off and the other LED is turned off. Lights up (represented by “○ ●”), blinking alternately “● ○”, “○ ●”, “● ○”, “○ ●”,... It is possible to execute. The normal symbol display mode using two LEDs will be described later as another embodiment. Furthermore, in the case of blinking with such two patterns alternately lighting, depending on the pattern switching timing (interval), it becomes difficult to see the fluctuation, so “○○ (all off)”, “●● (all on) ”May be displayed in three patterns or four patterns. However, if “●●” is sandwiched, it is likely to be affected by afterglow and it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation. Therefore, the three patterns to which only the pattern “◯◯” is added are preferable.

  The above-mentioned first special symbol display unit 70 can change and stop the display of the first special symbol related to the first game by the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lights GN arranged in a line in the horizontal direction. It has become. The first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 70 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first lottery performed when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 62, and its variation display is predetermined. When the game is stopped in the winning mode, a big hit occurs and a special game is executed. The first special symbol display unit 70 displays 256 (= 2 ^ 8) types at the maximum in combination with lighting and extinguishing of the LED indicator lights G to N when the first special symbol is stopped. Identification information can be displayed.

  Similarly for the second special symbol display unit 71 described above, the variation display and stop display of the second special symbol related to the second game are performed by the operation modes of the eight LED indicator lights Q to X arranged in a line in the horizontal direction. Is possible. The second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 71 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the second lottery performed when the game ball enters the second start winning prize opening 63, and its variation display is predetermined. When it is stopped in the hit mode, a big hit occurs and a special game is executed. In the second special symbol display unit 71, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, a maximum of 256 (= 2 ^ 8) types can be obtained by the combination of turning on and off the LED indicator lights Q to X. Identification information can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control display device 53 having such a configuration is connected to the main board 102 described above. Various display units in the main control display device 53 are controlled by the main board 102. In FIG. 3, only the normal symbol display unit 59, the first special symbol display unit 70, and the second special symbol display unit 71 among the various display units in the main control display device 53 are shown.
<< Functions of main control display device >>

  When the game ball passes through the aforementioned operation port (the left operation port 68a or the right operation port 68b), the normal symbol display unit 59 blinks, and the normal symbol variation display is executed. Then, when a predetermined variation time (ordinary variation time) elapses after the normal symbol variation display is started, the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. And, if the normal symbol is displayed in an out-of-phase (out-of-phase) mode, if there is a ball entering the subsequent operating port after the elapse of a predetermined stop time (ordinary stop time), it is normal The next variable display related to the symbol is started. In addition, when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode (a hit mode), the display shifts to the next fluctuation display in the same manner as in the case of losing, while the normal symbol hits and stops first. Depending on the mode, the second start winning opening 63 performs an opening operation for a predetermined time.

  In addition, the first LED for normal symbol memory display and the second LED for normal symbol memory display which are the LED indicator lamps A and B are a pair of two, and the combination of turning off and lighting of the two LEDs makes it 0 to 0. The numerical value of 4 can be displayed. And the numerical value displayed by 1st LED (C) for normal symbol memory | storage display and 2nd LED (D) for normal symbol memory | storage display represents the number of holding | maintenance concerning the common drawing lottery in a 1st game or a 2nd game. .

  The number of holdings related to this general symbol lottery is the number of game balls that have passed through the left working port 68a (or the right working port 68b) during fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol variation display has not yet been executed. The number of lotteries is shown. In other words, if the previously performed symbol variation has not ended, the variation start condition is not satisfied, and when the symbol variation ends, the variation start condition is satisfied, and the lottery result stored on hold ( Based on the result of the pending lottery), a new symbol variation will be started. The upper limit of the number of holds is four, and the hold storage is not performed more than four.

  For example, when the number of holds is 0 (no hold), the display of the numerical values of 0 to 4 by the first LED (C) for normal symbol memory display and the second LED (D) for normal symbol memory display are both turned off. However, in the case where the number of holdings is 1, it is possible to perform in such a manner that either one is turned on and the other is turned off. In addition, when the number of holds is 2, both are lit, when the number of holds is 3, one of them is lit and the other blinks, and when the number of holds is 4, both are blinked. Can be displayed. In addition, if the number of LEDs for the usual figure hold number display (the same as the special figure hold number display described later) is the same as the hold upper limit number (here, four), control such as blinking is unnecessary. . However, as in this embodiment, the number of LEDs for displaying the reserved number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number (here, two), thereby reducing the member cost and further performing blinking control. Since a light-off period is provided, power consumption can be reduced.

  Regarding the display of the number of reserved first special symbols by the first special symbol display unit 70 described above, two LEDs, a first special symbol memory display first LED (O) and a first special symbol memory display second LED (P). Is performed by displaying a numerical value of 0 to 4 as a set. Regarding the display of the number of second special symbols held by the second special symbol display unit 71, two of the second special symbol memory display first LED (Y) and the second special symbol memory display second LED (Z) are 1 This is done by displaying numerical values from 0 to 4 as a set.

  In this embodiment, since the second game is preferentially executed as described above, for the first special symbol, all the symbol fluctuations corresponding to the reserved lottery result of the second special symbol are over, and the reserved lottery result It is also a condition for starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol that all the characters are digested. And, the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 4 respectively, and the reservation storage in each is not performed more than four.

  1st LED (O) for 1st special symbol memory display and 2nd LED (P) for 1st special symbol memory display, or 1st LED (Y) for 2nd special symbol memory display, and 2nd LED for 2nd special symbol memory display The display of the numerical values of 0 to 4 by (Z) is, for example, in the same manner as in the case of the first LED for normal symbol memory display (A) and the second LED for normal symbol memory display (B) described above. In the case (when there is no hold), both can be turned off, and when the number of holds is 1, either one can be turned on and the other can be turned off. In addition, when the number of holds is 2, both are lit, when the number of holds is 3, one of them is lit and the other blinks, and when the number of holds is 4, both are blinked. Can be displayed.

In addition, when it becomes the game situation which should perform the above-mentioned right strike, the display in the predetermined | prescribed aspect using the right strike indicator lamp F of the main control display apparatus 53 (refer Fig.6 (a)) is performed. In this embodiment, the right-handed indicator lamp F is turned off when left-handed, which is a game situation to be left-handed, and is turned on when right-handed, which is a game situation to be right-handed. For example, lighting and blinking are set.
<Configuration and basic display contents of production display device>

  Next, the configuration of the effect display device 60 described above and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In this embodiment, a large-sized (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, other effect displays such as an effect display for the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 and a story display are performed. Although various images are displayed on the effect display device 60, here, basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

  As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the main control display device 53, the effect display device 60 produces an effect as shown in FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b). Variation display of the symbol 190 is executed. In the present embodiment, the effect design 190 includes a left effect design 190a, a middle effect design 190b, and a right effect design 190c.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the left effect design 190a has nine types of element designs (symbol element effect designs) having the meanings of the symbols “1” to “9”. Further, the medium effect symbol 190b and the right effect symbol 190c, which are other effect symbols, also have nine types of element symbols that mean the numbers “1” to “9”, like the left effect symbol 190a. Details of the above-described element design will be described later.

  With the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the above-mentioned effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 7A). In the present embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbols is such that the left effect symbols 190a to the right effect symbols 190c are individually moved in the vertical direction (vertical scrolling), and the above-described element symbols are made to appear in the display area 194 sequentially. It is executed by.

  Further, the effect symbol 190 may constitute a so-called “reach” combination as an intermediate stage of variable display. In this “reach”, two of the effect symbols 190 (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) are, for example, “7” and “7” having the same number of symbols, the same meaning, Alternatively, the combination is configured with symbols having a predetermined relationship. Furthermore, in this “reach”, the remaining one symbol (in this case, the middle effect symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that constitute the reach combination is in a variation state that cannot be combined with other effect symbols. It has become.

  Note that various types of “reach” and other various types can be adopted as the display mode of the effect design 190, and details of the various display modes will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects are performed in addition to the effects by the effect symbol 190, and details thereof will be described later.

  In this embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and other types of display bodies such as a mechanical drum body and an LED display body are used. It may be a thing. Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed on the main control display device 53 which is a display device different from the effect display device 60. The special symbol may be displayed on the effect display device 60 without displaying the symbol. In this case, it is possible to give a special role to the special symbol itself.

  In the present embodiment, the effect symbol 190 in the effect display device 60 is shared by the first game and the second game. For this reason, you may perform the display which shows whether the present production | presentation symbol 190 is performing the display corresponding to which special symbol of a 1st game and a 2nd game. Such a display for distinguishing between the first game and the second game is performed, for example, at any corner of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 or for the center decoration 64 described above. It is conceivable to add an LED indicator lamp and display an identification mark relating to the distinction between the first game and the second game. Alternatively, the effect symbol for the first game and the effect symbol for the second game may be provided separately, and both effect symbols may be displayed on the effect display device 60 at the same time.

  Furthermore, the effect display device 60 is not limited to the one provided with only one display body, and may be configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies. More specifically, as described above, the display device 60 shown in FIG. 1 has a relatively large display screen (for example, about 15 inches) and is relatively small. It is conceivable to add one or more of those (for example, about 5 inches).

  Furthermore, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member and configure a gimmick with the additional display body. Normally, an additional display body is arranged outside the display area 194 so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In some cases, it is conceivable that an additional display body appears in front of the display area 194.

  Further, the additional display body is provided with a multi-monitor function, and a composite image is formed by combining the display content of the display area 194 and the display content of the additional display body. An additional display body may be combined in front of the display region 194 to form a single display body in a pseudo manner. Further, when an additional display body is arranged in front of the display area 194, the display content of the display area 194 hidden by the additional display body can be displayed on the additional display body to supplement the display contents. is there.

In addition, a relatively large display body may be moved back and forth, for example. Further, for example, when the transmissive liquid crystal display device is disposed in front of the effect display device 60 and a predetermined effect pattern is executed, the display content of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is superimposed on the display content of the effect display device 60. It is also possible.
<Electric configuration of pachinko machines>

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. Here, the main components of the electrical configuration are extracted and described. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 10 includes a power supply board 251, a payout control board 103, a main board 102, a sub main board 301, and the like. Among these, the above-described payout control board 103 and the like are connected to the power supply board 251, and the payout control board 103 is connected to the main board 102, the launching device 43, and a lending device connection terminal board (not shown) such as a game ball. ) Etc. are connected. The main control display device 53 and the sub main board 301 are connected to the main board 102, and the sub sub board 302 is connected to the sub main board 301.

  The power supply board 251 among the various configurations described above is provided in the power supply unit 32 (see FIG. 2). Although not shown, the payout control board 103 is also connected with a status display unit used for displaying the type of error, a card unit for executing monetary processing related to ball lending and ball lending processing, and the like. . Furthermore, a ball operation board or the like used for the ball operation is connected to the above-described rental device connection terminal plate (not shown) such as a game ball. Further, the above-described launching device 43 is connected to a touch switch (not shown), a firing stop switch (not shown) and the like provided on the launching handle 20 (see FIG. 1).

  As shown in FIG. 3, the main board 102 is connected to the main control display device 53, the passage detection devices 69a and 69b, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 76, and the first through the various game board connection boards (not shown). Start winning detection device 74, second start winning detection device 75, general winning detection device 73, first big winning detection device 78, second big winning detection device 79, first big winning port solenoid 80, second big winning port solenoid 81, a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor (not shown), and the like are connected.

  The sub-main board 301 is connected to various production devices via various relay boards (not shown). Examples of the equipment for production include LED boards for various types of illumination in the center decoration 64, various movable body motors of the movable production members 93 and 94, LED boards for illumination in the gaming machine frame 11, and the gaming machine frame 11. An example of the frame motor for production provided can be given. Here, examples of the electrical decoration in the gaming machine frame 11 include those performed by the dish unit 16 in addition to those performed by the glass door 15 described above, and those performed by the button device provided with the operation buttons 22. . The frame motor described above is used for driving a movable effect member (not shown) provided in the gaming machine frame 11.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the sub-sub board 302 is connected to the liquid crystal unit 42 provided in the effect display device 60 described above, various speakers 21, and the like. Various speakers 21 may be connected to the sub-main board 301 described above.

  Next, the configuration of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, a CPU (main CPU) 501, a ROM (main ROM) 502, and an RWM 503 are mounted on the main board 102. Among these, as the CPU 501, for example, a central processing unit in a CPU device (CPU device) in which resin packaging is performed can be used. The “ROM” and “RWM” described in this embodiment are comprehensive concepts including both those built in the CPU device and those externally attached to the CPU device.

  Further, although not shown, in the CPU device mounted on the main board 102, in addition to the CPU 501, a control clock generation circuit, a random number clock generation circuit, a random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers, an 8-bit random number Random number circuit and the like. Among these, the random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers and the random number circuit for 8-bit random numbers are for generating hardware random numbers that are built-in random numbers.

  The main board 102 is equipped with an input / output port 505 for inputting / outputting data to / from devices outside the main board 102. Furthermore, although not shown, various circuit portions such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are formed on the main substrate 102.

  The ROM 502 described above stores a game program for the CPU 501 to perform processing related to the game, predetermined control data, and the like. The RWM 503 stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like so that the CPU 501 can execute the game program.

  Subsequently, a CPU (payout CPU) 511, a ROM (payout ROM) 512, and an RWM 513 are mounted on the payout control board 103. Among these, as the CPU 511, for example, a central processing unit in a CPU device (CPU device) in which resin packaging is performed can be used. The ROM 512 stores a payout program for the CPU 511 to perform processing related to payout, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the RWM 513 described above stores rewritable data necessary for various processes and data generated during the process when the payout program is executed by the CPU 501.

  The sub-main board 301 includes a CPU (sub-main CPU) 521, a ROM (sub-main ROM) 522, a work RWM 523, an input port 527, an output port 528, a bus line (not shown), and the like. . The output side of the main board 102 is connected to the input side of the input port 527, and the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RWM 523, the output port 528, and the like are connected to the output side of the input port 527.

  The CPU 521 of the sub main board 301 controls the display of the effect display device 60 based on the effect display command (command) for symbol display transmitted from the main board 102. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RWM 523 is for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. Memory.

  Note that transmission / reception of data between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301 is performed in a one-way communication (one-way communication) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. Since unidirectional communication is ensured between the main board 102 and the sub main board 301, data cannot be transmitted from the sub main board 301 to the main board 102. Therefore, information held by the main board 102 cannot be referred to by the sub main board 301 unless the main board 102 transmits the information to the sub main board 301. In order to enable such communication in one direction, for example, a communication restriction unit (buffer circuit or the like) is mounted on the main board 102, and data output to the sub-main board 301 is sent to the communication restriction means. It is possible to do through.

  The sub-sub board 302 includes a CPU 531, a work RWM 532, a program ROM 533, a sound ROM 534, a character ROM 535, an image controller (VDP) 536, a sound control circuit 537, an input port 538, an output port 539, and a bus line (not shown). It has. Further, the image controller (VDP) 536 includes a video memory 540. The output side of the sub-main board 301 is connected to the input side of the input port 538, and the devices such as the CPU 531, the work RWM 532, and the program ROM 533 are connected to the output side of the input port 538.

The video memory 540 described above is a memory for storing display data displayed on the effect display device 60, and the display content (frame image) of the effect display device 60 is rewritten by rewriting the content of the image data in the video memory 540. ) Is changed. The character ROM 535 is a memory for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the effect display device 60. The image controller 536 adjusts the operation timing of each of the CPU 531, the video memory 540, and the output port 539 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data stored in the video memory 540 from the character ROM 535 at a predetermined timing. Furthermore, the effect is displayed on the effect display device 60 by superimposing the symbols in the order of layers in which priorities are determined in advance.
<Power supply and data backup>

  The power supply board 251 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 10 and an initialization switch circuit unit 543 having an initialization switch 544. The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating voltages to the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). More specifically, the power supply unit 541 takes in a predetermined voltage supplied from the outside, and supplies a predetermined amount of voltage for driving various switches, motors, logic circuits, etc. to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, And it supplies with respect to another predetermined | prescribed apparatus.

  The initialization switch circuit unit 543 is an initialization signal for clearing backup data to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the initialization switch 544 is pressed by a game store administrator, for example, when the power is turned on. Is provided. As will be described later, the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 can hold (back up) stored data even when the power supply to the power supply board is cut off. When the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on and the above initialization signal is input to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, the data (backup data) backed up by the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 is stored. Cleared.

  The initialization switch 544 is divided into one for the main board 102 and one for the payout control board 103, and the backed up data is cleared separately on the main board 102 and the payout control board 103. It may be. Further, for example, when the initialization switch 544 is operated when the power is turned on, the backup data for the main board 102 and a part of the backup data of the payout control board 103 are cleared and added to the payout control board 103. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the remaining backup data on the payout control board 103 is cleared when the payout initialization switch (not shown) is further operated.

  As described above, the RWM 503 in the main board 102 can hold (backup) data by being supplied with the backup voltage from the power board 251 even after the pachinko gaming machine 10 is powered off. That is, the RWM 503 is provided with a backup area 503a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data. This backup area 503a has a stack pointer or the like when the power is cut off when the power is cut off (when a power interruption occurs) due to the occurrence of a power failure (including a so-called instantaneous power failure due to a momentary voltage drop). This is an area for storing values such as registers and I / O. Then, with the normal power-on or power failure cancellation, the state of the main board 102 and the like is returned to the state before power-off based on the information in the backup area 503a.

  Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by power-off processing (described later), and restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is executed in control start processing (described later) at power-on. As the backup area 503a, an RWM (external RWM) externally connected to the CPU 501 and connected to a backup power source can be used.

  In addition, the RWM 513 on the payout control board 103 can also hold (backup) data by supplying a backup voltage from the power board 251 after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off, similarly to the RWM 503 on the main board 102. It has become. That is, the RWM 513 of the payout control board 103 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data. This backup area 513a stores values such as a stack pointer, each register, and I / O when the power is cut off when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (when a power interruption occurs). Area. Then, with the normal power-on or power-off, the state of the payout control board 103 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information in the backup area 513a.

  Writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is cut off by the power-off process in the payout control board 103, and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the control start process in the payout control board 103 when the power is turned on. Is done. As the backup area 513a, as in the case of the main board 102, it is possible to use an RWM (external RWM) externally connected to the CPU 511 and connected to a backup power source.

  The aforementioned main board 102 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 that monitors the power interruption due to the power failure as described above. The power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs a power failure signal (power failure signal) to the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. More specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 monitors the DC stable voltage (for example, 30 volts), which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541 of the power supply board 251, and this voltage becomes less than the predetermined voltage. In the case, the occurrence of a power failure (power cutoff) is detected, and the above-described power interruption signal is output. Based on the input of such a power interruption signal, the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 execute a predetermined power-off process.

  Note that the electrical characteristics of the main board 102 and the like indicate that the DC stable voltage has a sufficient time for execution of a predetermined process such as a power-off process even after the DC stable voltage becomes lower than a predetermined voltage at which an interruption signal is output. In the meantime, the output of the voltage of 5 volts which is the drive voltage of the control system is maintained at a normal value.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the payout control board 103 via the main board 102 or is separately supplied to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 separately. You may make it do.

  Further, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 described above can be disposed in a part other than the main board 102. For example, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be formed on the power supply substrate 251 and a power interruption signal may be input from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to each substrate on the power supply substrate 251. It is also possible to omit the input of the power interruption signal from the main board 102 to the payout control board 103. Further, the main board 102 may be able to exhibit the function of the power supply board 251. In this case, it is conceivable to form the power supply unit 541 on the main substrate 102.

  Furthermore, a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided on the payout control board 103, and the power supply interruption processing based on the output of the power interruption signal and the power interruption signal may be performed on each of the payout control board 103 and the main board 102. Further, out of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, only the payout control board 103 may be provided with the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 so that the power interruption signal is transmitted from the payout control board 103 to the main board 102.

  The main CPU 501 and the payout CPU 511 described above are provided with an NMI (non-maskable interrupt) terminal. In addition, the execution of the power-off process described above includes a hardware type that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) based on the input of a power-off signal indicating a voltage drop to the NMI terminal of the main CPU, a timer A periodic interrupt process based on the setting includes software-like ones that are performed by checking a power-off flag that is set when a voltage drop is detected.

In the present embodiment, power-off processing is performed based on hardware triggers by NMI. The signal input to the NMI terminal can be performed, for example, by inputting a power interruption signal from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to the NMI terminal. Here, the signal input to the NMI terminal may be generated not only when the power interruption signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 but also due to noise mixed into the signal line connected to the NMI terminal. It should be noted that the shift to the power-off process can be performed based on a software method as will be described later as another embodiment. Further, it is possible to set a power-off flag based on a power-off signal input to the NMI terminal, and to trigger execution of power-off processing.
<Basic functions of main board>

  Next, basic functions of the main board 102 will be described. The main board 102 according to the present embodiment performs various functions such as a ball entry determination, a lottery, and a command transmission, for example, by the functions of the above-described components (see FIG. 4). For this reason, the main board 102 can be grasped as having functional means (to be described later) for performing these various functions. Similarly, the sub main board 301, the sub sub board 302, and the like, which are other control boards, are also provided with functional means for performing various functions.

FIG. 5 shows representative functional means in each of the main board 102, the sub main board 301, and the sub sub board 302. Among these, the main board 102 includes the entrance determination means 110, the first lottery means 111, the second lottery means 112, the general drawing lottery means 113, the hold control means 114, the main display control means 115, the special game control means 116, Specific game control means 117, opening / closing control means 118, prior information notification means 119, main command transmission means 120, and the like are provided. Then, the main board 102, by these functional means, as described in order below, lottery concerning special symbols, lottery concerning ordinary symbols, hold control, main control display, special games, specific games, opening / closing control, advance information Execute notifications and so on.
<< Lottery function for special design >>

  The above-described winning determination means 110 determines whether or not a game ball has entered each winning opening (each operation opening, various start winning openings, various large winning openings, general winning openings, etc.). More specifically, the entrance determination means 110 receives passage information when the game ball passes through the left operation port 68a (or right operation port 68b), and the game ball receives the left operation port 68a (or right operation port 68b). ). Further, the winning determination means 110 receives the first start winning information (or second start winning information) when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 62 (or the second start winning opening 63), and the game It is determined that the ball has entered the first start winning opening 62 (or the second start winning opening 63).

  In addition, the winning determination means 110, when the game ball has entered the first grand prize opening 91 (or the second big prize opening 92), the first grand prize opening winning information (or the second big winning prize winning information) And it is determined that the game ball has entered the first grand prize opening 91 (or the second big prize opening 92). Further, the winning determination means 110 receives the general winning information when the game ball enters the general winning opening 72 and determines that the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening 72.

  The aforementioned first lottery means 111 executes the first lottery corresponding to the ball entering the first start winning opening 62. That is, the first lottery means 111 has the functions of a first lottery value acquisition means 121, a first winning / failure determining means 122, a first symbol determining means 123, and a first pattern determining means 124. The result of the first lottery is represented by the first special symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 70 of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 6A). Note that functional units such as the first lottery value acquisition unit 121 provided in the first lottery unit 111 will be described later.

  Similarly, the above-described second lottery means 112 executes the second lottery corresponding to the ball entering the second start winning opening 63. That is, the second lottery means 112 has the functions of a second lottery value acquisition means 125, a second winning / failure determining means 126, a second symbol determining means 127, and a second pattern determining means 128. The result of the second lottery is represented by the second special symbol stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display unit 71 of the main control display device 53 described above. Each functional means such as the second lottery value acquisition means 125 provided in the second lottery means 112 will be described later.

  The first lottery value acquisition means 121 provided in the first lottery means 111 described above, when the ball enters the first start winning opening 62, the value of the big hit random number related to the first lottery is used as the first winning / failing lottery value. Get as. Also, the second lottery value acquisition means 125 provided in the second lottery means 112 described above receives the value of the big hit random number related to the second lottery as the second winning or failing chance when the player enters the second starting prize opening 63. Obtained as a lottery value.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number acquired as the first winning / failing lottery value and the jackpot random number acquired as the second winning / failing lottery value are generated by a two-stage random number generating means. More specifically, the random number used for the big hit lottery is generated by the calculation (addition) using the hardware random number (hard random number) and the software random number (soft random number) described above. For example, a built-in random number generated by a 16-bit random number circuit can be used as the hardware random number. As the software random number, it is possible to use a value updated for each interrupt by a random number generation program in software. Note that one of hardware random numbers and software random numbers may be used. Details of hardware random numbers and software random numbers will be described later.

The first winning / failing judging means 122 in the first lottery means 111 makes a judgment of winning / notifying based on the first winning / notifying lottery value, and whether or not the first winning / losing lottery value corresponds to a predetermined value (winning value) to be won. Judging. Similarly, the second winner determination unit 126 in the second lottery unit 112 performs a hit determination based on the above-described second winner / lottery value, and the second winner / lottery value becomes a predetermined value (winning value) that is a hit. Judge whether it is applicable. In the success / failure determination by the first success / failure determination unit 122 and the second success / failure determination unit 126, a success / failure determination table in which a correspondence between the first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value and the lottery result of the big hit lottery is used. Details of the success / failure determination table will be described later.
<< Symbol drawing function related to special symbols >>

  Subsequently, the symbol lottery by the first symbol determining means 123 and the second symbol determining means 127 will be described. First, the first symbol determination means 123 determines the type of the first special symbol in the case of winning one of the big wins in the big hit lottery relating to the first special symbol, as a big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery (FIG. 8 ( Determine based on a). The jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery defines the relationship between the first symbol lottery value, which is a random value (symbol random number) related to symbol determination, and the type of the first special symbol.

  Here, the first symbol lottery value may also be referred to as “design random number per symbol”, “symbol random number”, or the like related to the first special symbol. Further, in this embodiment, the bonus type is included in the bonus type, and the first symbol determination means 123 is the type of the first special symbol when the bonus symbol lottery related to the first special symbol is won. Is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 9C).

  The first symbol lottery value is acquired in response to a ball entering the first start winning opening 62 as in the case of the above-mentioned first winning / failing lottery value. Also, the type of the first special symbol is associated with the type of winning, and the type of big hit or the presence / absence of small hit is determined in association with the acquired first symbol lottery value. In other words, the first symbol lottery value is acquired upon entering the first start winning opening 62, and the first symbol lottery value corresponding to the first symbol lottery value is determined based on the first lottery symbol determination table at a predetermined timing. One special symbol and winning type are determined. The details of the jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery will be described later.

  The second symbol determination means 127 described above determines the type of the second special symbol in the case of winning one of the big hit lotteries related to the second special symbol, and determines the type of second special symbol for the second lottery symbol determination table (FIG. 9 ( Determine based on b)). The second lottery jackpot symbol determination table is similar to the above-mentioned first lottery symbol determination table, the second symbol lottery value which is a random value (symbol random number) related to symbol determination, and the second special symbol. Defines the relationship between types.

  Here, the second symbol lottery value may also be referred to as “design random number per symbol” or “symbol random number” related to the second special symbol. Further, in this embodiment, the bonus type includes the small bonus, and the second symbol determining means 127 is the type of the second special symbol when the winner is won in the big bonus lottery related to the second special symbol. Is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 9C).

  The second symbol lottery value is acquired in response to a ball entering the second start winning prize opening 63 as in the case of the above-described second success / failure lottery value. The type of the second special symbol is associated with the type of winning, and the type of big hit or the presence / absence of small hit is determined in association with the acquired second symbol lottery value. In other words, the second symbol lottery value is acquired at the time of entering the second start winning opening 63, and the second symbol lottery value corresponding to the second symbol lottery value is determined at a predetermined timing based on the big lottery symbol determination table for the second lottery. 2 The special symbol and the type of jackpot are determined. The details of the jackpot symbol determination table for the second lottery will be described later.

Further, in this embodiment, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the symbol type is determined based on the symbol random number provided separately from the jackpot random number. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, the special symbol type may be associated with the big hit random number in advance, and the special symbol type may be determined based on the acquired big hit random value.
<< Change pattern lottery function for special design >>

  Next, the variation pattern lottery performed by the first pattern determination unit 124 and the second pattern determination unit 128 will be described. First, the first pattern determining means 124 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 70 based on a special symbol variation pattern table (described later). The special figure variation pattern table defines the relationship between a number of special figure variation patterns and a first pattern lottery value that is a random value (variation pattern random number) related to the variation pattern determination of the first special symbol.

  The first pattern lottery value is acquired in response to a ball entering the first start winning opening 62 as in the case of the above-mentioned first winning / failing lottery value. Further, the second pattern lottery value is acquired when the player enters the second start winning opening 63, as in the case of the above-described second winning / lottery lottery value. Furthermore, the variation patterns related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are different in various game situations such as, for example, big hits, out of reach, presence / absence of reach, degree of reach development, presence / absence of time reduction, number of holds, etc. A plurality of decision elements corresponding to the above are provided. In this embodiment, the total number of variation patterns reaches about 100.

  Further, each variation pattern is associated with the first pattern lottery value or the second pattern lottery value, and is linked to the acquired first pattern lottery value or the second pattern lottery value and varies according to the game situation. The pattern is fixed. In other words, the first pattern lottery value is acquired when the first start winning opening 62 is entered, and the second pattern lottery value is obtained when the second start winning opening 63 is entered. Then, at a predetermined timing, a variation pattern corresponding to the game situation is determined based on the special figure variation pattern table.

  The variation pattern related to the special symbol (special symbol variation pattern) defines the time (variation time) from the start to the end of variation in the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special figure fluctuation pattern defines various fluctuation times, such as about 1 second to several minutes, depending on the type. That is, each special symbol variation pattern has a variation time defined as an end condition for variation display. In the first special symbol display unit 70 or the second special symbol display unit 71 (see FIG. 6A). The special symbol is displayed in a stopped state after the specified variation time has elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation display.

  It should be noted that the relationship between the length of variation time in various special figure variation patterns is not necessarily determined uniformly according to the game situation. In other words, with regard to the special figure fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time may be common in different types of special figure fluctuation patterns. Further, even if the special figure variation patterns are set for different game situations, the variation times may be common to each other. Further, with regard to the special figure variation pattern, the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected at the time reduction may be longer than the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected at the non-time reduction.

More specifically, for many of the special figure fluctuation patterns to be selected at the time reduction, the fluctuation time is set shorter than that of the special figure fluctuation pattern to be selected at the non-time reduction. However, in the present embodiment, for example, a special figure fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the number of suspensions is four, such as a non-time-short time, the fluctuation time compared to a specific special-pattern fluctuation pattern at the time-short time The short ones are included.
<< Various lottery functions related to normal symbols >>

  Next, the above-described ordinary drawing lottery means 113 will be described. The ordinary drawing lottery means 113 includes an ordinary figure lottery value acquiring means 129, an ordinary figure determination / notification determining means 130, an ordinary symbol determining means 131, and an ordinary figure pattern determining means 132. When the entrance determination unit 110 detects the passing of the game ball at each of the operation ports 68a and 68b, the base drawing lottery means 113 draws the normal symbol lottery (the base drawing lottery) based on the detection result. ).

  In this general drawing lottery, a general drawing lottery value, which is a random number (normal symbol random number) related to a normal symbol, is acquired by the general symbol lottery value acquisition unit 129, and the general symbol determination table 131 stores the general symbol determination table. Referenced. In the common figure determination table, the correspondence between the common figure lottery values and the types of normal symbols is defined. Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol linked to the standard drawing lottery value is a hit, and if the hit is true, the hit type is determined. Is done.

  Further, the regular pattern determining means 132 determines a variation pattern (ordinary variation pattern) related to a normal symbol. Each normal map variation pattern is associated with a general map pattern lottery value, which is a random number related to the normal map variation pattern (general pattern variation pattern random number), and is associated with the acquired general map pattern lottery value, and the state of the game The customary pattern variation pattern according to is determined. In other words, an ordinary figure pattern lottery value is acquired at the time of entering the left working port 68a or the right working port 68b, and at a predetermined timing, based on the usual figure variation pattern table, the usual figure variation pattern corresponding to the game situation Is determined. The normal variation pattern is provided for each determinant corresponding to a difference in various game situations such as, for example, hitting time, off-time, hitting type, presence / absence of time saving, and the like.

  The normal pattern variation pattern defines the time (variation time) from the start to the end of the variation in the normal symbol variation display. And the usual fluctuation pattern prescribes | regulates several fluctuation | variation time, for example from about less than 1 second to about several seconds according to the kind. In other words, each ordinary pattern variation pattern has a variation time defined as the end condition of variation display, and the normal symbol variation display is started in the above-described ordinary symbol display unit 59 (see FIG. 6A). When the specified fluctuation time elapses, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. When the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is a predetermined winning symbol, the second start winning port 63 is expanded in a manner corresponding to the winning type.

  The details of the normal drawing lottery value, the normal drawing pattern lottery value, and the opening pattern of the second start winning opening 63 relating to the normal symbol will be described later. In the present embodiment, the determination of success / failure is performed based on the determined normal symbol after the determination of the normal symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. And the type of the common symbol may be determined based on the result of the determination. In addition, the lottery value for the normal symbol may be provided, and the lottery for the normal symbol may be performed, and then the normal lottery may be performed according to the result of the lottery.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the common figure lottery value, which is a random number related to a normal symbol, and the common figure pattern lottery value are created using only software random numbers. Each random number can be a hardware random number or a combination of a hardware random number and a software random number.
<< Functions related to holding special symbols >>

  Next, the above-described hold control unit 114 will be described. The holding control unit 114 includes a first holding unit 133, a second holding unit 134, and a general drawing holding unit 135. Of these, the first holding means 133 is acquired by entering a ball when the predetermined start condition for the first special symbol is not satisfied when a new ball enters the first start winning opening 62. In addition, information (first special figure holding storage information) related to various random numbers (first winning / losing lottery value, first symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily stored. And until the variation start condition is satisfied, the start of the variation display of the first special symbol related to the above-mentioned entry is not permitted. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the first special symbol is set to four, and the hold related to the first special symbol is possible within a range not exceeding the upper limit value.

  The first special symbol or the second special symbol generated before the above-mentioned entrance is completed after the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that was executed when the above-mentioned entrance was made ends. In the case where there is no hold related to, the change start condition related to the first special symbol is satisfied, and a new symbol change related to the first special symbol is permitted. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the second game is executed with priority over the first game, the second special figure holding storage information by the second holding means 134 is obtained by the first holding means 133. It is preferentially digested over the first special figure hold storage information. Thus, for the first special symbol, the variation start condition is that all symbol variations corresponding to the second special symbol hold storage information of the second special symbol are completed and all symbols are digested.

  The above-described second holding means 134 is also acquired by entering a ball when the predetermined start condition for variation according to the second special symbol is not satisfied when a new ball enters the second start winning opening 63. In addition, information related to various random numbers (second winning / failing lottery value, second symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily stored. Then, the variation display of the first special symbol relating to the above-mentioned entry is not permitted until the variation start condition is satisfied.

When the change display of the second special symbol that was executed when the above-mentioned entry was made ends, and there is no hold on the second special symbol that occurred before the above-mentioned entry, The variation start condition related to the second special symbol is established, and a new symbol variation related to the second special symbol is permitted. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the second special symbol is set to four similarly to the first special symbol, and the hold value related to the second special symbol is within a range not exceeding this upper limit value. Is possible.
<< Functions related to holding regular symbols >>

  Next, the above-described ordinary map holding means 135 will be described. The general-purpose holding means 135, when there is a ball entering at the operation ports 68a and 68b (see FIG. 1), if the predetermined variation start condition related to the normal symbol is not satisfied, Information related to the drawing lottery value etc. (usually reserved storage information) is temporarily stored. Then, until the variation start condition is satisfied, the variation display of the normal symbol related to the above-mentioned entry is not permitted. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the normal symbol is set to four, and the normal symbol can be reserved within a range not exceeding the upper limit value.

When the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display that was executed when the above-mentioned entry was made ends, and there is no hold related to the normal symbol that occurred before the above-mentioned entry, the normal symbol The variation start condition is satisfied, and a new symbol variation related to the normal symbol is permitted.
<< Functions related to main control display >>

  Next, the main display control means 115 will be described. The main display control means 115 includes a first special figure control means 136, a second special figure control means 137, a general figure control means 138, a hold display control means 139, and other display control means 140. Of these, the first special figure control means 136 has no hold related to the second special symbol, and the first lottery means 111 determined by the first lottery means 111 if the change start condition related to the first special symbol is satisfied. In accordance with the variation pattern of one special symbol, the first special symbol display unit 70 (see FIG. 6A) displays the variation of the first special symbol (for example, blinking display in which the LED indicators M and N blink every 100 msec). I do. Then, when the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the first special symbol display unit 70 with the determined symbol.

  Furthermore, the second special symbol control means 137 follows the variation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112 according to the variation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112 if the above-described variation start condition relating to the second special symbol is satisfied. In FIG. 6A, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the determined symbol in the second special symbol display unit 71.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the display during the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the LED indicator lights M and N blink simultaneously in the first special symbol, and the LED indicator light W in the second special symbol. , X are blinking simultaneously. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, eight LED display lamps G to N (Q to X) are sequentially turned on in a predetermined pattern, or all of G to N (Q to X) are blinked at the same time, so that fluctuation display is performed. May be performed.

  Further, the normal symbol control means 138 follows the normal symbol display unit 59 (see FIG. 6 (FIG. 6)) according to the variation pattern of the normal symbol determined by the general symbol lottery means 113 if the above-described change start condition relating to the normal symbol is satisfied. In a), normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern has elapsed, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at the normal symbol display unit 59 with the determined symbol.

Furthermore, the hold display control means 139 displays the number of holds related to the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol described above. Then, the number of the reserved numbers is displayed on the first special symbol storage display unit (LED display lamps O and P) and the second special symbol storage display unit (LED display) of the main control display device 53 shown in FIG. Lamps Y, Z) and the normal symbol memory display (LED display lamps C, D). The other display control means 140 controls the display on the main control display device 53 other than the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the normal symbol, and the various hold displays described above.
<< Functions related to special games >>

Next, the special game control means 116 will be described. The special game control means 116 determines that the special game operation condition is satisfied when the first special symbol is stopped in a predetermined big win mode when the big win is won in the first lottery, and the above-mentioned first big prize is held. A special game is executed in which the mouth 91 is opened in a predetermined manner according to the type of jackpot as described above. Also, the special game control means 116 determines that the special game operation condition is satisfied when the second special symbol is stopped in a predetermined big win mode when the big win is won in the second lottery, and the second game described above is performed. As described above, a special game is executed in which the special winning opening 92 is opened in a predetermined manner according to the type of jackpot.
<< Functions related to specific games >>

  Next, the specific game control means 117 will be described. The specific game control means 117 performs control related to the above-described probability change, time reduction, and the like. The specific game control means 117 shifts the game state after the end of the special game to a probable change state or a short time state according to the type of jackpot. In this embodiment, the probability variation state is attached to all types of jackpots, and is continued until the total number of times of variation display after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). During the probability changing state, the winning probability of the big hit by the first lottery means 111 and the second lottery means 112 is maintained at a higher value than in the normal time when the probability is not changed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the time reduction state continues until the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of end conditions (for example, 100 times) from the end of the special game. Is done. Furthermore, during the time reduction, the first pattern determination means 124 and the second pattern determination means 128 may change the time variation pattern so that the variation display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is substantially shorter than the normal state. Select.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the easy-to-enter game is executed as the specific game, and in this easy-to-enter game, the opening / closing control of the second start winning opening 63 is executed. The opening / closing control of the second start winning prize port 63 is controlled by an opening / closing control means 118 described later. For this reason, the specific game control means 117 causes the open / close control means 118 to perform predetermined opening / closing control of the second start winning opening 63 during the specific game state. Note that specific modes of probability change, time reduction, and easy entry game during a specific game will be described later.
<< Functions related to open / close control >>

  Next, the aforementioned opening / closing control means 118 will be described. The opening / closing control means 118 controls the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory of the second start winning opening 63 and the first large winning opening 91 and the second large winning opening 92. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific manner, the opening / closing control means 118 sends an opening instruction to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 76 to open the ordinary electric accessory at the second start winning prize port 63. Further, the opening / closing control means 118 performs control for sending an opening instruction to the first grand prize port solenoid 80 and the second grand prize port solenoid 81 in the special game, and the first grand prize port 91 and the second grand prize port. 92 is opened.

Further, the opening / closing control means 118 executes opening / closing control of the second start winning prize port 63 during the normal game. Furthermore, the opening / closing control means 118 executes the opening / closing control of the second start winning opening 63 based on an opening pattern related to a specific game as will be described later in the probability change state and the short time state after the special game.
<< Functions related to prior information notification >>

  Next, the above-described advance information notification unit 119 will be described. The prior information notifying means 119 is acquired regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the pitch is put on hold when the first start winning slot 62 or the second start winning slot 63 is pitched. Further, a process for transmitting information related to various random number values to the sub board (here, the sub main board 301) as prior notification information is performed.

  As the above-mentioned advance notice information, for example, whether the prior notice information is related to the first game or the second game, information indicating the acquired first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value, etc. Can be illustrated. In addition, as the prior notification information other than these, each of the above-mentioned winning / not-winning lottery values (first winning / notifying lottery value or second winning / notifying lottery value), each symbol lottery value (first symbol lottery value or second symbol lottery value) Examples of information include what kind of success / failure range, symbol range, and pattern range each pattern lottery value (first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value) belongs to.

Note that transmission of such advance notification information enables various pre-reading effects on the sub-board 104 side. And as a pre-reading effect, a hold notice, a continuous notice, etc. can be illustrated, but these details are mentioned below.
<< Functions related to command transmission >>

Next, the main command transmission unit 120 will be described. The main command transmission unit 120 transmits a command from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301. The command transmission from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 includes various information at various timings such as at the time of winning a start, at the start of special symbol fluctuation, at the special symbol fluctuation stop, at the occurrence of big hit. The command transmission timing and transmission contents will be described later.
<Basic function of sub-board>

  Next, basic functions of the sub-board 104 will be described. In the present embodiment, the sub board 104 includes a sub main board 301 and a sub sub board 302. By the operation of the above-described configuration (see FIG. 4), command reception from the main board 102, production pattern determination, production display control. It performs various functions such as production execution. Therefore, as with the main board 102, the sub board 104 can be grasped as having functional means (to be described later) that perform various functions.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the sub main board 301 includes a main command receiving unit 141, an effect pattern determining unit 142, a sub main command transmitting unit 143, and the like. Further, the sub-main board 301 is provided with functional means such as sound control means 144 for controlling speaker output and the like, and light control means 145 for controlling game effect lamp output and the like. In addition, the term “lamp” in this embodiment has a meaning including LEDs and the like.

  The sub main board 301 receives various commands from the main board 102 by the main command receiving unit 141. Further, the effect pattern determination unit 142 determines an effect pattern corresponding to the above-described special figure fluctuation pattern (first special figure fluctuation pattern or second special figure fluctuation pattern) based on various commands from the main board 102. Here, the relationship between the special figure fluctuation pattern and the production pattern is a relation in which a plurality of production patterns are associated with one special figure fluctuation pattern, or only one production with respect to one fluctuation pattern. There is a relationship in which patterns are associated. Further, the effect pattern determining means 142 determines a combination of stop symbols of the effect symbols 190 in the case of a loss.

  The effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining unit 142 includes a display effect displayed on the effect display device 60 and information for designating a sound effect and a light effect performed together with the display effect as necessary. The display effects described above include a display pattern of the effect symbol 190, an effect display pattern that encourages the expectation of the big hit or suggests a high expectation degree of the big hit during the variable display of the effect symbol 190, etc. It is. Further, the effect pattern determining means 142 determines the combination of stop symbols of the effect symbol 190 when the result of the big hit lottery on the main board 102 is out of place.

  When the effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determining unit 142, effect pattern information indicating the determined effect pattern is transmitted to the sub-sub board 302 as a sub-main command via the sub-main command transmitting unit 143. Further, the command transmitted from the sub main board 301 to the sub sub board 302 includes sound information determined by the sound control means 144 described above.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-sub board 302 includes sub-main command receiving means 146, effect execution control means 147, and the like. In the sub-sub board 302, the production execution control means 147 sequentially outputs necessary image data to the liquid crystal unit 42 (see FIG. 4) based on the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301, thereby forming an animation image. Then, the effect display device 60 displays the effect animation. Further, the effect execution control means 147 operates the above-described sound control circuit 537 (see FIG. 4) provided on the sub-sub board 302 to execute control related to output adjustment of the various speakers 21. Details of various effects will be described later.

The functional units included in the main substrate 102, the sub main substrate 301, and the sub sub substrate 302 have been described above. However, any one of the functional units included in the main substrate 102 is included in the sub main substrate 301. It is also possible to do. Similarly, any one of the functional means included in the sub main board 301 can be included in the main board 102 or the sub sub board 302. Further, the functional means of the sub sub board 302 can be included in the sub main board 301.
<Specific aspects of various lotteries on the main board>
<< Lottery for Special Design >>

  Next, a specific aspect of the lottery (lottery lottery) related to special symbols performed on the main board 102 will be described. FIG. 8A shows a success / failure determination table used in the present embodiment. In this success / failure determination table, a random number per special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “correction random number”) and the first game related to the first game. The correspondence between the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery related to the second game is defined. That is, the range of the random number is shown at the left end in FIG. 8A, and the lottery result relating to the first lottery is shown at the center in the figure. Furthermore, the lottery result concerning the first lottery is shown at the right end in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, the range of the random number is “0-63238”, “63239-63402”, “63403-64878”, “64879-65429”, “65430-65534”, and “ 65535 ". Further, the results of the first lottery and the second lottery include “out of”, “normal change time big hit”, “probability big hit”, and “small hit”.

  Among these, “missing” is a lottery result that is always lost regardless of whether the probability state is normal or the above-described probability variation. The “normal chance big change big hit” is a lottery result that always wins regardless of whether the probability state is normal or the above-mentioned probability change. Further, the “big hit at probability change” is a lottery result that is not a hit at normal time but is a hit only at the probability change. The “small hit” is a lottery result in which the hit type is a small hit.

  That is, the success / failure random value range in the present embodiment is “0 to 65535”, and the number of success / failure random numbers is 65536. In both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random value range of “0 to 63238” and the random value of “65535” are assigned the lottery result of “out of”. The random value range “63239 to 63402” is assigned “normal time probability change big hit”, and the random number range “63403 to 64878” is assigned “probability change big hit”.

  Furthermore, in the random number range “64879 to 65429”, “small hit” is assigned for the first lottery, and “out” is assigned for the second lottery. The random number range “65430 to 65534” is assigned “small hit” in both the first lottery and the second lottery.

  If the random value obtained as described above (hereinafter referred to as “win / fail lottery value”) is within the range of “0 to 63238”, the result of the pass / fail lottery is determined regardless of the probability state. It becomes “out of”. In addition, when the winning / losing lottery value in the second lottery is within the range of “64879-65429” and when the winning / losing lottery value in the first lottery and second lottery is “65535”, the probability state is also reached. Regardless, the result of the success / failure lottery is “out of place”. In other words, if the winning / losing lottery value is “0” which is the lower limit value of the winning / failing random value range or “65535” which is the upper limit value, the lottery result is “out of place”.

  Further, in the normal state where the probability state is low probability, the winning lottery value is only hit when the winning lottery value falls within the range of “63239 to 63402” in both the first lottery and the second lottery. On the other hand, at the time of probability change, the winning range is expanded, and not only when the winning / losing lottery value falls within the range of “63239 to 63402” but also when it falls within the range of “63403 to 64878”, it becomes a big hit.

  In this way, a group consisting of consecutive numbers for each lottery result is formed in the numerical range of the random numbers. For example, in the first lottery, as shown in FIG. 8A, the numerical value range “0 to 63238” is the first lost group, “63239 to 63402” is the first big hit group, and “63403 to 64878” is It is the second jackpot group. Further, the numerical range “64879 to 65429” is the first small hit group, “65430 to 65534” is the second small hit group, and “65535” is the second deviation. Here, “65535” can also be referred to as a second outlier group.

  For example, in the first lottery, the number of random numbers corresponding to the first deviation is 63239. Further, the number of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot 1 (first jackpot group) is 164, and the number of random numbers corresponding to the jackpot 2 (second jackpot group) is 1476. Further, the number of random numbers corresponding to the small hit 1 (first small hit group) is 551, the random number corresponding to the small hit 2 (second small hit group) is 105, and corresponds to the second deviation. The number of random numbers is one. The big hit probability at the normal probability in the first game is 164/65536, and the big hit probability at the high probability is 1640 (= 1476 + 164) / 65536.

  As described above, the success / failure random number can take a value in the range of “0 to 65535”. In this embodiment, the success / failure random number is a hardware random number in the range of “0 to 65535” and “0”. It is obtained by adding together with a soft random number (software random number) per special symbol in a numerical value range of “˜65520”. The built-in random number is a value extracted from the built-in random number table. In the built-in random number table, numerical values in a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 65535”) are arranged in an arbitrary order, and a count value is incremented by 1 by hardware (counter circuit) using a clock input to the CPU 501. Each time a numerical value arbitrarily arranged in the built-in random number table becomes an acquisition target according to the arrangement order regardless of the magnitude relation of the numerical values. Then, the numerical values in the acquired internal random number table are extracted and used for calculation with the soft random numbers. It can be said that such a built-in random number is a random number generated by a random number generation device including a hardware configuration.

  On the other hand, the software random number is a random number generated by a random number generation device having a software configuration in which numerical values arranged in ascending order or descending order are obtained by adding a count value by 1 for each interrupt by a programmed counter. . In this embodiment, the random number of soft random numbers per special symbol is “65521” which is a prime number, and the software random number added to the internal random number which is the addition source is more than the internal random number. The random value range (size of random number) is set small. Here, the generation of the random number is not limited to simply adding the built-in random number and the software random number, but for example, adding or adding / subtracting / multiplying / adding / subtracting a predetermined number is performed. , Another calculation may be used.

In this embodiment, the success / failure random number is generated by a combination of a hardware random number and a software random number. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
<< Lottery for special symbols >>

  Next, a specific aspect of the symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) related to the special symbol performed on the main board 102 will be described. FIGS. 9A to 9C show various symbol determination tables. In the present embodiment, each symbol determination table is used when a big hit or a small hit occurs in the above-mentioned lottery. It has become.

  Of these, FIG. 9 (a) is a jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery (first jackpot symbol determination table), and FIG. 9 (b) is a jackpot symbol determination table for the second lottery (second jackpot symbol determination table). Determination table). FIG. 9C is a symbol determination table for small hits (small hit symbol determination table) that is referred to when the success / failure determination result in the first lottery or the second lottery is small hit. In the present embodiment, many kinds (for example, about 50 kinds) of special symbols are displayed by using the first special symbol display unit 70 and the second special symbol display unit 71 shown in FIG. However, in the following description, it is assumed that there are only nine types of special symbols “0” to “8” so that the description and illustration are not complicated.

  As shown at the left end in FIG. 9A, in the first lottery, the symbol random number range related to the symbol lottery is “0 to 999”, and the number of symbol random numbers is 1000. Furthermore, the design random number value ranges are divided into groups of “0 to 124”, “125 to 499”, “500 to 714”, “715 to 734”, “735 to 799”, and “800 to 999”. As shown in the figure, special symbols “7”, “5”, “3”, “1”, “0”, and “2” are assigned to each symbol random value range. Each special symbol is assigned a jackpot type. In this embodiment, the special symbols “7” and “5” are assigned the above-mentioned 16R probability variation, and the other special symbols are assigned the above-mentioned 16R probability variation. 4R probability variation is assigned.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9B, in the second lottery, the symbol random number range related to the symbol lottery is “0 to 999” as in the first lottery, and the number of symbol random numbers is 1000. ing. Furthermore, the design random number value ranges are divided into “0 to 499”, “500 to 699”, “670 to 799”, and “800 to 999” groups. As shown in the figure, special symbols “7”, “3”, “0”, and “2” are assigned. In this embodiment, the special symbol “7” is assigned the above-mentioned 16R probability variation, and the other special symbols are allotted the above-mentioned 4R probability variation.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a big hit, a special symbol (non-16R big hit symbol) that is a big hit other than the 16R big hit is added to the upper limit value “999” in the numerical range of the above-described symbol random number. Assigned. Not limited to this, the lottery result of the non-16R big hit symbol may be assigned to the lower limit value “0”, and the lottery result of the non-16R big hit symbol may be assigned to both the upper limit value and the lower limit value.

In the present embodiment, the symbol lottery relating to the special symbol is performed by software random numbers, and the random number generation process is simplified as compared with the random lottery using both software random numbers and hardware random numbers. This is because the lottery is likely to be subject to fraud, whereas the symbol lottery is less likely to be fraudulent than the lottery, so the crystal oscillator required to generate hardware random numbers This is because a configuration that does not require the use of such components is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to create a design random number using only a hardware random number or a combination of a hardware random number and a software random number.
<< Change pattern lottery related to special design >>

  Next, a specific mode of lottery (variation pattern lottery) related to the variation pattern performed on the main board 102 will be described. FIGS. 10A to 10C show variation pattern tables, and among these, FIG. 10A illustrates the variation for loss that is used when the above-described determination result is “out”. A pattern table is shown. Further, FIG. 10B shows a variation pattern table for 16R big hit used when the above-mentioned success / failure result is “16R big hit”, and FIG. A variation pattern table for non-16R big hit used when “4 big hits” or “small hits” is shown.

  In each variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 10A to 10C, the variation pattern random value range related to the variation pattern lottery is “0-49999”, and the number of design random numbers is 50,000. Furthermore, in the variation pattern table for “out of” shown in FIG. 10A, the variation pattern random value range is divided into groups “0 to 2599”, “2600 to 4999”, and “5000 to 49999”. In addition, fluctuation patterns “super 1” and “super 2” are assigned to the fluctuation pattern random value ranges of “0 to 2599” and “2600 to 4999”, respectively. Furthermore, a fluctuation pattern such as “normal 1”, “normal 2”, or “no reach” is assigned to the fluctuation pattern random value range of “5000 to 49999”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, each variation pattern is largely other than “no reach” accompanied by the above-described effect of displaying the reach (hereinafter referred to as “reach effect”) and “no reach”. Can be divided into “with reach”. Among these, “no reach” designates an effect pattern that does not become a reach among various effect patterns to be described later. In addition, the variation pattern of “no reach” and other “with reach” includes a large number of subdivided variation patterns (for example, about several tens), but here, explanation and illustration are complicated. The fluctuation patterns are grouped comprehensively so that they do not become necessary.

  In other words, the above-mentioned “reach” is always displayed as a combination mode of the effect symbols 190 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B), unless a special effect pattern is included, when it is a big hit. Is. Moreover, even if it is not a big hit, it may be out of reach (reach out) through the “reach” display mode. For this reason, when the player becomes “reach”, the player can expect to develop an effect that reaches a big hit thereafter. On the other hand, if the variation pattern of “no reach” is selected, it will not be “reach” unless a special performance pattern is included. It is not done to speak.

  In addition, the variation times related to the various variation patterns “without reach” are relatively shorter than the variation patterns “with reach”. However, this relationship of variation time represents a trend only, and some variation patterns included in “No Reach” are compared to some variation patterns included in “With Reach”. It is also possible to set a relationship such as long.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A to 10C, the variation patterns of “with reach” described above include “normal 1”, “normal 2”, and “normal 3” variation patterns, which are so-called normal reach, It can be divided into “super 1”, “super 2”, and “super 3” variation patterns which are so-called super reach. Among these, the fluctuation patterns of “Normal 1”, “Normal 2”, and “Normal 3” have a degree of resentment (hereinafter, simply referred to as “skill”) related to a big hit expectation to the player. In comparison with the super reach, the direction with a relatively low reach is designated. In addition, each of the above-mentioned variation patterns of “Super 1”, “Super 2”, and “Super 3” designates an effect with reach that is relatively higher than the normal reach in the degree of resentment to the player. .

  Note that these variation patterns “normal 1” to “normal 3” and “super 1” to “super 3” also include a large number of subdivided variation patterns (for example, about 50). Here, the variation patterns are comprehensively grouped so that explanation and illustration are not complicated. In addition, the fluctuation pattern of “With Reach” “Normal 1” to “Normal 3” and “Super 1” to “Super 3” should be further divided into those for slippage and those for big hit. However, as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10C, common names are used here.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), the variation pattern table for “out of” includes each variation pattern of “super 1”, “super 2”, “normal 1”, “normal 2”, or “no reach”. Is assigned. For this reason, when the result of the lottery determination is “out of”, any one of these variation patterns is selected according to the obtained variation pattern random value. In the variation pattern lottery, a different variation pattern is selected according to the gaming situation such as the number of holds at that time and the gaming state (whether time is short or not). Details of determination of the variation pattern according to these game situations will be described later.

  Subsequently, for the 16R jackpot shown in FIG. 10B, “Super 1” is associated with the group of pattern lottery values “0 to 23519”, and “Super” is assigned to the group of pattern lottery values “23520 to 47039”. 2 ”is associated. Furthermore, “normal 1” is associated with the group of pattern lottery values “47040 to 48999”, and the reach of “normal 2” is associated with the group of pattern lottery values “4900 to 49999”. As described above, in this embodiment, when the determination result is 16R big hit, the variation pattern “with reach” is all selected.

  For “4R big hit” and “small hit” shown in FIG. 10C, “Super 3” is associated with the group of the pattern lottery value “0-23999” and the pattern lottery value “2400-49999”. Is associated with “normal 3”.

  Next, selection of a variation pattern according to the game situation (particularly the number of holds) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the variation pattern lottery according to the game situation will be described in the case where the result of the lottery determination is “out of” (see FIG. 10A). In addition, as an index indicating the game situation, the number of holds is exemplified here.

  FIG. 8B shows the variation pattern table for “out of” in a more detailed manner than FIG. 10A. In FIG. 8B, the variation pattern lottery value is shown on the front side of the left end, and the number of holds is shown on the top of the top row. The number of holds includes a hold number 0 to a hold number 4. Below each hold number column, variation pattern lottery values “0 to 2599”, “2600 to 4999”, and “5000 to 49999” are displayed. The variation pattern assigned to the group is described. Here, in FIG. 8B, the hold number 0 to the hold number 4 are described as “hold 0” to “hold 4”, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, in all of the holding numbers 0 to 4, the fluctuation pattern lottery value “0 to 2599” is assigned the “super 1” fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern lottery value “2600 to 4999” is assigned to “super 2”. ”Is assigned. The fluctuation pattern lottery values “5000 to 49999” are assigned fluctuation patterns of “normal 1”, “normal 2”, and “no reach”. Every one is different.

  In FIG. 8B, the relative relationship between the heights of the description columns “Normal 1”, “Normal 2”, and “No reach” is within the variation pattern lottery value “5000 to 49999”. Represents the difference in the allocation ratio. That is, for the hold number 0 and the hold number 1 (indicated as “hold 0, 1” in the figure), the “normal 1”, “normal 2”, and “no reach” columns are displayed in the high column. The allocation ratios of these variation patterns in the variation pattern lottery value “5000 to 49999” are also approximately the same (about 1/3).

  On the other hand, for the hold number 2, the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “normal 1” is smaller than that of the hold number 0 and the hold number 1, and the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “normal 2” is The same level as “Normal 1”. The allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “no reach” is larger than the case of the hold number 0 and the hold number 1, and as a result, in the case of the hold number 2, the case of the hold number 0 and the hold number 1 In comparison, “no reach” is easily selected, and “normal 1” and “reach 2” are difficult to select.

  In addition, for the hold number 3, the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “Normal 1” is further smaller than that of the hold number of 2, and the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “Normal 2” is “normal 1”. It is about the same. Then, the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “no reach” is larger than that in the case of the number of holds 2 and, as a result, the case of the number of holds 3 is “no reach” compared to the case of the number of holds 2. Are easily selected, and “normal 1” and “reach 2” are difficult to select.

  Furthermore, with respect to the hold number 4, the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “Normal 1” is further smaller than that of the hold number of 3, and the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “Normal 2” is “Normal 1”. It is about the same. Then, the allocation ratio of the fluctuation pattern of “no reach” is larger than that in the case of the number of holds 3 and as a result, the case of the number of holds 4 is “no reach” compared to the case of the number of holds 3. Are easily selected, and “normal 1” and “reach 2” are difficult to select.

  In other words, in this embodiment, as the number of reservations increases, the tendency that “no reach” is easily selected and “normal 1” and “reach 2” are difficult to select is generated. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, the variation time related to the variation pattern of “without reach” is relatively shorter than the variation pattern of “with reach”. There is also a tendency that time is short.

  In the present embodiment, the same variation pattern lottery value is assigned to the hold number 0 and the hold number 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the hold number 1 compared to the hold number 0, “no reach”. It is also possible to assign such that “Normal 1” and “Reach 2” are difficult to select.

  In addition, in FIG. 8B, the number of holds is listed as an attribute related to the gaming situation, but is not limited to the number of holds, for example, whether or not the time is short, whether the probability status of the big hit lottery is high probability Based on various attributes such as whether the game is a first game or a second game, whether the result of the winning lottery is a big hit, and what kind of winning big hit Can be done. For example, in a short period of time, “no reach” is selected with a probability of 90% or more when it is not a big hit, and “normal 1” which is a variation pattern of “with reach” with a probability of 98% or more when a big hit. It is possible to set the variation pattern table so as to generate a tendency that either “reach 2” is selected.

Further, in this embodiment, the variation pattern lottery related to the special symbol is performed by software random numbers as in the case of the symbol lottery described above. The generation process is simplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to create a random number related to a special symbol variation pattern lottery only by a hardware random number, or to create a random number by a combination of a hardware random number and a software random number.
<< Various lotteries related to regular symbols >>

  Next, a specific aspect is demonstrated about the various lottery concerning the above-mentioned normal symbol. First, there are general symbol lottery and general symbol variation pattern lottery for lottery related to ordinary symbols. In these various types of lottery, common symbol random numbers and general symbol variation pattern random numbers which are corresponding random numbers are used. The random number ranges are 0 to 262 for the normal design random numbers and 0 to 232 for the normal variation pattern random numbers, although not shown. In addition, as described above, when performing a lottery determination relating to a normal symbol, it is possible to provide a common figure failure random number and set the range of the common figure failure random number to a predetermined numerical range such as 0 to 282, for example. is there.

  The normal symbols determined by the above-mentioned regular symbol lottery include those linked to the above-mentioned short opening and long opening. And if the value of the acquired common symbol random number corresponds to the short opening, after the normal symbol corresponding to the short opening is stopped and displayed, the second start winning opening 63 is relatively short in time. Will be open. In addition, when a random number value corresponding to hit is acquired in the normal figure determination, if the acquired general symbol random number value corresponds to long open, the normal symbol corresponding to long open will be stopped display After this, the second start winning opening 63 is relatively open for a long time.

  That is, the long release is executed at the time of the specific game as described above, but may be executed at times other than the time of the specific game. The short opening and long opening that are performed at times other than the specific game are referred to as “normal game short open”, “normal short open”, “normal long open”, “normal long open”, etc., respectively. Can be referred to. Note that the winning symbol related to the normal symbol is not limited to the symbol associated with the short opening or the long opening, and may be associated with another opening mode. As this “other opening mode”, for example, middle opening set in the opening time belonging to short opening and long opening can be exemplified.

  Further, with respect to the general pattern variation pattern determined by the above-described general pattern variation pattern random number, the variation time of the normal symbol is defined by the variation pattern. The normal symbol variation time has different tendencies depending on factors such as success / failure, symbols, and gaming state (including the number of holds).

  For example, for the gaming state (non-specific gaming state) that is not the above-mentioned specific game, in the present embodiment, five common variation patterns are provided. More specifically, there are five types of variation times defined by five normal variation patterns during non-specific games: 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, and 10 seconds. On the other hand, the usual figure variation pattern during a specific game is one in this embodiment, and the variation time is shorter than that during a non-specific game (for example, about 2 seconds).

Note that the variation patterns of the normal symbols that can be selected during the specific game may be, for example, a plurality of types with different variation times. By doing so, the opening timing of the second start winning opening 63 that is performed after the end of the fluctuation time at the time of the winning becomes difficult for the player to understand, so that the so-called non-stopping that fires the game ball at the timing is prevented. It becomes possible to do.
<Specific aspects related to specific games>

Next, a specific aspect of the specific game described above will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, certain games, probability variation, short time, and easy entry game are provided. And in a present Example, at least any one of these various games is performed in the aspect according to the result of the big hit lottery. It should be noted that these functions that cause certainty and the like can also be referred to as “privilege functions”.
<< Probability game >>

  The probability change described above is to change the probability state of the subsequent game so that the probability of occurrence of the big hit is higher than the normal probability state when the result of the big hit lottery is a predetermined one. A specific aspect of the big hit lottery in this probability change will be described later. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the duration of the probability variation state (probability variation period) is determined based on the number of times the special symbol is varied.

The number of changes in the special symbol is determined as one time from the change display of the special symbol to the stop display. In this embodiment, the probability variation state is continued until the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the special game ends reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). A function that allows the probability variation period to end before the next big hit occurs can be referred to as an ST function, for example. Further, such a probability change can also be referred to as ST.
<< Variation time reduction game >>

  The above-mentioned time reduction is to shorten the variation time of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) in the main control display device 53 as compared with the case of the normal game. Here, “substantially shortening” is not always shorter than normal games in all cases, and in some cases, when the variation time of special symbols is equivalent to normal games or longer than normal games It can mean that According to this short time, since the variation time of the special symbol is shortened, even if a winning to the start winning port (the first starting winning port 62 and the second starting winning port 63) continuously occurs, a special symbol is generated. The change display and stop display of symbols can be smoothly advanced at short intervals, and it is possible to secure many opportunities for lottery lotteries.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the duration of the short time state (short time period) is determined on the basis of the number of changes in the special symbol, similarly to the probability variation state. In this embodiment, the time-saving state is continued until the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the special game ends reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).

  In this embodiment, the probability variation period and the short time period are set to the same period, but the probability variation period and the short time period may be different from each other. For example, it is possible to set the probability variation period to 104 times and the short time period to 100 times. Further, the probability variation period and the short time period are not limited to being constant. For example, the probability variation period can be any of 4, 25, 100, etc., depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred. Also, the short time period can be set to any one of 25 times, 50 times, 75 times, 100 times, etc., depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred.

  It is also possible to provide a so-called falling lottery function. Examples of the falling lottery include the following. For example, after the probability variation and time reduction reach a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) less than the above-mentioned maximum number of variations (here, 100 times), for each variation of the special symbol until the maximum number of variations is reached, A lottery (specific game end lottery) is executed as to whether or not to end the probability change and time saving. When the specific game end lottery is won, the probability change and the time reduction are ended, and the game state from the next change returns to the normal state without the probability change and the time reduction.

Furthermore, it is not limited to executing both probability change and time saving, and it is also possible to execute only one of them in a specific game. For example, depending on the type of jackpot that has been won, it is possible to give only a short time and not to give a probability change, or to give only a probability change without giving a time reduction.
<< Easy entry game >>

  Next, the above described easy entry game will be described. This easy-to-enter game is a gaming state in which the opening mode of the second start winning opening 63 can more easily accept the game ball than usual. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, the second start winning opening 63 includes the opening and closing blades, and performs the opening operation for a predetermined time when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner. And, when a game that facilitates entering a game is executed, depending on the control mode such as the short time related to the normal symbol, the probability variation related to the normal symbol, the open extension related to the normal electric accessory, or the combination of these control modes, The ease of entering the ball into the second start winning opening 63 is enhanced, and the easy entering state is formed.

  Among the various control modes described above for normal symbols, the short time for normal symbols is a control mode in which the fluctuation time of normal symbols is shorter than the normal state, and the probability variation for normal symbols is the probability of winning for normal symbols. Is a control mode (probability change related to normal symbols) that improves the level of the normal state. Furthermore, the opening extension according to the ordinary electric accessory is a control mode in which the opening time of the second start winning prize port 63 is set longer than the short opening at the normal time (at the time of non-specific game) and the long opening is performed.

  As described above, the easy entry game during a specific game according to the present embodiment uses the three functions of normal symbol time reduction, probability change of open lottery, and open extension of normal electric winnings. Easier to enter 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which one or two of these three functions are used to improve the ease of entering the second start winning a prize opening 63. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which switches between the period which implements at least one of three functions, and the period which is not implemented according to a gaming state.

  The duration of such easy-to-enter game can be determined based on the short period of time related to the special symbol. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the easy-to-enter game is continued during the short time related to the special symbol, and the easy-to-enter game is ended when the short time related to the special symbol ends. In such a case, a normal symbol variation pattern (ordinary symbol variation pattern) in which the symbol variation starts after the special symbol time has ended is provided for normal times (non-specific games). It is possible to be determined from among the variation patterns.

  Furthermore, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory in the easy entry state at the time of the specific game (open mode at the time of the specific game) is referred to as “long open at the time of specific game” or “long open at the time of short time”. It is possible. As a specific mode of this specific game long release, a continuous release mode in which the release period from the start to the end of the release is constituted by one release of about 5 seconds, for example, can be exemplified.

  Further, as other modes, there is an intermittent open mode in which the open period from the start to the end of the open is configured by a plurality of releases. As this intermittent release mode, for example, a total of, for example, 5.2 seconds, 1.60 seconds, and 1.60 seconds, with an interval time for temporarily closing between the open times. An example in which an open time of 52 (= 2.32 + 1.60 + 1.60) seconds is secured can be exemplified. In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to this, an opening pattern based on combinations of opening times of 2.96 seconds, 1.14 seconds, and 1.56 seconds, 1.14 seconds, 1.60 seconds, and 1.60. An opening pattern by combining each opening time of 1 second and 1.14 seconds is also provided.

  In addition, it is also possible to select which of the above-described continuous release mode and intermittent release mode is to be executed by lottery, or which of various intermittent release modes is to be executed. Furthermore, with respect to the intermittent release mode, a part or all of each open time may be constituted by an extremely short open time such as 0.5 seconds.

More specifically, for example, it is possible to repeat the opening for 0.5 seconds three times with an interval time for temporarily closing, thereby ensuring a total opening time of 1.5 seconds. Such an extremely short time opening that prevents entry into the second start winning opening 63 can be referred to as “a short opening during a specific game” or “a short time short opening”. Moreover, the intermittent release mode by the combination of short opening at the time of a specific game, such as the open mode in which the opening of 1.5 seconds in total is ensured, for example, may be referred to as “intermittent release mode by combination of short opening”. Is possible.
<Main effects on pachinko machines>
<< Basic display mode of production design >>

  Next, main effects of various effects executed by the sub main board 301 and the sub sub board 302 based on commands from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 will be described. Here, first, a basic display mode of the above-described effect design 190 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) will be described.

  The effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 as the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7A). Further, the effect symbol 190 is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 60 as the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7B). . That is, the effect symbol 190 is displayed in a variable manner according to the variation time defined by the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and when the variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends, the effect symbol 190 A series of operations such as the end of the 190 fluctuation display is the basic display mode.

  The stop symbol displayed when the effect symbol 190 is stopped includes a combination of three symbols: a left effect symbol 190a, a middle effect symbol 190b, and a right effect symbol 190c. If the result of the big hit lottery on the main board 102 is a big win, for example, a combination of the three-colored gazes such as “777” and “555” is used as a stop symbol representing the big hit. Is displayed. Also, if the result of the big hit lottery is out of place, for example, “767”, “928”, “331”, etc. The symbol 190 is stopped and displayed. FIG. 7B illustrates a situation in which the combination of the production symbols 190 is a combination of deviations of “331”.

  Here, “stop symbol” and “symbol stop” in the present embodiment mean that the three effect symbols 190 are “fixed stop”. That is, even if the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 in a state where, for example, a combination such as “767” or “928” is maintained, the “determination stop” alone It does not correspond to what you did. A state in which the production symbol 190 does not reach the “definite stop” while maintaining the combination in this way can be referred to as a “temporary stop” state.

  As a display mode of such “temporary stop”, for example, a state in which the production symbol 190 is oscillating (shaking) in small increments can be exemplified. A temporary stop mode in which the production symbol 190 is oscillating in small increments while maintaining the combination can be referred to as a “sway fluctuation” mode. As an aspect of the production pattern 190 in the “temporary stop”, vertical or horizontal linear movement, horizontal rotational movement, and the like can be exemplified, and the movement range can be exemplified by several millimeters.

  Moreover, as a display mode of the above-mentioned “determined stop”, a state where all effect symbols 190a to 190c are stopped while maintaining a combination through a temporary stop state can be exemplified. Furthermore, during this “determination stop”, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the determination has been stopped. Then, as an effect indicating that the display has been confirmed, the state of confirmed stop is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second), or the display area 194 on which the 190-designed effect symbol has been displayed is once blackened ( For example, after the so-called blackout), the effect design 190 that has been confirmed and stopped again appears. It is also conceivable that the blackout effect described above is performed only in a predetermined case (for example, when Super Reach 3 is executed).

  In addition, in the above-described “reach” display mode, there may be a case where an effect design maintaining the reach combination is displayed in the above-mentioned “temporary stop” mode. Then, after the reach display by this “temporary stop”, the symbols that have been displayed in a variable manner (in this case, the medium effect design 190b) constitute a combination of outliers (a combination of outlier reach), and “temporarily stop”. An effect can be illustrated in which “determination stop” is performed while keeping the change and the variable display ends. In addition, from the state in which the three effect symbols 190a to 190c perform “temporary stop” by the combination of the outlier reach, the medium effect symbol 190b resumes the fluctuation and the reach effect is highly reliable (reliability related to the big hit An example of such a development is that the degree of development is relatively high).

  Note that the scroll display mode of the effect symbol 190 is not limited to the above-described vertical scroll, and various display modes can be employed. Further, as another display mode, for example, a mode of performing variable display by rotating (rotating) the right performance symbol 190c from the left performance symbol 190a individually around the vertical axis can be exemplified. Further, for example, the left effect design 190a to the right effect design 190c are sequentially fed out in the display area 194 while being enlarged along the straight or curved trajectory from the rear to the front, that is, from the back to the front of the screen. A display mode such as can be exemplified. Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a scroll display mode in which the effect design directed from the rear to the front descends from the upper side to the lower side.

  Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, arrangement | positioning of the left effect design 190a to the right effect design 190c may be changed to the vertical direction, and the effect design 190 may be comprised by an upper effect design, a middle effect design, and a lower effect design. . In this case, a display mode in which the element symbols of these effect symbols are moved (horizontal scrolling) in the horizontal direction (for example, from left to right) can be exemplified.

  Furthermore, a plurality of various scroll display modes as described above may be provided in one type of pachinko gaming machine 10, and the various scroll display modes may be selectively used depending on the difference in effect pattern and effect mode.

  7A and 7B illustrate a display mode in which the combination of effect symbols 190 is stopped and displayed only in the middle in the vertical direction of the display area 194, and the effective line is in the horizontal direction. There is only one line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of effective lines can be five. In the variable display mode in which the vertical scrolling is performed as in the present embodiment, when the 5-line display mode is adopted, the five lines are the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the upper right diagonal line, and the upper left diagonal line. Consists of lines.

  In addition, in the variable display mode (horizontal scroll) in which the horizontal scroll is performed as described above, when the 5-line display mode is adopted, the five lines are the left line, the middle line, the right line, and the diagonally upward line. It is possible to configure with a diagonal line rising to the left.

  Further, in FIG. 7 (b), the left effect design 190a to the right effect design 190c are simplified by only numbers of a predetermined font, but the left effect design 190a to the right effect design 190c are numbers, etc. It may be constituted by a combination of a part (element symbol which is a symbol element effect design described above) meaning a predetermined symbol and a part (element symbol which is a non-symbol element effect design) composed of a picture representing other than the predetermined symbol. Is possible. And as a part which consists of a picture which expresses other than a predetermined symbol, various design pictures, a person picture, and these combinations etc. can be illustrated, Furthermore, various design pictures and a person picture combined with a symbol are animated. It is also possible.

  Also, a plurality of sets of element symbols can be provided from the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c, which can be used properly according to the situation. In this case, for example, each of the left effect symbol 190a, the middle effect symbol 190b, and the right effect symbol 190c includes a plurality of element symbols representing the meanings of the numbers “1” to “9”, and the difference in the effect mode and the like. The element symbols “1” to “9” corresponding thereto are used during execution of a specific production mode, and “1” to “9” corresponding thereto are executed during execution of another specific production mode. It is possible to use an element design of “9”.

  In addition, the difference in the above-described effect modes can be distinguished by, for example, differences in scenes and situations on the effect displayed on the effect display device 60. Further, differences in scenes and situations in the production are distinguished by differences in production contents such as backgrounds, scenes, characters, actions of characters, and cut-in modes displayed on the production display device 60, for example. Is possible.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the effect symbol 190 is not limited to the various display modes described above, and various display modes can be employed. For example, the transparency of the image of the effect symbol 190 can be made higher than before and not visible during a predetermined period from the start of change of the effect symbol 190 to the stop display.

In addition, in the case where the effect symbol 190 cannot be visually recognized in this manner, illustration is omitted, but the effect symbol 190 is made transparent so that it cannot be visually recognized, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is substituted for the effect symbol 190. It is also possible to display a symbol (proxy symbol) indicating the status of the symbol. In addition, as the substitute symbol, only symbols such as numerals can be displayed in a variable size and stopped at the corners of the display area 194 with a smaller size than the symbol element effect symbol of the effect symbol 190. Furthermore, depending on the situation, both the substitute symbol and the effect symbol 190 may be displayed at the same time.
<< Example of production pattern >>

  Next, the effect pattern described above will be described. A large number of effect patterns are provided in a state of being linked to the variation pattern determined by the main board 102. Further, the effect pattern includes an effect pattern including the effect symbol 190. More specifically, the production pattern defines a production process such as a change process from the start of change to a change stop for the selected production symbol 190, a background displayed in combination with the production symbol 190, and story development. Yes. The production patterns include those corresponding to “with reach” and “without reach” described above.

  Among these, when the effect pattern “with reach” is executed, a reach effect that is a big hit if another effect symbol (in this case, the medium effect symbol 190 b) is arranged is performed on the effect display device 60. When the result of the winning / losing lottery relating to the special symbol is a big hit, the display of the rough eyes such as “777” and “333” corresponding to the type of the big win is performed by the effect symbol 190 that has been confirmed and stopped. Further, when the result of the lottery determination relating to the special symbol is a loss, for example, a combination indicating a loss such as “767” or “515” is performed by the effect symbol 190 that has been confirmed and stopped.

  Furthermore, when the production pattern of “no reach” is executed, for example, “928”, “331”, and the like, a combination without reach in which the left production design 190a and the right production design 190c are not a combination of reach, This is performed by the production symbol 190 that has been confirmed and stopped.

  Some of these performance patterns have various long and short variation times. Particularly, the variation pattern of “with reach” includes one having a variation time of several minutes. In the present embodiment, an effect without reach corresponding to “no reach”, “normal reach”, and “super reach” in the variation pattern (see FIGS. 10A to 10C) related to the special symbol described above. A pattern, a normal reach production pattern, and a super reach production pattern are provided. For example, a plurality of effect patterns are associated with one variation pattern, and the number of the effect patterns is more diverse than the above-described variation patterns. Note that these effect patterns may be used in combination with a hold effect display or various notice effects as described later.

In addition, these reach is divided into “strong reach” with relatively high jackpot reliability and “weak reach” with relatively low jackpot reliability. “Reach” can be made “strong reach”. In addition, “strong reach” and “weak reach” may be provided in “super reach”.
<< Holding effect display related to special design >>

  Next, the hold display (hold effect display) related to the special symbol performed in the effect display device 60 will be described. In the lower part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, a first hold number display unit 196 indicating the number of hold of the winning lottery value in the first game, A second number-of-holds display section 197 that indicates the number of hold of the winning / failing lottery value in two games is displayed. Here, in order to simplify the explanation and illustration, each hold display is represented by a perfect circle. However, the hold display may be performed, for example, by displaying crystals, jewels, or other predetermined items. . Further, the hold display may be performed by displaying, for example, a person or an animal.

  In this embodiment, when a hold related to the first game occurs, a predetermined hold display is performed on the first hold number display section 196 described above. Various types of hold display can be adopted as described above. Here, a blue item is displayed as a basic hold display. Further, when the number of holds increases, a hold display is added. When the number of holds reaches the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 7A, four hold displays are performed in the first hold number display section 196.

  Further, the hold display in the first hold number display section 196 can be performed from the first display position to the fourth display position. That is, the first hold number display unit 196 includes the first display position to the fourth display position, and the rightmost part of the first hold number display unit 196 when viewed from the player is the first display position. It has become. A second display position, a third display position, and a fourth display position are provided in order toward the left end. Further, hereinafter, the hold display performed from the first display position to the fourth display position will be referred to as “hold 1”, “hold 2”, “hold 3”, and “hold 4”, respectively.

  For example, in the effect display device 60, in the situation where the effect symbol 190 related to the first game is being performed and one hold display is not performed on the first hold number display unit 196, the hold is generated. Then, the hold display is performed at the first display position on the right end (the position of the above-described “hold 1”). At this time, it is assumed that no other hold display has been performed yet, and “Hold 2” to “Hold 4” have not occurred. In this situation, when “hold 1” is generated, if the hold is further generated, the display related to the generated hold is performed at the position of “hold 2” to the left of “hold 1”. Then, when “hold 1” and “hold 2” are displayed, and “hold 3” and “hold 4” are not displayed, if a further hold occurs, “hold 3” is displayed according to the number of holds that have occurred. Or “Hold 4” is displayed.

  Then, if the change display that was executed when “Hold 1” occurs and other change start conditions related to the first game are also satisfied, the above-described hold memory information related to “Hold 1” is stored. At the stage of digestion, the “hold 1” hold display moves to the right side of the first hold number display section 196. The variation information display unit 195 is provided on the right side of the first hold number display unit 196. The variation information display unit 195 is an area for displaying information (variation information) related to the variation display being executed at that time. That is, the hold display of “hold 1” moves to the change information display unit 195 and changes to the change information display 198 when the change display related to the corresponding hold storage information is executed.

  Here, when the hold display of “hold 1” is moved to the change information display unit 195, display elements such as a size, a color, and a form related to the item may be changed. In the example of FIGS. 7A and 7B, the size is increased when the hold display of “HOLD 1” is changed to the change information display 198.

  As described above, when the hold display in “hold 1” moves to the fluctuation information display unit 195, the standby order of the subsequent hold display is advanced, and “hold 2” is shifted to the position of “hold 1”. Further, when “Take 3” or “Take 4” exists, “Take 3” is shifted to the “Take 2” position, and “Take 4” is shifted to the “Take 3” position. If a further hold occurs in such a situation, a new “hold 4” occurs and the number of holds reaches the upper limit. If no new hold is generated, the hold display is shifted with the start of the next variable display, and the standby order of each hold is advanced.

  In addition, it can be broadly regarded as a hold effect including a state in which the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 has changed from the hold display in “Take 1”, but is not limited to this. It is also possible to handle such that the display until “hold 1” is set as the hold display and the state changed to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display.

  In addition, when the variation display related to the production symbol 190 is not performed, and the number of holds is 0, and there is a ball in the first start winning opening 62, the display of “hold 1” is not performed, and the variation information The change information display 198 is directly performed on the display unit 195. And only in such a case, it is possible to handle such that the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display section 195 is not included in the hold display.

  Then, although the above-mentioned 2nd reservation number display part 197 is demonstrated, description is abbreviate | omitted about the point similar to the 1st reservation number display part 196. FIG. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the second number-of-holds display unit 197 is located on the opposite side of the first number-of-holds display unit 196 (on the right side as viewed from the player) with the variation information display unit 195 described above interposed therebetween. ).

  Further, when a hold related to the second game occurs, a predetermined hold display is performed on the second hold number display section 197. Various types of hold display can be adopted as in the case of the first hold number display unit 196, but here, as a basic hold display, unlike the first hold number display unit 196, an orange item Is displayed. Furthermore, when the number of holds increases, a hold display is added. When the number of holds reaches the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 7A, four hold displays are performed in the second hold number display section 197.

  The second hold number display section 197 also includes the fourth display position from the first display position, and the leftmost part of the second hold number display section 197 as viewed from the player is the first display position. It has become. A second display position, a third display position, and a fourth display position are provided in order toward the right end. Furthermore, regarding the second game, it is possible to display from the left end “Hold 1” to the right end “Hold 4”, and the hold display is shifted in descending order as the hold ends. Then, when the hold display at “hold 1” at the left end of the second hold number display portion 197 is used for the hold, the change information display portion 195 is similar to the case of the first hold number display portion 196. To move to.

  In addition, the display mode of the hold display in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 and the display mode of the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 are not limited to still images. It may be a predetermined video. Furthermore, the display mode of the hold display in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 may change from a still image to a moving image or a moving image to a still image at a predetermined timing. Good.

  Further, the hold display can be performed in a manner corresponding to various game states. For example, it is possible to exemplify, for example, different holding display modes depending on whether the probability of a big hit lottery is a normal probability or a high probability. In addition, when changing the hold display mode according to the game state, it is also possible to delay or advance the timing of the start or end of the change related to the hold display with respect to the timing when the corresponding game state occurs It is.

  Furthermore, the positional relationship among the first hold number display unit 196, the second hold number display unit 197, and the variation information display unit 195 is not limited to the above-described one, and various display modes can be adopted. is there. For example, the second hold number display unit 197 is moved to the left side of the first hold number display unit 196 in FIG. 7A as viewed from the player, and eight hold displays are displayed on the left side of the variation information display unit 195. It may be possible to arrange them.

  Such a hold display mode does not execute the second game in preference to the first game as in the present embodiment, but the special symbols and effects in the order of occurrence of the start winnings related to the first game and the second game. It is conceivable to employ it for a pachinko gaming machine of the type that displays a variation of the symbol 190. Further, as described above, when the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 are continuously arranged, the position of the variation information display unit 195 includes the lower center of the display area 194, An example of the lower right part can be illustrated.

  In addition, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a plurality of display bodies including, for example, a large display body and a small display body, the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 are used. Any or all of the variation information display unit 195 may be displayed on a small display.

In the present embodiment, a notice effect using the above-described hold display and the change information display 198 may be performed. These notice effects will be described later.
<< Reservation pre-reading effect related to special design >>

  Next, a reservation prefetch effect that is one of the notice effects related to the special symbol will be described. In the following description, the “hold prefetch effect” may be simply referred to as “prefetch effect”. This pre-reading effect is an effect that is executed based on the above-described reserved memory information (first special figure reserved memory information or second reserved memory information). Furthermore, the pre-reading effect uses the above-described advance information notification function, and reach and jackpots are generated for the hold that is digested after the effect performed using the effect symbol 190 or the like at that time. It is performed as an effect to raise the expectation of that.

  For example, regarding the hold display generated at the position of “hold 3” in the first hold number display unit 196 described above, unlike the display in blue that is the basic display mode described above, by performing the green hold display, It shows that the degree of expectation such as the occurrence of reach is higher than in the case of the normal blue mode. In addition to the colors of blue and green, display modes such as yellow, red, gold, rainbow, and predetermined patterns are provided. Expectations of big hits in the order of yellow, red, gold, rainbow, and predetermined patterns rather than green There is an effect that shows that the degree is high.

  Here, as a display mode of the above-mentioned “predetermined pattern”, an animal pattern such as a giraffe, a display mode including a predetermined character image, and the like can be exemplified. It is also possible to employ not only the color and pattern of the hold display but also items other than the perfect circle shape, person images, and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a pre-reading effect by combining the various display modes described above with a mode in which blinking or light emission is performed. In addition, the hold that has been applied to the pre-reading effect can be referred to as, for example, “trigger hold” or “the hold”.

  The pre-reading effect related to the hold as described above may be performed in the second game. As for the second game, it is possible to provide display modes such as red, gold, rainbow, and a predetermined pattern in addition to the basic color orange as described above. In addition, as the hold display related to the second game, it is also possible to adopt items other than the perfect circle shape, person images, and the like.

  Further, the pre-reading effect using the hold display in the first game and the second game as described above can be referred to as “hold change” or the like. Such “holding change” includes a display mode different from the basic display mode as described above from the beginning of the occurrence of the hold, and a change in display mode at the timing after the occurrence of the hold. is there.

  Among these, as an indication of the change in the display mode at the timing after the occurrence of the hold, for example, the hold is generated and the hold display is started, the hold is digested, and the hold display is, for example, “hold 2”, An example in which the hold display changes while proceeding with “hold 1” can be exemplified. Then, for example, when a hold occurs, the hold display is performed in blue (orange in the case of the second game) at the position “Hot 3”, and when moving to the position “Hold 1”, other colors such as green are displayed. Is changed.

In addition, for both the first game and the second game, when the hold display is moved from the “hold 1” to the change information display unit 195 and becomes the change information display 198, for example, in the basic color In some cases, the expectation of a big hit is expressed by changing from a blue or orange color to a display mode such as red, gold, rainbow, or a predetermined pattern, or a display mode such as an item other than a perfect circle or a person image. is there.
<< Control Aspects Related to Reservation Prefetching Effect >>

  Furthermore, the following can be illustrated as a control aspect which concerns on the above hold changes. For example, when a hold occurs, a lottery (hold change pattern lottery) for determining an effect pattern (hold change pattern) of the hold change is performed. The hold change pattern lottery uses a hold change pattern table. In this hold change pattern table, the presence or absence of a hold change and when to execute a hold change (when there is a hold change), what timing Items relating to the determination of the production pattern, such as what display mode to execute, are defined. In addition, as the hold change pattern, one for the first game and one for the second game are defined.

  Further, examples of the pending change pattern with pending changes that can be selected by the pending change pattern lottery as described above include the following. For example, with respect to the first game, three hold displays “H1” to “H3” have already been performed, a new hold has occurred, and the hold display has been performed at the position “H4”. And At this time, blue, which is the basic color, is displayed on hold, and thereafter, the variable display related to the effect symbol 190 is sequentially terminated, and the standby order related to the hold is advanced.

  Further, the hold display in “Hold 4” is sequentially shifted to “Hold 3”, “Hold 2”, and “Hold 1”, and a hold change is performed at each shift. Then, the color of the hold display changes from the blue color at the position of “Hold 4” to the green color at the “Hold 3” position, the red color at the “Hold 2” position, the gold color at the “Hold 1” position, and the variation. It changes to the rainbow color in the information display part 195 (refer FIG. 7 (a), (b)) sequentially. In other words, the hold display changes to a display mode in which the reliability of the jackpot is high as the stand-by order related to hold rises. Such a hold change pattern can be referred to as a hold change every time the display position changes.

  Further, as another hold change pattern, for example, in the stage where the hold display is performed on “hold 4” as in the above example, the display is blue, and the display of the basic color is the hold display “hold 2”. It continues until it is displayed at the position. Then, when this hold display moves to “hold 1”, the display mode changes to red, rainbow, or the like. Such a hold change pattern can be referred to as a change that does not cause a hold until the hold is approaching and the hold display reaches “hold 1”, which is a predetermined display position.

  Note that the above-described various on-hold change patterns are merely examples, and various other aspects can be provided in the above-described on-hold change pattern table.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of holds in “hold 1” to “hold 4” that correspond to the hold change, it is possible to cancel one of the prefetch effects. More specifically, for example, when “hold 4” occurs, the hold related to “hold 4” hits the hold change pattern that changes to green, and any of the holds that have occurred first If the holding change pattern that changes to a rainbow color is hit, the holding relating to the above-mentioned “hold 4” can be exemplified by canceling the holding change and not executing it.

Furthermore, for example, when “Hold 4” occurs as in the above example, the hold related to “Hold 4” hits the hold change pattern that changes to the rainbow color, and all the hold that has occurred previously However, if the change does not change up to the rainbow color and changes only on hold until green or the like, the hold that has occurred can be exemplified by canceling the change on hold and not executing it.
<< Continuous notice concerning special design >>

  Next, as another effect pattern, a continuous notice (continuous effect) related to a special symbol will be described. There are genuine and pseudo-continuous notices. Of these, the genuine continuous notice means that a continuous notice effect is produced over a plurality of variable displays related to special symbols. ing. In addition, the pseudo continuous notice means that an intermittent notice effect is performed such that there is a plurality of special symbol fluctuations for one fluctuation display related to the special symbol.

  In addition, the “continuous notice” in this embodiment is a series of special effects such as giving some notice in advance, compared to the usual effects that can be performed most often when the big hit lottery is off. It means that it is done. In addition, “special effects” include scene settings with a relatively low appearance frequency compared to the effect patterns with reach and the normal scene settings with the highest frequency of appearance or characters including characters. An effect pattern including characters and characters can be illustrated.

  The “continuous notice” can be more specifically exemplified, for example, such that a reach is generated each time over a predetermined number of fluctuations related to a special symbol. In addition, as the “continuous notice” in another aspect, for example, the character who is the main character in the story on the stage is sequentially changed for each change of the special design, aiming at the room that is the final destination. Examples are those that move to a room. In other forms of “continuous notice”, the main character must win against a different enemy for each change of the special symbol, aiming for the final target enemy. Examples can also be given.

  Further, the genuine continuous notice described above (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “continuous notice”) can be performed based on the prior notice information transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. More specifically, for example, based on the prior notification information received when the “hold 3” suspension occurs, the sub-main board 301 has an effect pattern corresponding to the variable display related to the special symbol after that. For example, it is possible to select a content including a continuous notice over three fluctuation displays.

  Then, when the hold for one time is exhausted and the hold for the above-mentioned “hold 3” is shifted to the position of “hold 2”, the first one of the effect patterns related to the selected continuous notice is displayed. An effect pattern related to the notice is executed. Further, when the hold is sequentially digested and the hold display is moved from “Hot 2” to “Hold 1”, the second notice of the three times is executed, and the fluctuation information display from “Hold 1”. When moving to section 195, the final third notice is executed.

  In the sub-main board 301, the change pattern related to the change display executed when the above-described “hold 3” hold occurs, and “hold 2” or “hold 1” generated before that. It is also possible to check the hold storage information. In other words, when the above-mentioned “hold 3” hold occurs, information indicating that a predetermined reach effect with a high jackpot reliability is executed or a big hit is generated among various stored information. If there is information indicating that the event is to be performed, it is possible to cancel the effect pattern related to the continuous notice selected when the “hold 3” hold occurs.

  Here, it is possible that the effect mode of the above-described pending change is an aspect of the effect related to the continuous notice.

  In addition, as the above-described pseudo continuous notice (hereinafter may be referred to as “pseudo continuous notice”), reach display is intermittently performed a plurality of times in an effect pattern related to a single variable display of a special symbol. Such a thing or a character where a character repeats an act of multiple times can be illustrated.

Note that the contents of the continuous notice as described above are merely examples, and various contents other than those described can be adopted as the contents of the continuous notice.
<< Directing design related to normal design >>

  Next, an effect related to the above-described normal symbol will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect display related to the normal symbol is not performed. However, the effect related to the normal symbol can be performed as a part of the effect in the effect display device 60. And when performing the effect display of a normal symbol in this way, as the effect symbol, for example, it is conceivable to perform a display that can discriminate between a loss and a winning type.

  More specifically, for example, as shown in the ordinary drawing effect display unit 199 in FIGS. 7A and 7B, two square frames of about several millimeters square are displayed side by side, and the inside of each frame is displayed. Enable display in red or blue. When the result of the lottery determination relating to the normal symbol is out of place, for example, both frames are displayed in blue, and this is set as the off symbol relating to the normal symbol. In addition, if the result of the lottery for a normal symbol is either hit, either or both of the frames will be displayed in red according to the type of the win, and these will be a hit for the normal symbol. It is possible to make it a design.

Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is constituted by a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, the effect design (199) related to the normal design is, for example, small. You may make it display on a various display body. In addition, for example, an LED display light that is a set of two may be provided in a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and this may be used as an effect symbol display device related to a normal symbol.
<< Holding effect display for normal symbols >>

Subsequently, the hold effect display related to the above-described normal symbol will be described. In the present embodiment, the holding effect display related to the normal symbol is not performed. However, it is possible to perform the hold effect display related to the normal symbol as a part of the effect in the effect display device 60. In addition, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, the effect hold display related to the normal symbol is, for example, a small display. You may make it display on a body. In addition, for example, an LED indicator lamp which is a set of two LED lamps is provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and thereby, an effect display of the number of holdings related to the normal symbols “1” to “4” is performed. Also good.
<< Direction related to limited frequency pattern >>

  Next, an effect related to the limited frequency pattern (hereinafter referred to as “limited frequency pattern effect”) will be described. The limited frequency pattern effect is provided as a part of the aforementioned effect pattern. Furthermore, the limited frequency effect pattern effect is an effect based on a pattern set so as to easily appear in a predetermined gaming state. The content of the limited frequency pattern effect is an effect content indicating a specific tendency, and the content of the limited frequency pattern effect can be exemplified by, for example, a thing that is expected to generate a highly reliable reach. In addition, the effect pattern related to reach may be included in some effect patterns related to the limited frequency effect pattern effect.

  In addition, examples of game situations in which limited frequency pattern effects are likely to appear include, for example, at the start of a game, immediately after a predetermined effect pattern is executed, during a predetermined effect mode, immediately after the end of a special game, or during a specific game. it can. In addition to these, examples of the game situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear may include a case where the number of holds for the first game (or the second game) reaches a predetermined number (for example, four). .

  The following can be illustrated as a control aspect related to such a limited frequency pattern effect. For example, the aforementioned variation pattern table on the main board 102 includes a plurality of variation patterns (limited frequency variation patterns) associated with limited frequency pattern effects. A limited frequency pattern table is configured as a part of the variation pattern table by the plurality of limited frequency variation patterns.

  As described above, this limited frequency pattern table is used in a predetermined game situation such as at the start of a game or immediately after the end of a special game. Then, it is determined whether or not the main board 102 is in a gaming situation in which the limited frequency pattern table should be used. Further, if the game situation is to use the limited frequency pattern table, the selection range of the variation pattern is limited in the limited frequency pattern table on the main board 102, and the variation pattern in the limited frequency pattern table (limited frequency variation pattern) ) Is selected.

  Subsequently, a command including information related to the selected variation pattern is transmitted from the main substrate 102 to the sub-main substrate 301, and an effect pattern associated with the selected variation pattern is determined on the sub-main substrate 301. The

  The variation pattern in the limited frequency pattern table on the main board 102 may include a variation pattern (non-limited frequency variation pattern) that is not associated with the limited frequency pattern effect. By doing in this way, when the non-limited frequency variation pattern is selected, there may be a case where the limited frequency pattern effect does not appear even in the above-described predetermined game situation.

  In addition, even in the above-described predetermined game situation, the appearance rate of the limited frequency pattern effect can be varied for each game situation. As such a control mode, for example, at the start of a game, a limited frequency pattern effect is executed at a rate of 100%, immediately after the execution of another predetermined effect pattern, immediately after the end of a special game in a predetermined effect mode. For example, during a specific game, the limited frequency pattern effect is prevented from being executed.

  The determination as to whether or not it is the start of the game as described above is performed by, for example, detecting the presence / absence of an operation related to the firing handle 20 from the main board 102 and firing the firing handle 20 for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 minute). If there is no operation related to the above and the operation of the launch handle 20 is detected after that, it can be performed by determining that the game is started.

  It is also possible to determine whether or not to execute the limited frequency pattern effect on the sub main board 301 side. In this case, for example, in the sub-main substrate 301, it is determined whether or not a predetermined effect pattern has been executed, or whether or not a predetermined effect mode is being executed, and the predetermined effect pattern is executed. Alternatively, it is possible to execute a limited frequency pattern effect when the predetermined effect mode is being performed.

Further, when a small hit is adopted as the hit type as in the present embodiment, for example, at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) after the occurrence of the small hit, the main board It is also possible to refer to the limited frequency pattern table in 102 and determine the variation pattern. Furthermore, it is also possible to continuously execute the limited frequency pattern effect in the variable display related to the special symbol multiple times (for example, 10 times or 20 times) after the occurrence of the small hit. Also, there is a difference related to the number of continuations of the limited frequency pattern effect between the first game and the second game. For example, for the first special symbol, the number of continuations of the limited frequency pattern effect is 10 times, and the second special symbol With regard to, it is also possible to set the number of continuations of the limited frequency pattern effect to 20 times.
<< Direction related to long opening >>

  Next, an effect related to the long opening described above will be described. In the present embodiment, an effect (long opening effect) related to the long opening (normally long opening) of the second start winning opening 63 at the normal time is executed using the effect display device 60, the speaker 21, and the like. There is a case. Then, as the long opening effect related to the normal long opening, the opening lottery effect indicating whether or not the normal long opening is executed, and the long opening effect executed in response to the result of the opening lottery effect (Open lottery result production) is provided. In the following, the normal long open may be simply referred to as “long open”.

  Among these, as an opening lottery effect, for example, an effect of content for encouraging the expectation that a normal long-time opening will be performed in the stage of fluctuation of a normal symbol or before the start of fluctuation can be exemplified. More specifically, for example, whether a specific character appears in the lower corner of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 or the like, and whether or not an area for displaying the above-described second reserved number display section 197 can be secured. For example, the state can be displayed as a moving image.

  Such an effect pattern is not to directly display the state of the lottery, but can also be expressed as “an opening effect”, “an effect before opening”, or the like. In the production contents, when the purpose is achieved, the long opening is performed thereafter, and when the purpose cannot be achieved, the long opening is not performed thereafter. When an additional display body is provided as described above, an open lottery effect can be performed on this additional display body.

  In addition to the effect patterns described above, it is possible to employ a display that directly displays the state of the lottery. As such a direct opening lottery effect, for example, a movie display related to a lottery such as roulette, fortune, or two-digit symbol matching can be exemplified. Furthermore, in the case of winning the normal long open in the above-mentioned normal symbol winning lottery, the open lottery effect with the content indicating the winning is executed, and in the case of not winning the normal long open, it is off. It is conceivable to perform an open lottery effect with the content indicating “”.

  In addition, when the lottery effect of the content indicating the disappointment or the content that cannot achieve the purpose is not hitting the normal long open, and the effect pattern related to the open lottery effect is selected with a predetermined probability Executed. Furthermore, as a case where an effect pattern related to an open lottery effect is selected, there are a case where it is selected on the main board 102 and a case where it is independently selected on the sub main board 301. In the present embodiment, the opening lottery effect is executed with a high probability (for example, 100%) when hitting the normal long opening, and when the normal lot opening is not hitting, the low probability ( (For example, about 0.1%).

  Furthermore, it is possible to set various relationships between the contents of the opening lottery effect and the opening pattern of the second start winning opening 63. For example, an effect using roulette is adopted as the contents of the open lottery effect, and “open”, “×”, “chance”, “reach”, etc. are assigned to the options provided as roulette eyes. Then, when the normal long opening is not won, the state where “×” is selected as the content of the opening lottery effect is displayed, and the second start winning opening 63 is not opened, or only the short opening is performed. Like that.

  Further, when the normal long opening is hit, an effect that “open” is selected in the roulette is executed, and the long opening is always performed. In addition, in the production related to the production design 190, when the production of the content that develops in stages, the production of the content that develops into super reach, or the like is executed, It may be possible to display a state in which “chance” or “reach” is selected and not to open the second start winning opening 63 or to perform only short opening.

  In addition, the long opening effect composed of the above-mentioned opening lottery effect (the above-mentioned opening squealing effect and pre-opening stage effect) and the effect indicating the presence / absence of long opening (open lottery result effect) Although it is positioned as a special performance related to the long opening at normal times, it is directly related to the control mode that directly relates the long opening and the opening lottery result presentation. There are no control modes.

  Among these, the control mode in which the direct association is performed is a mode in which a command related to the opening mode of the second start winning opening 63 is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. The control mode that is not attached is a mode in which the effect of long opening is executed on the side of the sub-main board 301 without grasping the opening mode of the second start winning prize opening 63. In the present embodiment, a control mode in which a direct relationship between a long opening effect and a long opening effect is employed for the long opening effect, but a control mode that does not have a direct relationship is adopted. It can also be included in the section.

  In addition, such a long opening effect may be performed in association with the above-described hold related to the normal symbol. That is, the hold lottery value related to the normal symbol is preliminarily determined during the hold, and a long opening effect having a meaning such as a notice or a hit may be executed with a predetermined probability according to the predetermination result. Such a notice effect by prior determination is included in the above-mentioned “prefetching effect”. Such a pre-reading effect related to the normal symbol can be performed in the same manner as a pre-reading effect related to the special symbol described later, and in this embodiment, prior notice information related to the passage of the operation port (68a or 68b). (Normal symbol prefetch command) is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301.

Here, in the present embodiment, an effect pattern for a long opening effect is selected regardless of the number of holds, but the present invention is not limited to this. An effect pattern for a long opening effect may be selected.
<< Direction using operation buttons >>

  Next, an effect using the operation button 22 (see FIG. 1) described above (hereinafter referred to as “button effect”) will be described. The operation button 22 is operated by the player when the button effect is executed, and exhibits a function of giving the player a feeling that he / she participates in the game effect or the lottery. . As the button effect, for example, in the process of changing the effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B), “Push”, “sequential hitting” are displayed on the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 together with the symbol of the operation button 22. For example, it is possible to exemplify performing a guide display for prompting an operation such as a character such as “Please press” or “Long press” or a moving image of an indicator indicating the remaining time.

  Furthermore, examples of the button effect include an effect in which a character makes a comment when a player operates the operation button 22 in accordance with the above-described guide display, and an effect in which an ally character attacks an enemy character. Moreover, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-described movable effect member 93 or the like is activated to notify that reach is reached. Furthermore, a button effect may be performed during the reach effect. In this case, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-described movable effect member 93 or the like is activated to expect a big hit.

  Further, regarding the above-described operation button 22, the operation of the operation button 22 is normally disabled, but the button operation effective period in which the operation of the operation button 22 is enabled during the button production. The button operation effective period is a predetermined time set in advance.

  The operation button 22 is combined with a vibration motor (not shown) to vibrate the operation button 22, or the operation range of the operation button 22 is expanded by using a drive source such as a motor. It is also possible to adopt a production mode such as plunging. Further, when the operation button 22 is projected and retracted, the amount of protrusion can be set relatively large (for example, about 5 to 10 cm).

Further, the operation button 22 is not limited to a small external dimension (for example, about several centimeters), but may be a hemispherical form having about a dozen centimeters. Further, various types of operation input devices such as the operation buttons 22 can be employed. For example, an automobile handle, an aircraft operation lever, a character model ( Figure) is also possible. It is also possible to provide a relatively small operation button 22 and an operation lever or the like so that they can be used properly according to the situation such as the production content.
<< Direction when jackpot occurs >>

  Next, an effect when a big hit occurs will be described. The effects when a big hit occurs include effects before the start of special games, effects during special games, effects after special games, and the like. Among these, for the effects before the special game, the effects when the combination of the effect symbols 190 is confirmed (when the symbols are determined), the effects when the effect symbols are not confirmed (when the symbols are determined), and the effects of right-handed guidance, etc. It is included.

  And as an effect at the time of symbol determination, for example, the above-mentioned effect symbol 190 is displayed while maintaining a jackpot combination such as “111” or “777”, and then the jackpot combination of the effect symbol 190 is re-lotted. Examples include contents that maintain the combination of “111” and “777” or change the combination of “111” to the combination of “777”. Further, as an effect during the symbol determination, for example, a content that causes the effect symbol 190 to be confirmed and stopped by the combination of “111” and “777” described above and the display of the combination of the effect symbols 190 is continued. Furthermore, as an effect of the right-handed guidance, a content that guides the player to perform a right-handed strike by increasing the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 can be exemplified.

  As an effect during the above-mentioned special game, a moving image whose contents cannot be viewed unless the player has won a big hit can be exemplified. At this time, predetermined music is output from the aforementioned speaker 21 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, as a video during the special game, for example, a scene in which a predetermined character in a play picture adopted for the production of the pachinko gaming machine 10 fights a rival enemy or a state of enjoying a trap. Can be exemplified.

  More specifically, for example, when the special winning opening of the first round in the special game is opened, the characters start fighting, and from the second round to the final round, the change of rounds and the characters The battle between the characters is terminated when the final round is completed and the final prize opening is closed. In addition, the change of the round during the special game is, for example, “1R”, “2R”,... At the corner (for example, the upper right corner) of the display area 194 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B). , “15R”, “16R” can be notified. Further, as a part of the effect during the special game, for example, it is possible to display the number of occurrence of the big hit when the big hit occurs during the specific game and the big hits are continuous.

  In the present embodiment, all types of big hits are accompanied with benefits such as probability change and time saving, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to provide big hits without probability change. And if the type of jackpot includes a jackpot that does not involve a probability change, the notification as to whether or not the bonus game will change after the special game ends should not be reported during the special game or until the end of the special game. Is also possible.

  For example, when a total of 16 rounds of special games are played, until the end of the 10th round, the 11th round, the 1st big When the first entry to the winning opening 91 (or the second big winning opening 92) is detected, if the winning is hit, the effect and the control mode such as performing the effect is adopted. Is possible.

  Similarly, when a game ball is detected in a predetermined area at a predetermined timing, such as before a special game is started, during a special game, or at the end of a special game, in a pachinko game machine including a big hit without a probability change It is also possible to adopt effects and control modes such that is likely to change.

  In this case, for example, a ball entry device having a detection area for a game ball (herein referred to as “V ball entry device”) is a part below the second major winning opening 92 in the game area 52 (see FIG. 1) In addition to the above. Further, at a predetermined timing such as at the end of the special game, the V pitching device is set in a state where it can accept a gaming ball. In this state, when a gaming ball is detected by the V pitching device, the probability state thereafter is The control is performed so that the probability variation state is maintained over a predetermined period. When the game ball does not enter the V entry device, or when the game ball does not enter the predetermined area in the V entry device, control is performed so that the probability state after that does not become the probability change state. It may be possible to do so.

  Further, such a certainty change by entering can be given only as an effect. That is, when a big hit with certainty is won in the big hit lottery, the V pitching device is set in a state in which a game ball can be received at a predetermined timing. Then, if a distribution mechanism is provided in the V pitching device and a big hit with a certain probability change is made in advance, the game ball that has entered the V pitching device is guided to the probability variation region, and the player is surely changed. Execute the effect to the effect that you won. In addition, when a big hit without probability change is hit in advance, it is conceivable that the game ball is led to a non-probability change (normal) area and an effect that the player has acquired the probability change is executed.

  Subsequently, examples of the effects after the special game include those related to the result of the effects during the special game. More specifically, the content etc. which a winner expresses an emotion according to the result of the battle between characters can be illustrated. Such an effect after the special game can also be called an ending effect.

  Furthermore, examples of the effects after the special game include a display that additionally displays the number of consecutive big hits, and a display that displays the number of prize balls acquired by the player through the special game at that time. It is also possible to additionally display the number of occurrences of jackpots when jackpots occur during a specific game and the jackpots continue. In addition, regarding the success of the big hit, when the number of occurrence of the big hit reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute an effect pattern that is not selected before that.

In addition, regarding small hits, it is conceivable to provide one with certainty and one without certainty. In addition, when a small hit occurs, it is not possible to distinguish between whether or not there is an effect of notifying the occurrence of the small hit and whether or not the game is in a probable change during the game after the small hit occurs. It is conceivable to produce content.
<Various commands transmitted from the main board to the sub main board>

  Next, various commands transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 will be described. In the following description, the command relating to the ordinary electric accessory and the other main commands will be described separately, but here, the main command other than the command relating to the ordinary electric accessory will be described first. First, as command transmission timing, during initial screen display, during customer waiting demo (standby demo), at the time of special symbol change start, at the time of special symbol determination, at the time of special symbol determination, at the time of jackpot start demonstration, There are times when the jackpot is open, the jackpot is closed, the winning demonstration is over, and the jackpot is ended. Among these, the initial screen display is a period from when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is powered on until the customer waiting demonstration starts and enters a steady state. In addition, command transmission is performed in any case at the time of start winning, at the time of power failure recovery, and at the time of error detection. Furthermore, command transmission is executed even when the RWM is cleared.

  Among these, commands for RWM clear include commands for effect display initialization, effect LED initialization, and various errors. The effect display initialization command is used to display a predetermined off symbol on the effect display device 60. The effect LED initialization command is to turn on a part of the game effect lamp when communication is normal. The various error commands are used for effect display according to the error state.

  As a customer waiting demo command, there is a customer waiting demo command. The customer waiting demo command is used to set the effect display device 60 and the game effect lamp for the customer waiting demo and erase the sound.

  As a command at the time of starting the symbol change of the special symbol, the number of symbols 1 stored, the number of symbols 2 stored, the communication inspection 1, the communication inspection 2, the number of times of production A to Z, the production selection state 0 to 2, the variation additional information, the design 1 production There are commands for pattern, symbol 2 effect pattern, symbol 1 character effect, symbol 2 character effect. The symbol 1 memory number command indicates the reserved memory number of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 memory number command indicates the reserved memory number of the second special symbol. The communication check 1 command and the communication check 2 command are for confirming whether or not normal communication is being performed. The various commands of the production times A to Z indicate the number of productions according to the above-described limited frequency table, and the various commands of the production selection states 0 to 2 indicate the types of production according to the limited frequency table. Is. The fluctuation additional information command indicates information for adjusting the fluctuation time. The symbol 1 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. Is. The symbol 1 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the second special symbol. is there.

  As a command for determining a special symbol, there are a symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and a symbol 2 effect pattern stop command. The symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and the symbol 2 effect pattern stop command are for stopping the effect symbol 190 based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively.

  The commands for determining a special symbol include: 0 fluctuation time reduction (low probability), fluctuation time reduction times A to Z (low probability), 0 fluctuation time reduction (high probability), and probability fluctuation ( Command). These are for transmitting a command relating to the gaming state at that time, and are used for the production mode display, the short-time display, and the like.

  As the command for the big hit start demonstration, there are a symbol one big hit start demonstration, a symbol two big hit start demonstration, and a command for specifying a launch position. The symbol 1 jackpot start demo command and the symbol 2 jackpot start demo command are for displaying a start demo based on the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The firing position designation command is used for notifying the firing position when the player places a game ball between the first big winning opening 91 and the second big winning opening 92 by so-called left-handed or right-handed. belongs to.

  The firing position designation command causes the player to place a game ball between the first big winning opening 91 and the second big winning opening 92 by so-called left hitting or right hitting as in the big hit start demonstration. In this case, the launch position is notified.

  The commands for opening the jackpot medium / large prize winning opening include the commands of symbol 1 big hit middle demo 1-16 and symbol 2 big hit middle demo 1-16. These are for displaying effects based on the jackpot symbol and the number of rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  As a command at the time of closing the jackpot, the winning prize closing command is available. This is for displaying the special prize closing effect.

  As a command at the time of winning / ending demo, there are a command of ending demo per symbol 1 and a command of finishing demo per symbol 2. These are for displaying a winning end demonstration effect based on the winning symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  As a command at the time of the big hit end demonstration, there is a launch position designation command. This is a case where it is necessary to distinguish the launch positions for reasons such as the positional relationship of the first start winning opening 62, the second starting winning opening 63, the first big winning opening 91, and the second big winning opening 92. In order to notify the launch position.

  As a command at the time of starting winning a prize, there are a command of winning notice (per notice notice effect), symbol notice (per symbol notice effect), change notice (pattern notice effect), symbol 1 memory number, symbol 2 memory number. Each command of the advance notice, the symbol notice, and the change notice is a command (prefetch command) related to the prefetch effect described above by the prior information notifying unit 157. The winning advance notice command is used to transmit a random number range of pass / fail random numbers, and includes information on pass / fail according to the lottery probability. The symbol advance command is for transmitting a random number range of symbol random numbers, and includes information related to the hit type. Furthermore, the change notice command is for transmitting a random number range of the change pattern, and can be used to specify the type of change pattern group (no reach, normal reach, super reach, etc.). The command for the number of stored symbols 1 and the number of stored symbols 2 is for transmitting the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this embodiment, as a result of the lottery determination, information such as the presence / absence of a pre-reading effect and a period is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 by each command of hitting notice, symbol notice, and change notice.

  As the command at the time of power interruption return, communication inspection 1, communication inspection 2, game state A to E for power interruption recovery, production times A to Z, production selection states 0 to 2, design 1 character production, design 2 character production, There are commands for the power failure return state, special symbol 1 state upon power interruption return, special symbol 2 state upon power interruption return, launch position designation, errors a to d, symbol 1 memory count, symbol 2 memory count.

  The commands of the communication inspection 1 and the communication inspection 2 are for confirming whether or not normal communication is being performed. The commands for the game states A to E for power interruption return are for transmitting different commands depending on the game state at the time of power interruption. The commands for the number of performances A to Z indicate the number of times related to the performance according to the above-described limited frequency table, and the commands for the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the types of effects according to the limited frequency table. is there. The symbol 1 character effect and the symbol 2 character effect command are for transmitting commands corresponding to the symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The power interruption return state command is used to transmit a different command depending on whether or not a hit is being made. Commands for special symbol 1 state at power interruption return and special symbol 2 state at power interruption return are sent according to the status of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, such as waiting, changing, and hitting. Is for. The launch position designation command is for designating an appropriate launch position according to the situation as described above. Errors a to d are for transmitting the presence and type of error. The command for the number of stored symbols 1 and the number of stored symbols 2 is for transmitting the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
<Main control processing of main board>

  Next, main control processing in the main board 102 of the pachinko gaming machine 10 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. Prior to the description, the terms “special electric accessory”, “condition device”, and “substantial action continuous operation device” used below will be described. Each of these represents a conceptual device in the control process of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and among these, the “special electric accessory” operates the first grand prize port 91 and the second major prize port 92. It will be. In addition, the “condition device” is activated when a game ball that has entered the first grand prize winning port 91 or the second grand prize winning port 92 is detected. An object can be operated several times in succession.

The main control processes of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described here are the control start process shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the game progress interrupt process shown in FIG. 13, and the power-off process shown in FIG. Is executed in the main board 102.
<Control start processing>

The control start process shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 is a control process that is started after a security check using the manufacturing code of the CPU 501 is performed by turning on the pachinko gaming machine 10, and this control start process will be described later. After executing the necessary settings (S1 to S4) when the power is turned on, the operation state of the initialization switch 544 (S5), the power-off information flag (power-off confirmation information) in the power interruption status confirmation processing (S6 to S8) Corresponding to the value and the addition result (checksum data) of the RWM area, processing at the time of power-off recovery (S9 to S17), processing at initialization of the RWM (S24 to S26), time setting for game progress interruption The process (S27), the circulation process (S32 (S28 to S31)) and the like are executed.
<< Settings required at power-on >>

  As necessary settings at power-on, stack pointer setting (S1), interrupt mode setting (S2), and access permission to RWM 503 are set (S3), and then the internal registers are initialized ( S4).

Among these, in the process of setting the stack pointer (S1), in order to secure the stack area, the stack pointer is set as the initial value of the stack pointer, and the stack pointer is set at a specific address. Next, in the interrupt mode setting (S2), a mode of a predetermined number is set, and in the access permission setting (S3) of the RWM, access permission data is set in a predetermined register to permit access to the RWM. To do. As a result, the maskable interrupt is set to a specific interrupt mode and the CPU built-in RWM is permitted to access. Further, in the setting of the internal register (S4), various corresponding setting values such as a game progress interrupt use setting value and a clock source selection value are set using the internal register initial setting table. The interrupt in the main board 102 will be described later.
<< Confirmation of RWM clear switch operation status >>

  In the confirmation process (S5) of the operation state of the initialization switch 544, the state of the output signal of the initialization switch 544 input via the input port is confirmed. It is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch has been pressed (turned on). If it has not been pressed (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag during the power interruption status determination process (S6 to S8) to be described later The process proceeds to the determination process (S6). On the other hand, if the initialization switch 544 has been pressed (S5: YES), the RWM initialization process (S24 to S26) is performed.

  Here, it is determined that the initialization switch 544 has been operated when the RWM clear switch bit of the corresponding input port is determined to be on for five consecutive times. In addition, the determination of whether or not the initialization switch 544 has been pressed is performed only once at this time, and is not performed thereafter.

Further, in the state confirmation process (S5) of the initialization switch 544, the RWM head address (address) is set as the reference value of the relative address, the number of input confirmation times (here, 5 times) is set, and the corresponding input port Control processing such as input of a value, inspection of an RWM clear switch bit in the value of the input port, confirmation of an inspection result, input confirmation repeated for the set number of input confirmations, and the like are executed.
<< Situation confirmation process at power interruption >>

  In the power interruption status confirmation processing (S6 to S8) when the initialization switch 544 is not operated, the value of the power interruption information flag is read, and whether the read value matches predetermined power interruption normal data. It is determined whether or not (S6). The power-off normal data is stored when the power-off process is normally performed when a power-off (power-off) that turns off the power occurs. If the value of the power-off information flag does not match the power-off normal data and the determination result in S6 is NO, the control process will be described later as in the case where the initialization switch 544 is operated. The process proceeds to RWM initialization processing (after S24).

  If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (S6: YES), checksum data is calculated (S7). In the checksum data calculation process, although not shown, an initial value is set as the checksum data, a predetermined calculation is performed on the checksum data, and the checksum data after the calculation is 0. A determination is made as to whether or not.

If the checksum data is not 0 (S8: NO), that is, if the resumption preparation process execution condition is not satisfied, the RWM head high is set above the reference value of the relative address. The process proceeds to the initialization process (after S24). On the other hand, when the checksum data is 0 (S8: YES), the process proceeds to power-off recovery processing (S9 to S17) described later.
<< Processing at power-off recovery >>

  In the process at the time of power-off recovery, the value of the stack pointer buffer is set in the stack pointer, and the stack pointer is restored to the value stored at the time of power-off (S9). Furthermore, in order to inspect the communication line between the main board 102 and the sub board 104, a request to send an effect control command to the sub board 104 is made (S10, S11), a decoration lamp (game effect lamp) and a sound effect (sound) In order to return the effect of (effect) to the state before the occurrence of the power interruption, a request to transmit the effect control command to the sub-board 104 is made (S10, S11). Further, in order to make a request for a command corresponding to the number of suspended balls in the special symbol display device, a symbol memory number command request process is executed (S12).

  Further, the solenoid is returned to the output state before the occurrence of power interruption (S13). Specifically, in order to return the open / closed state of the second start winning opening 63, the first big winning opening 91, and the second big winning opening 92 to the state before the power is turned off, the normal electric accessory solenoid 76, the big winning prize The solenoid actuating bits for the mouth solenoids 80, 81 are in turn checked. When the solenoid operation bit of the normal electric accessory solenoid control is on, it is determined that the second start winning port 63 is open before the power is turned off, and the second start winning port 63 is opened. Store in the accessory solenoid control. Subsequently, when the solenoid operation bit of the first grand prize solenoid control is on, it is determined that the first big prize port 91 is open before the power is turned off, and the first big prize port 91 is opened. Is stored in the normal electric accessory solenoid control. When the solenoid operation bit of the second grand prize solenoid control is on, it is determined that the second big prize opening 92 is open before the power is turned off, and the solenoid action setting value is set to open the first big prize opening 91. Store in the normal electric accessory solenoid control.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the subsequent special symbol setting process (S14), and information on the operating state of the probability variation function of the special symbol display device (70, 71) is set. In this process, the value of the special symbol mode flag is loaded (in other words, the value of the special symbol mode flag is incorporated) and stored in a predetermined register. Next, the power recovery setting (S15) and the data storage process (S16) are executed, and further, the communication line abnormality detection setting with the payout control board is executed (S17). Here, the error flag address is set. Is set, and the communication line abnormality bit of the content of the error 1 flag is set.

  Subsequently, in the process of starting the game progress interrupt process, in order to start the game progress interrupt, the address of the PTC0 counter setting register is set, and the count value of a predetermined size (corresponding to about 4 ms here) is set to the PTC0 counter. It is set in the register (S18). As a result, a game progress interrupt is generated every 4 ms.

  Then, processing for restoring various registers other than the flag register is executed (S19), and processing for determining whether or not the state when the power interruption has occurred is interrupt enabled (S20) is executed. If the interrupt is prohibited when the power is turned off (S20: NO), the flag register is restored (S21), and the control process is turned off based on the restart index information set in the stack pointer. Return to processing of the address to be returned before occurrence. On the other hand, if the interrupt is permitted when the power is turned off (S20: YES), the flag register is restored (S22), the interrupt permission is set (S23), and then set to the stack pointer. Based on the restart index information, the control process is returned to the process to be returned before the occurrence of the power interruption.

Here, the flag register is restored separately from the other registers. The flag register stores game state information such as probability change, and the control processing is turned off as much as possible to restore the information. This is because it is performed immediately before returning before the occurrence of.
<< Process when RWM is initialized >>

  In the RWM initialization process (S24 to S28), after clearing the RWM area (S24), initial setting of the RWM (S25), initialization of the effect display (effect display device 60) (S26), and Time setting for game progress interruption (S27) is performed. Among these, in the process of clearing the RWM area (S24) to initial setting of the RWM (S25), clear data (00H) is set in all areas of the RWM, and the clear data is stored as the reference value of the relative address. Is incremented by one. Further, bit 7 of the reference value is inspected, and the inspection result is determined. If the inspection result is 0 in the inspection result determination process, the process returns to the process of storing the clear data in the reference value, and the address of the initialization data setting table is set. Thereby, the initial value of RWM is set. Note that the clearing of the RWM area is not limited to that performed for all areas. For example, only a part of the area where specific information is stored or only an area excluding an unused area is cleared. Also good.

  Note that “H” described at the end of the numerical value, such as “00H” that is the value of the clear data described above, indicates that the numerical value is expressed in hexadecimal. Further, in this embodiment, a numerical value representing a hexadecimal number is attached with a symbol “H”, a numerical value representing a binary number is attached with a symbol “B”, and a symbol indicating such a notation is added. It is assumed that the numerical values not shown are expressed in decimal numbers.

In the initialization of the effect display (S26), command request data setting is performed using the address of the effect initial command setting table as an argument to initialize the effect display device 60, and to make a command transmission request for error status and illegal prize ball monitoring information. Execute the process.
<< Timing setting process for game progress interruption >>

In the time setting process for game progress interrupt (S27), in order to start the game progress interrupt, a count value of a predetermined size is set in the corresponding counter setting register, and a game progress interrupt is generated every 4 ms, for example. .
<< Circulation process >>

  After the time setting for game progress interruption (S27), preparation for recursion (restart) of a predetermined timer which is an interrupt processing time monitoring means and update of random number related values used for generating initial values of various random numbers are performed. Circulation processing (S32 (S28 to S31)) is executed. In this circulation process (S32 (S28 to S31)), in order to manage gaming machines, interrupts are first prohibited (S28). Further, in preparation for recurring the interrupt processing time monitoring means, a predetermined value as the first recursion information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means clear register (S29). The first recursive information is a predetermined value such as 55H.

  Then, an initial value random number update process is executed (S30), and the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Thereafter, after permitting the interrupt (S31), the process returns to the interrupt prohibition (S28) again, and the subsequent processes (S28 to S31) are sequentially repeated to circulate the control process.

Each time the interrupt permission (S28) is executed, the above-described game progress interrupt becomes possible, and the game progress interrupt process is repeated every predetermined period (here, 4ms period) based on the period information set in S27. .
<< Initial value random number update process >>

  In the initial value random number update process (S30), since the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated, the random number is updated from the initial value random number update table. The number of times is acquired, and the initial random number is updated for the number of times of update. In the acquisition of the random number update count, the content (number of random numbers) indicated by the data address (0D10H) in the first column of the first column of the initial random number update table (see FIG. 15A) is used as the random number update count. . Here, the number of random numbers is three: an initial value random number per normal symbol, a symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and a soft initial value random number per special symbol. Furthermore, in the process of updating the initial value random number for the number of times of update, a 2-byte soft random number for the number of times of update, using as an argument the data address (0D13H) of the initial value random number address (lower order) per normal symbol of the initial value random number update table. Update processing (described later) is executed. When the number of updates is two or more, the reference value of the relative address acquired by the previously executed 2-byte soft random number update process is used as an argument. Then, using the random number value obtained by the 2-byte soft random number update process, a random number related value in the initial value random number update process (S30) is generated.

  Specifically, the address of the initial value random number update table is set as the reference value of the relative address, and the content of the reference value is loaded as the number of random numbers (in other words, the content of the reference value is incorporated). Next, after the reference value is incremented by 1 and the number of random numbers is saved, a 2-byte soft random number update process is executed. Further, the number of random numbers is restored, and if the result of decrementing the number of random numbers by 1 is not 0, the process returns to the process for saving the number of random numbers, and if it is 0, the initial value random number update process (S30) is exited.

In addition, in the initial value random number update process (S30), when there is an abnormality in the random number related value, the random number related value is corrected. In this random number related value correction process, a random number related value is generated based on the random number value obtained in the 2-byte soft random number update process, and a predetermined value is subtracted from this random number related value. If the result of subtraction is 0, it is determined that the random number related value is normal and stores the random number related value, but if it is less than 0, it is determined that the random number related value is normal and the maximum value of the random number related value +1 is set as a correction value, the correction value is added to the random number related value, and then the obtained random number related value is stored. Thereby, the abnormality of the random number related value is detected, and the abnormal random number related value is corrected. That is, the random number related value is corrected by performing a predetermined calculation on the random number related value and correcting the random number related value when the calculation result does not become the predetermined value.
<< 2-byte soft random number update process >>

In the above-described 2-byte soft random number update process, the maximum random number value and random number storage address are acquired from the input relative address reference value, and the random number is updated. In the acquisition of the maximum value of the random number, the content indicated by the reference value +0 is the lower value of the random number maximum value, and the content indicated by the reference value +1 is the higher value of the random number maximum value. In the acquisition of the random number storage address, the content indicated by the reference value +2 is the lower random number storage address, and the RWM head upper address is the higher random number storage address. In updating the random number, the random number is incremented by +1, and when the random number exceeds the maximum value, the random number is incremented by 0. Therefore, a 2-byte random number is acquired from the content indicated by the acquired random number storage address, and the acquired random number is incremented by one. As a result of addition, if the obtained random number maximum value is exceeded, 0 is set. The updated random number is stored in the obtained random number storage address and then set in the output random number data. Further, the reference value +3 is set to the reference value to be output.
<Game progress interrupt processing>

  Next, the game progress interrupt process repeated at a cycle of 4 ms based on the period information set in the process of time setting for game progress interrupt (S27) will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the game progress interrupt processing, setting of interrupt operation conditions (S41, S42), recursion of the interrupt processing time monitoring means (S43), management of gaming machines (S45 to S70), interrupt permission ( S71) is performed in order to return to the process before the game progress interruption occurs.

  Specifically, in the interrupt operation condition setting process (S41, S42), in order to clear the interrupt flag, the interrupt operation condition setting value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41), and the interrupt operation condition setting is performed. The value is set in the control register corresponding to the predetermined input terminal (S42). Thereafter, the second recursion information is set (S43), and the second recursion information is further set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means register (S44). As will be described later, the second recursion information is a condition for recurring and restarting the monitoring time of the interrupt processing time monitoring means together with the first recursion information set previously.

  In the management of gaming machines (S45 to S70), the following processing is executed in order to manage gaming machines. First, an input process (S45) is executed to monitor the input of a specific signal. What is monitored here is the various switches attached to the game board surface, the pan full switch, the open signal, the magnetic detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, the glass non-detection signal, and the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal It is.

  Subsequently, various random number update processing (S46) is executed to update the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number. Further, an initial value update type random number update process (S47) is executed to update the random numbers per ordinary symbol, the symbol random numbers per special symbol, and the soft random numbers per special symbol. Next, an initial value random number update process (S48) is executed to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol. Further, in order to update the 2-byte timer, a timer subtraction process (S49) is executed, and in order to set an effective period of the second start winning opening 63, an effective period setting process (S50) of the second start opening is executed. .

  Further, a winning monitoring process (S 51) is executed to store the number of times a prize ball is paid out, create an output request for board external information, and send a command to be sent to the sub-board 104. Subsequently, in order to control the payout control board 103, a prize ball control process (S52) is executed.

  Next, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operating gate (operating ports 68a, 68b), in order to store a random number related to the normal symbol, a normal symbol operating gate monitoring process (S53) is executed, and the normal symbol display device or In order to perform the process related to the normal symbol electric accessory, the normal symbol control process (S54) is executed. Further, the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S55) is executed in order to monitor the normal symbol variation start. In addition, in order to monitor the winnings of the first starting winning port 62 and the second starting winning port 63 of the game ball, the starting port monitoring control process (S56) is executed, and the first special symbol display unit 70 or the second special symbol is executed. In order to perform the process which concerns on the display part 71, a special symbol control process (S57) is performed. Subsequently, in order to perform the process related to the special electric accessory, the special electric accessory control process (S58) is executed, and the process related to the validity period of the first grand prize port 91 or the second grand prize port 92 is performed. The special winning opening valid period setting process (S59) is executed, and the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S60) is executed to monitor the fluctuation start of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Next, anomaly detection processing (S61) is performed to monitor magnetism, disconnection / short circuit / power supply monitoring, radio wave monitoring, glass frame set / game board frame open / closed status monitoring, and paired glass monitoring Then, in order to detect an abnormality in the incoming ball passage time, an incoming ball passage time abnormality detection process (S62) is executed. In addition, in order to make a display request for the number of times that the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of the operation reserved balls of the normal symbol display device, and the number of the operation reserved balls of the special symbol display device, a game state display process (S63). ) And a handle state signal inspection process (S64) is executed in order to monitor the touch state (including the operation amount state) of the firing handle 20. In addition, special symbol display, normal symbol display, special symbol display device (70, 71) display of the number of active reserve balls, normal symbol display device display of the number of active reserve balls, game state display, special electric accessory LED output processing (S65) is executed in order to display the number of times of continuous operation and error display.

  Subsequently, a firing control signal output process (S66) is executed in order to output a signal for prohibiting / permitting the launch of the game ball, and a test signal output process (S67) in order to create and output a signal to be output to the test apparatus. Execute. Further, in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid, the first big prize opening opening solenoid, and the second big prize opening opening solenoid, the solenoid output processing (S68) is executed, and an effect control command is transmitted. The effect control command transmission process (S69) is executed, and the external information output process (S70) is executed to output signals to the external terminals (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)).

Thereafter, the interrupt permission (S71) is executed, and the control process returns to the return (RET). Then, using the remaining time until the next game interrupt is executed, the above-described circulation process (S32 (S28 to S31)) of the control start process is executed.
<< Input processing >>

  The input process (S45) is a control module related to switch input. In this input process (S45), each switch attached to the game board surface, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, an open signal, a radio wave detection signal, In order to monitor the input of various signals of the touch state signal, the number of inspections, the input port address, the level mask data, the level address, and the rising mask data are acquired from the input information table, and the switch input is performed for the number of inspections.

  In obtaining the number of inspections, the input port address, the level mask data, the level address, and the rising mask data, the contents indicated by the address of the input information table (input information table +0) are used as the number of inspections, and the input port address from the input information table +1 Level mask data, level address, and rising mask data are acquired for the number of inspections.

  In switch input, after the level data of the acquired input port is created, if the acquired rising mask data is other than 0, the rising data is created. In creating the level data, the state of the bit indicated by the acquired level mask data is read continuously for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 5 μs) from the acquired input port, and 5 times. Are stored in the acquired level address as the current level data. The upper address (level upper address) of the level data is the RWM head upper address (0F0H). Further, the previous level data is stored as a bit that has not been matched even once in five readings.

In creating rising data, in order to create rising data of the bit indicated by the acquired rising mask data, the exclusive OR of the current and previous level data is calculated, and the result of the exclusive OR and the current level data Calculate logical product. Further, the logical product of the generated rising data and the acquired rising mask data is calculated, and the result of this logical product is stored in the area of the address added to the acquired address of the level address.
<< Various random number update process >>

In the various random number update processing (S46), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. In the update of the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the normal symbol variation pattern random number is incremented by 1 and set to 0 when exceeding the maximum value (232 in this case), the lower address of the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the normal symbol variation pattern random number maximum The RWM update process is executed with the value +1 (here, 223) as an argument. In updating the variation pattern random number, a predetermined value (3511 in this case) is subtracted from the value of the variation pattern random number in order to update the variation pattern random number. If the subtraction result is less than 0, the variation pattern random number maximum value + 1 (here, 50000) is added to the subtraction result. The calculated result is stored in a fluctuation pattern random number.
<< Initial value update type random number update process >>

  In the initial value update type random number update process (S47), the initial value update type random number update table (see FIG. 15B) is used to update the random numbers per normal symbol, the symbol random numbers per special symbol, and the soft random numbers per special symbol. Obtain the number of random numbers to be updated, the maximum random number value, the address of the initial value update type random number, the address of the initial value work, and update the initial value update type random number.

  In the acquisition of the number of random numbers to be updated, the maximum random number value, the initial value update type random number address, and the initial value work address, the data address (0D30H) in the first column of the left column of the initial value update type random number update table ) (Number of random numbers) is the number of random numbers to be updated, and the maximum random number, initial value update random number address, and initial value work from the second column on the left column of the initial value update random number update table Are sequentially acquired for the number of random numbers to be updated.

In the initial value update type random number update, the initial value update type random number is incremented by +1 and set to 0 when the maximum value is exceeded, so the maximum value of the initial value update type random number in the initial value update type random number update table is described. The 2-byte soft random number update process is executed using the current address as an argument. As a result of execution, if the updated initial value update type random number value matches the contents of the acquired initial value work random number, the initial value of the initial value update type random number is updated two lines below the acquired initial value work address. The initial value random number indicated by the address (0D37H), the address three lines below (0D38H) is set as a new initial value, and stored in the acquired initial value update type random number address and the acquired initial value work address.
<< Initial value random number update process >>

For the initial value random number update process, the same program module as the initial value random number update process executed in the control start process is used, but the update period of the random number related value is the period of the game progress interruption (here 4 ms). This is different from the case where it is executed during the control start process.
<< Timer subtraction process >>

In the timer subtraction process (S49), in order to update the 2-byte timer, the contents of the 2-byte timer update table address (2-byte timer update table address + 0) are set as the number of timers, and the next address (2-byte timer update) The lower address of the 2-byte timer is acquired for the number of timers from the table address + 1). Also, the obtained 2-byte timer is inspected. If the 2-byte timer value is other than 0 as a result of the inspection, the 2-byte timer is updated (contents of 2-byte timer-1). If the value of the 2-byte timer is 0 as a result of the inspection, the 2-byte timer is not updated. The upper address of the 2-byte timer is the RWM head address (0F0H).
<< Starting port 2 effective period setting process >>

In the effective period setting process (S50) of the start port 2, in order to set the effective period of the second start winning port 63, a value corresponding to the value of the normal symbol status (described later) and the value of the start port 2 effective extension timer Is stored in the start port 2 effective period flag (storage area thereof). The relationship between the value of the normal symbol status and the value stored in the start port 2 effective period flag corresponding to the value of the start port 2 effective extension timer is 3 in which the normal symbol status value indicates that the normal electric accessory is operating. In this case, no value is set for the start port 2 effective extension timer, and predetermined start port 2 effective period data (1) is used as a value stored in the start port 2 effective period flag. On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol status indicates a value other than that during normal electric accessory operation, and if the value of the start port 2 effective extension timer is not 0, the predetermined start port is stored as the value stored in the start port 2 effective period flag. 2 Valid period data (1) is used. In addition, when the value of the normal symbol status indicates a value other than that during the operation of the normal electric accessory, if the value of the start port 2 effective extension timer is 0, the predetermined start port is stored as the value stored in the start port 2 effective period flag. 2 Invalid period data (0) is used.
<< Prize monitoring process >>

In the winning monitoring process (S51), storage of the number of times a prize ball is paid out, creation of a security output request to be output to an external terminal (various external output terminals of the aforementioned external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)), and In order to make a transmission request for a command to be transmitted to the effect control board (here, the sub-main board 301), the contents indicated by the winning monitoring table address (winning monitoring table +0) are set as the number of inspections, and the game ball switches for the number of inspections. Perform pass inspection. As a result of the switch passage inspection, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the switch, the number of prize balls is stored, a security output request to be output to an external terminal is created, and a command transmission request is made. Here, the configuration of the winning monitoring table includes the number of inspections and inspection data of various game ball detection devices (game ball switches). The configuration of the inspection data includes switch bit data, EVENT data, MODE data, and winning ball determination. Data and invalid period presence / absence judgment data.
<< Prize ball control processing >>

In the prize ball control process (S52), in order to control the payout control board 103, monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 103, command transmission request to the payout control board 103, command transmission to the payout control board 103 and payout Inspection of received data from the control board 103 is performed in order. In monitoring data reception from the payout control board 103, data reception monitoring processing is executed. In a command transmission request to the payout control board 103, payout command request processing is executed. In command transmission to the payout control board 103 and reception data inspection from the payout control board 103, payout command control processing is executed.
<< Normal symbol operation gate monitoring process >>

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S53), the normal symbol operation gate (in this case, the operation ports 68a and 68b) of the game ball is monitored, and if it is determined that the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate, Renew the number of symbol operation hold balls (ordinary symbol hold number). As a result of the update, when it is confirmed that the game ball has passed when the value of the number of normal symbol operation reserved balls is less than the maximum number of 4, the random number related to the normal symbol is stored.
<< Normal design control process >>

In the normal symbol control process (S54), in order to perform the normal symbol display in the main control display device 53 and the process related to the normal electric accessory, the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol control is in progress, The process related to the normal symbol display or the ordinary electric accessory is executed. In monitoring the state of the normal symbol, if the normal symbol status is other than 0, it is determined that the normal symbol control is in progress. During the normal symbol control process, the value of the normal symbol status takes 1 to 4, and the corresponding control module is executed in each normal symbol status 1 to 4. The normal symbol status 1 is during normal symbol fluctuation, the normal symbol status 2 is during normal symbol stop symbol display, the normal symbol status 3 is during normal electric character operation, and the normal symbol status 4 is during normal electric character operation end demonstration. It corresponds.
<< Normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process >>

  In the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S55), when the normal symbol operating state is monitored and it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation is started, the normal symbol operation holding ball number update, hit determination, stop symbol determination, Set normal symbol variation. When monitoring the normal symbol operating state, if the normal symbol status value is 0, indicating that normal symbol variation is on standby, and if the normal symbol operation holding ball count value is other than 0, normal symbol variation starts. Judge that you want to. In updating the number of normal symbol operation reservation balls, the content of the number of normal symbol operation reservation balls is decremented by one. In the determination of the hit determination and the stop symbol, the normal symbol hit determination process is executed. In the normal symbol fluctuation setting, after setting the normal symbol fluctuation pattern number and the normal symbol fluctuation time, the RWM used for normal symbol state setting and hit determination and fluctuation pattern determination is cleared.

In setting the normal symbol variation pattern number, the probability variation function inspection processing is executed, and as a result of the execution, byte data acquisition processing is executed using the acquired normal probability variation operation data and the address of the normal symbol variation control table as arguments. As a result of the execution, a 1-byte selection number acquisition process is executed with the address calculated by adding the acquired base address and the acquired 1-byte data and the value of the normal symbol variation pattern determination area as arguments. As a result of execution, the acquired selection number is set as a normal symbol variation pattern number. In setting the variation time of the normal symbol, the 1-byte selection number acquisition process is executed using the value obtained with reference to the normal symbol variation time table address (-2) and the normal symbol variation pattern number as arguments. As a result of execution, the acquired 2-byte data is stored in the normal symbol timer. In clearing the RWM used for normal symbol state setting, hit determination, and variation pattern determination, the data storage process is performed using the normal symbol variation state setting table address as an argument to set the normal symbol state to normal symbol variation. Run. Further, the normal symbol per-determination determination region used for the hit determination and the normal symbol variation pattern determination region used for determination of the variation pattern are cleared to zero.
<< Starter monitoring control process >>

In the starting port monitoring control process (S56), the game ball starting port 1 (first starting winning port 62) winning and starting port 2 (second starting winning port 63) winning are monitored. For both the start port 1 and the start port 2, the start port monitoring process is executed using the corresponding monitoring table (start port 1 monitoring table or start port 2 monitoring table). The value of the 2 effective period flag is inspected, and when the value of the start port 2 effective period flag is predetermined start port 2 effective period data as a result of the inspection, the start port monitoring process is executed.
<< Special symbol control process >>

In the special symbol control process (S57), the waiting state is inspected. 2 The special symbol display unit 71) is executed. In the winning waiting state test, if the value of the special electric game status (described later) is 0, it is determined that the winning waiting state. In the process related to the special symbol display device 1 or the special symbol display device 2, the value of the special symbol 2 game status is inspected in order to perform any of the processes related to the special symbol display device 1 or the special symbol display device 2. If the result of the inspection is 0, it is determined that the process related to the special symbol display device 1 is performed. If the result is other than 0, it is determined that the process related to the special symbol display device 2 is performed. In each of the processing related to the special symbol display device 1 and the processing related to the special symbol display device 2, the address and the special symbol control table of the corresponding special game status (special game 1 game status or special game 2 game status). The special symbol control general-purpose process is executed with the address of the special figure 1 control table or special figure 2 control table as an argument.
<< Special Electric Property Control Process >>

In the special electric accessory control process (S58), in order to perform processing related to the special electric accessory, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric accessory is inspected, and the condition device is operating or the special electric accessory is operating. If it is determined, the process related to the special electric accessory is executed. In the inspection of the operating state of the condition device and the special electric accessory, if the value of the special electric game status is other than 0, it is determined that the condition device is operating or the special electric accessory is operating. While the condition device is operating or the special electric accessory is operating, the value of the special electric game status takes 1 to 8, and the corresponding control module is executed in each special electric game status 1 to 8. The special electric game status 1 is preparing to open the big prize opening, the special electric game status 2 is operating the special electric accessory, the special electric game status 3 is closing the big prize opening, the special electric game status 4 is ending the jackpot demonstration, the special electric game status 5 corresponds to a small hit start demonstration, special electric game status 6 corresponds to a small hit special electric operation, special electric game status 7 corresponds to a small hit big prize closing, and special electric game status 8 corresponds to a small hit end demonstration.
<< Large winning opening period setting process >>

In the big prize opening validity period setting process (S59), a value corresponding to the value of the big prize opening validity period buffer is stored in the big prize opening validity period flag. For example, if the value of the prize winning unit valid period buffer is 0, the prize winning unit invalid period data is stored in the prize winning unit valid period flag, and if the value of the prize winning unit valid period buffer is other than 0, the prize winning unit valid The period data is stored in the big prize opening validity period flag. In the present embodiment, the first prize winning port 91 and the second prize winning opening 92 are provided as the prize winning openings, but the same control process can be applied to both.
<< Special symbol variation start monitoring control process >>

In the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S60), the fluctuation start of special symbol 1 (first special symbol) and special symbol 2 (second special symbol) is monitored. In both of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the address of the special figure game status (the special figure 1 game status or the special figure 2 game status) and the special figure fluctuation start monitoring table (the special figure 1 fluctuation start monitoring table or the special figure 2). The special symbol variation start monitoring process is executed with the address of the variation start monitoring table) as an argument.
<< Abnormality detection processing >>

  In the abnormality detection process (S61), magnetic monitoring, disconnection / short circuit / power supply monitoring, radio wave monitoring, glass frame set / game board frame / back set (here, set base 31) open / closed state monitoring, etc. To do so, create an error judgment value. After that, the error state inspection, the storage of the error state, and the display request of the error state effect of the gaming machine to the effect control board (here, the sub main board 301) are sequentially performed. If it is determined in the error state inspection that there is no change in the error state, the storage of the error state and the display of the error state effect of the gaming machine on the effect control board are not performed.

In creating the error judgment value, in order to create the error judgment value, the magnetic detection signal inspection, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal inspection, the radio wave detection signal inspection, and the open signal inspection are sequentially performed. However, the inspection data used for these inspections is a value obtained by logically ANDing the result of exclusive OR of the value of the received signal level and the value of the error flag with the communication abnormality mask data. In the error state inspection, the error flag comparison value is compared with the error flag value to check the error state, and if they match, it is determined that there is no change in the error state. The comparison value of the error flag is a value reflecting bit 0 of the communication line abnormality determination value in bit 0 of the error determination value created in creating the error determination value. In storing the error state, the error flag comparison value created in the error state inspection is stored in the error flag. In the display request of the error state effect of the gaming machine to the effect control board, the command request setting process is executed using the MODE (error A) data and the error flag comparison value created in the error state inspection as arguments.
<< Incoming ball passing time abnormality detection process >>

  In the incoming ball passage time abnormality detection process (S62), in order to detect the incoming ball passage time abnormality, the continuous on time of each switch (each winning detection device) level is monitored. If it is determined that there has been, the setting of an abnormal entry time, a command transmission request, and a security output request to be output to an external terminal are created in order. However, when it is determined that the continuous on time is not abnormal in the monitoring of the continuous on time at each switch level, a security output request to be output to the external terminal is not created.

In monitoring the continuous on-time at each switch level, in order to monitor the continuous on-time at each switch level, the content indicated by the address in the continuous switch table is set as the number of inspections, and switch bit data is sequentially acquired for the number of inspections. Obtain the timer address corresponding to each acquired switch bit data, measure the switch level on time, and if the continuous on time is determined to be abnormal, obtain the EVENT data stored at the address corresponding to each switch bit data I do. If it is determined that the continuous on-time is not abnormal, EVENT (error B0) data (00H) is set. In addition, when the value of the acquired EVENT data and the ball passing time abnormality flag (described later) is different, it is determined that there has been a change from the previous time. In setting the ball passing time abnormality, the EVENT data is stored in the ball passing time abnormality flag. In the command transmission request, the command request setting process is executed with MODE (error B) data (9EH) and EVENT data as arguments. In creating the security output request to be output to the external terminal, the signal output request process is executed with the address +1 of the abnormality sensor detection timer as an argument.
<< Game state display process >>

  In the game state display process (S63), the display request for the number of times that the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of the operation reserved balls of the normal symbol display device, and the number of the operation reserved balls of the special symbol display device is issued. In order to perform the display data creation of the number of times that the special electric accessory is operated continuously, the display data creation of the error state, the creation of the display data of the number of suspension balls of the normal symbol display device, and the operation suspension ball of the special symbol display device Create number display data. More specifically, the “display data creation” referred to here is a process of storing a table offset value for creating display data in each RWM work area in the LED output process (S65) described later. Represents. And in this game state display process (S63), the process of confirming the value of a predetermined | prescribed timer and switching a lighting pattern is performed.

  In creating display data of the number of times that the special electric accessory operates continuously, in order to create display data of the number of times that the special electric accessory operates continuously, the number of inspections is acquired from the address of the maximum operation number comparison table . For the number of inspections acquired, the final round data in the maximum operation number comparison table and the value of the maximum winning opening maximum opening number are sequentially compared. It is stored in the area of the special electric operation number display number as display data of the number of times. If all do not match, 0 is stored as display data in the area of the special electric operation number display number. More specifically, when referring to a target segment table (described later), reference to the corresponding segment table is skipped because 0 (= 00H) is input. In addition, since the display of the number of special electricity operations (display of the number of rounds) is performed by the status indicator lamp 1 (first status indicator lamp 231) and the status indicator lamp 2 (second status indicator lamp 232), The lighting data of each of the status indicator lamps 1 and 2 is created by LED output processing during different interrupt processing, and stored in a predetermined area of the RWM.

  In creating the error state display data, in order to create the error state display data, the state display lamp 1 (first state display lamp 231), the status display lamp 2 (second state display lamp 232), and the main control error display lamp are displayed. Display data 233 is created. Among these, in the creation of display data of the status indicator lamp 1 (first status indicator lamp 231) and the status indicator lamp 2 (second status indicator lamp 232), an initialization monitoring timer is used to create each data. When the value of 1 is inspected and the value of the initialization monitoring timer is 0 as a result of the inspection, 0 is stored in the area of error state display number 1. If the value of the initialization monitoring timer is other than 0 as a result of the inspection, 1 is stored in the error status display number 1 area. More specifically, when referring to a target segment table (to be described later), 0 (= 00H) for turning off or 1 (= 01H) for turning on is stored as data. Stores the offset value for referring to.

  Further, the “area of error status display number 1” described above is “F0ADH” of the RWM work area (see FIG. 22), as will be described later, and this value is referred to in the LED output processing (digit 5 o'clock). The Then, a value of an error state segment table 2 (120FH in FIG. 20) described later is called to generate display data. If the value stored in the F0ADH area is 0, it is determined that there is no lighting data in the LED output process (S65 in FIG. 13), and the value of 120FH is not called.

  The initialization monitoring timer 1 described above is a timer that is set when the RWM is cleared. As will be described later, the status indicator lamps 1 to 3 (first status indicator lamp 231, first status indicator lamp 232, main control). This is a timer that measures the time for lighting the error indicator lamp 233) for a predetermined time (here, approximately 30 seconds).

  Further, in creating the display data of the main control error indicator lamp 233, an error check process is executed with the game state error output mask data (00011111B) as an argument for data creation. More specifically, if the result of ANDing the data in the current error state storage area of the RWM and the mask data (result of logical product operation) is not 0, it is determined that there is an error. As a result of execution, when no error is detected, 0 is stored in the area of error status display number 2, and when error is detected, 1 is stored in the area of error status display number 2.

  Subsequently, in the display data creation (storage of the offset value for creating the display data) related to the number of suspended balls of the normal symbol display device described above, and the display data creation related to the number of suspended balls of the special symbol display device, In order to create display data, the contents shown in the operation hold ball number display update table +0 are updated the number of times of update (“3” is stored in order to create three hold display data of ordinary figure, special figure 1 and special figure 2). ) As the number of updates, the lower address of the number of suspended balls (in the order of ordinary figure, special figure 1, special figure 2), and the lower address of the flashing timer (in order of ordinary figure, special figure 1, special figure 2) Are sequentially acquired, the blinking timer is updated, and the display pattern number is created.

  In updating the flashing timer, for updating the flashing timer, a value (= flashing timer value) stored in an RWM work area address in which a predetermined upper address is combined with a lower address of the flashing timer is used as an argument. Display number switching processing is executed. Then, based on the execution result, the RWM address storing the display data (offset value designating whether blinking or not) is acquired for each of the normal map, special map 1 and special map 2. In addition, the processing here uses the area of the special figure 2 reserved ball number display number (F0B8H) from the usual figure reserved ball number blinking timer (F0B0H) in the RWM work area (see FIG. 22) described later as necessary. It is processing to do. The display number switching process described above will be described later.

Further, in the creation of the display pattern number described above, in order to create the display pattern number, the content indicated by the RWM acquired above (data indicating the presence or absence of lighting in blinking) is set to a value twice the number of suspended balls. Are added, and the result of the addition (the normal pattern or the lighting pattern data of FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 in the current interrupt) is stored in the area of RWM address + 1 (lighting pattern storage area). Note that the address of the number of suspended balls and the upper address of the blinking timer are the RWM head upper address (F0H).
<< Handle state signal inspection process >>

  In the handle state signal inspection process (S64), in order to monitor the touch state of the firing handle 20, the handle state is inspected, and if it is determined that the handle state has changed as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitoring timer is subtracted. , Handle state update, handle state monitoring timer setting, and handle state effect command transmission request. As a result of the inspection, if it is determined that there is no change in the handle state, a handle state monitoring timer is set. In the subtraction of the handle state monitoring timer, when it is determined that the handle timer is being subtracted, the subsequent processing relating to the handle state is not performed.

  In checking the handle state, in order to check the handle state, the value of the received signal level and the value of the handle state flag are checked. When the bit indicating the value of the received signal level is 0 and the value of the handle state flag is 00H, it is determined that there is no change in the handle state, and when the value of the handle state flag is 01H, it is determined that the handle state is changed. To do. Further, when the bit indicating the value of the received signal level is 1 and the value of the handle state flag is 00H, it is determined that there is a change in the handle state, and when the value of the handle state flag is 01H, it is determined that there is no change in the handle state. To do.

  In the subtraction of the handle state monitoring timer, the value of the handle state monitoring timer is decremented by 1 to subtract the handle state monitoring timer. If the result of subtraction is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being subtracted. In updating the handle state, in order to update the handle state, a value corresponding to the value of the handle state flag is stored in the handle state flag. When the value of the handle state flag is 00H, the value stored in the handle state flag is 01H, and when the value of the handle state flag is 01H, the value stored in the handle state flag is 00H.

In setting the handle state monitoring timer, in order to set the handle state monitoring timer, the handle state monitoring time is stored in the handle state monitoring timer. In the command transmission request of the handle state effect, in order to make a command transmission request of the handle state effect, the result of ANDing MODE (handle state information) data and 7FH which is a predetermined value, and the lower address of the handle state flag The command request setting process is executed using as an argument.
<< LED output processing >>

  In the LED output process (S65), special symbol display, normal symbol display, special symbol display device operation hold ball number display, normal symbol display device operation hold ball number display, gaming state display, special electric drive In order to display the number of times an accessory is operated continuously, to display the operating state of the special electric accessory storage when the accessory continuous operation device is not operating, to display a right-handed or left-handed display, and to display an error Display initialization and display data output are sequentially performed.

To summarize the contents of this LED output processing (S65), in the above-described display initialization, clear data is output to the segment output port in order to initialize the display. Further, in the display data output described above, in order to output the display data, after the digit corresponding to the data to be displayed is output, the LED segment data to be displayed is output. The circuit configuration, display configuration, and specific processing mode relating to such LED output processing (S65) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 and 16 to 24.
<< Launch control signal output processing >>

  In the firing control signal output process (S66), in order to output a signal for prohibiting / permitting the launch of the game ball, setting of the prohibition / permission of launch corresponding to the communication state with the payout control board 103 and the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality and After obtaining the output data for prohibiting / permitting firing, a signal for prohibiting / permitting firing is output. In the acquisition of the prohibition / permission setting and the prohibition / permission of emission corresponding to the communication state with the payout control board 103 and the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality, a flag reflecting the bit setting request is created and the output data To get.

When creating a flag that reflects a bit setting request, if the error flag communication error bit or error flag disconnection short circuit power supply error bit is ON, the bit clear request is reflected in the flag, otherwise, a bit set request It is reflected in the flag. In the acquisition of output data, a bit data setting process is executed with a flag reflecting a bit setting request, a buffer address such as a digit, and a firing permission signal bit data as arguments. As a result of execution, the acquired bit data is used as output data. In outputting the prohibition / permission signal, the acquired output data is output to an output port such as a digit in order to output a prohibition / permission signal.
<< Test signal output processing >>

  In the test signal output process (S67), a signal to be output to the test apparatus is created and output to the corresponding output port. Of the plurality of test signal output ports, the test signal output port 1 outputs a signal indicating that the special symbol is changing, the jackpot, the accessory continuous operating device is operating, or the condition device operating from each terminal associated therewith. The test signal output port 2 is connected to each terminal to which signals of the normal electric accessory open extended state, the normal symbol variation time shortened state, the normal symbol high probability state, the special symbol variation time shortened state, and the special symbol high probability state are associated. Output. The test signal output port 3 outputs a normal electric accessory operating signal, an ordinary symbol changing signal, an ordinary symbol per signal, and a special electric accessory operating signal from the associated terminals. In order to create signals to be output to the test signal output ports 1 to 3, output data creation processing is performed using the address of the corresponding test signal data table among the test signal data tables 1 to 3 as an argument.

The test signal output port 5 outputs gaming machine error status, launch position designation, and symbol data signals from the associated terminals. In creating a signal to be output to the test signal output port 5, the lower 2 bits of the normal symbol combination number are bits 0 and 1 of symbol data. Further, the error inspection process is executed with the test terminal error output mask data as an argument. If an error is detected as a result of the execution, it is determined that a gaming machine error is occurring, and a gaming machine error state signal is turned on. Otherwise, create an off of gaming machine error status signal. When the value of the hit state flag is 0, the launch position designation signals 1 to 3 are created off. In other cases, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned on, and the launch position designation signal 2 and the launch position designation signal 3 are turned off. The test signal output port 6 and the test signal output port 7 output a symbol data signal from each associated terminal.
<< Solenoid output processing >>

In the solenoid output process (S68), the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid and the large winning opening opening solenoid are output, so that the output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid and the output data of the large winning opening releasing solenoid are acquired. And output data. When acquiring the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid and the output data of the large opening opening solenoid, the solenoid operation flag and solenoid operation timer are acquired, the output data is acquired, and the solenoid operation timer is updated in order. Do. In the output data output, the logical output result of the obtained output data of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid and the output data of the special prize opening opening solenoid is output to the solenoid output port.
<< Direction control command transmission process >>

  In the effect control command transmission process (S69), the transmission request of the command to be transmitted to the effect control board is inspected, and when it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired and the used command buffer is cleared. Then, MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data is acquired, MODE data is output, MODE data is held, EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data is acquired, and EVENT data is output sequentially. The transmission timing of the command data is defined by the effect data strobe, and a predetermined time (here, 46 μs or more) after the on time (here, 2 μs or more) of the effect data strobe signal is the effect data holding time.

  In the inspection of the command transmission request, the value of the command request writing position (area) is compared with the value of the command request reading position (area), and if the values do not match, it is determined that there is a command transmission request. To obtain the requested command data, add the calculated value of the address stored in the command request reading position and the logical product of the position correction bit data and the address of the command buffer. Is command data. After obtaining the calculated address value stored at the command request reading position, the command request reading position is incremented by 1 in order to update the contents of the command data reading position. In clearing the command buffer, the command buffer in which the acquired command data is stored is cleared to 0 in order to clear the command buffer.

In acquiring MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, the upper order of the acquired command data is set as MODE data. In outputting the MODE data, after the acquired MODE data is output to the effect command output port, a strobe output process is executed to output the effect data strobe. In holding the MODE data, a wait is performed for a predetermined time (here, 46 μs or more) in order to hold the MODE data. In the acquisition of EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, the acquired command data lower order is defined as EVENT data. In outputting EVENT data, after the acquired EVENT data is output to the same effect command output port as described above, strobe output processing is executed in order to output the effect data strobe.
<< External information output processing >>

  In the external information output process (S70), a signal to be output to the external output terminal of the external relay terminal board 46 is created, and the created signal is output. The configuration of the external information output port includes external information 1 to external information 6 and security, and the remaining one bit is unused. In creating external information 1, external information 3 to external information 6, output data creation processing is executed using the address of the external information data table as an argument. If the value of the hit flag is special figure 1 small hit data, and if the probability variation function inspection process is executed and the probability variation function of the normal symbol display device is not activated as a result of the execution, the external information 3 bit is turned on. create.

In creating the external information 2, in order to create the external information 2, a predetermined bit of the start port information timer is inspected. As a result of the inspection, the external information is matched with ON / OFF of the predetermined bit of the start port information timer. Create 2 on / off. In creating security, error check processing is executed using external information error output mask data as an argument. If an error is detected as a result of execution, the security bit of output data is turned on. Otherwise, the output data security bit is turned off. In outputting the created signal, the created external information 1 to external information 6 and security are output to the external information output port.
<Interrupt on main board>

  Next, an interruption in the main board 102 will be described. On the main board 102, maskable interrupts and non-maskable interrupts are performed. Of these, maskable interrupts are caused by PT0I. The maskable interrupt by PT0I divides the system clock to realize an interrupt period of 4 ms, and the aforementioned game progress interrupt process (PTC0 interrupt process) is executed in this interrupt period.

  On the other hand, the non-maskable interrupt occurs when the main board 102 detects a power-off and outputs a power-off signal, and this power-off signal is input to a non-maskable interrupt terminal (NMI terminal) not shown.

The game progress interrupt processing is monitored by the interrupt processing time monitoring means, and this interrupt processing time monitoring means may be initialized and restarted within the timeout time set in the function setting of the program management area of the CPU 501. If this is not possible, a timeout occurs and a user reset occurs. Then, the core of the CPU 501 is reset and the control start process is executed. The restart of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is executed when recursive information is set and the internal timer is initialized during the cyclic processing in the control start processing and during the game progress interrupt processing.
<Random numbers on the main board>

  Next, random numbers used in the main board 102 will be described. The random number in the present embodiment is divided into a random number related to the operation of the accessory and another random number used for games. Random numbers related to the action of the actors include random numbers per ordinary symbol, initial random numbers per ordinary symbol, random numbers per special symbol, soft random numbers per special symbol, soft initial value random numbers per special symbol, random symbols per special symbol, and per special symbol There are seven types of symbol initial value random numbers.

  The random number per ordinary symbol is a random number used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol display device. The value of the random number is “0 to 282”, and the size of the random number is 283. The update method is to first add 1 to the previous random number, and return to 0 if the addition result exceeds the maximum value, and if the random number makes one round, the initial random number value per normal symbol at that time is the normal symbol value. The value is a random number per hit. The update time is for each game progress interrupt, and is updated once for each game progress interrupt. The acquisition time is when the passage of the game ball is detected by the left passage detecting device 69a of the left working port 68a or the right passage detecting device 69b of the right working port 68b. The number of random values to be won differs depending on whether the probability is low or high, and is 11 at low probability and 282 at high probability.

  The initial value random number per ordinary symbol is a random number for determining the initial value of the random number per ordinary symbol and the end value of the random number per ordinary symbol. The value of the random number is “0 to 282”, and the size of the random number is 283. In the updating method, 1 is first added to the previous random number, and when the added result exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to 0. The update time is for each game progress interrupt, and the update is performed even while the game progress interrupt is not executed.

  The random number per special symbol is a random number that is obtained by acquiring the random number (hardware random number) generated by the ch (channel) A of the random number circuit of the CPU 501 with software and used for the lottery of the special symbol display device (70, 71). . The value of the random number is “0-065535”, and the size of the random number is 65536. The update method is to update once with two clocks of the crystal oscillator input to the RCK (random number clock) terminal of the CPU 501. The start value of the random number is a value based on the ID number of the CPU 501 and is changed every time the system is reset when the power is turned on (or off). The random number sequence changing method automatically updates the random number sequence every time the random number sequence completes a cycle. The update time is a timing set by a divide-by-two clock of the clock input to the RCK terminal.

  The acquisition timing differs depending on the start winning detection device 74 of the first start winning port 62 or the start winning detection device 75 of the second start winning port 63. In the case of the start winning detection device 74 of the first start winning opening 62, when the input signal is turned from OFF to ON, a low level is input to the P0 terminal of the CPU 501, and a random value (hardware) fetched from the chA of the random number circuit. Random number) is stored in a random value register (RA0D). The internal random number (hardware random number) stored in the random value register (RA0D) is acquired when it is determined by software that the input signal of the start winning detection device 74 of the first start winning opening 62 has been turned from OFF to ON. The random number per special symbol is a value obtained by adding a soft random number per special symbol to the acquired internal random number.

  On the other hand, in the case of the start winning detection device 75 of the second start winning opening 63, when the input signal is turned from OFF to ON, a low level is input to the P1 terminal of the CPU 501, and the disturbance captured from the channel A of the random number circuit. The numerical value is stored in the random value register (RA1D), which is different from the case of the start winning detection device 74 of the first start winning opening 62.

  For random numbers per special symbol, the number of random values that will be won is indicated when displaying a combination of symbols that will cause the conditional device to operate, i.e., when it is a big hit, the conditional device does not operate, and It is different when displaying a combination of symbols that the special electric accessory will operate, that is, when it is a small hit. The number of random number values to be won is a difference between a low probability and a high probability, and is 164 at a low probability and 1640 at a high probability.

  On the other hand, the number of random numbers that will be hit by a small hit differs between the first special symbol display unit 70 and the second special symbol display unit 71, and the first special symbol display unit 70 has 656, the second There are 105 special symbol display portions 71.

  Regarding the random number per special symbol, the random number period is about 0.013 s (seconds) because a random number having a size of 65536 is updated at a predetermined speed.

  The soft random number per special symbol is a random number used for the lottery of the special symbol display device (70, 71), and is added to the acquired internal random number when acquiring the internal random number generated by the chA of the random number circuit as described above. . The value of the random number is “0 to 65520”, and the size of the random number is 65521. The update method first adds 1 to the previous random number, and if the addition result exceeds the maximum value, it returns to 0, and if the random number makes one round, the value of the soft initial value random number per special symbol at that time is special The value is a soft random number per symbol. The update time is for each game progress interrupt, and is updated once for each game progress interrupt. The acquisition time is when a winning of a game ball is detected by the starting winning detection device 74 of the first starting winning opening 62 or the starting winning detection device 75 of the second starting winning opening 63.

  The soft initial value random number per special symbol is a random number for determining the initial value of the soft random number per special symbol and the end value of the soft random number per special symbol. The value of the random number is “0 to 65520”, the size of the random number The height is 65521. In the updating method, 1 is first added to the previous random number, and when the added result exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to 0. The update time is for each game progress interrupt, and the update is performed even while the game progress interrupt is not executed.

  The symbol random number per special symbol is a random number used to determine a symbol combination that is a big hit. The value of the random number is “0 to 999”, and the size of the random number is 1000. The update method first adds 1 to the previous random number, and if the addition result exceeds the maximum value, it returns to 0, and if the random number makes one round, the value of the soft initial value random number per special symbol at that time is special The value is a symbol random number per symbol. The update time is for each game progress interrupt, and is updated once for each game progress interrupt. The acquisition time is when a winning of a game ball is detected by the starting winning detection device 74 of the first starting winning opening 62 or the starting winning detection device 75 of the second starting winning opening 63.

  The symbol initial value random number per special symbol is a random number for determining the initial value of the symbol random number per special symbol and the end value of the symbol random number per special symbol. The height is 1000. In the updating method, 1 is first added to the previous random number, and when the added result exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to 0. The update time is for each game progress interrupt, and the update is performed even while the game progress interrupt is not executed.

  There are two types of random numbers that are used for games: normal symbol variation pattern random numbers and variation pattern random numbers. Among these, the normal symbol variation pattern random number is a random number used for variation pattern selection of the ordinary symbol display device, the random number value is “0-232”, and the random number size is 233. In the updating method, 1 is first added to the previous random number, and when the added result exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to 0. The update time is for each game progress interrupt, and is updated once for each game progress interrupt. The acquisition time is when the passage of the game ball is detected by the passage detection devices 69a and 69b of the operation ports 68a and 68b.

The variation pattern random number is a random number used for variation pattern selection of the special symbol display device (70, 71), the value of the random number is “0-49999”, and the size of the random number is 50,000. In the update method, first, 3511 is subtracted from the previous random number, and if the subtraction result is less than 0, 50000 is added to the subtraction result. The update time is for each game progress interrupt, and is updated once for each game progress interrupt. The acquisition time is when a winning of a game ball is detected by the starting winning detection device 74 of the first starting winning opening 62 or the starting winning detection device 75 of the second starting winning opening 63.
<< Power-off process >>

  Next, a power-off process that is executed when a power-off occurs will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the power-off process, the data of all the used registers is saved in the RWM (S81), and the interrupt enable / disable state before the power-off is saved (S82). Further, it is determined whether or not the power-on normal information is stored in the RWM (S83). If not stored (S83: NO), the power-off abnormality information is stored in the RWM (S84). The process proceeds to the RWM access prohibition process (S88). On the other hand, if it is stored (S83: YES), the value of the stack pointer is stored in the stack pointer buffer (S85), the information about normal power interruption is stored in the RWM (S86), and the RWM checksum is calculated. The checksum data is saved (S87). Then, access to the RWM is prohibited (S88), and the CPU 501 is waited for resetting while looping the control process.

In this power-off process, even if both the first recursive information and the second recursive information described above have not been set, the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursive means, and the first recursive information and the second recursive information Information is set, the monitoring time of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the time is recurred. Further, in the present embodiment, the forcible setting of the first recursive information and the second recursive information is performed immediately after the start of the power interruption process and at a timing before the process of saving all the used registers (S81). It has been broken. When the power supply is resumed, the control process is started in a state where the monitoring time is recursed. In other words, by forcibly recurring the monitoring timing when the power is cut off, the control processing can be prevented from proceeding without recurring monitoring timing in the control processing immediately after the power supply is resumed. It has become.
<Other individual control processing modes>
<< Control Mode Related to Command Transmission Timing >>

In the present embodiment, the effect control command output from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 is temporarily stored in the command buffer in response to a command request before transmission. The command buffer is obtained by causing a plurality of buffers to function as a ring buffer. In the control processing for command transmission (in this case, the production control command transmission processing (S69)), the command buffer is executed once in the order stored in the command buffer. In the game progress interruption process, one command is taken out from the command buffer and transmitted. It is also possible to adopt a method in which a command set with a high priority is transmitted first. In various control processes, when a command that needs to be transmitted is generated, it is possible to transmit the command as needed. When such a method is adopted, during one game progress interruption process, for example, an effect command is transmitted collectively in one control processing module such as an effect control command transmission process (S69). Instead, each time a command needs to be transmitted, command transmission is performed sequentially within each control processing module. For this reason, it is difficult for a situation in which command transmission is carried over to the next game progress interrupt process. For example, there is no delay in the command at the time of starting winning and the command transmission at the time of starting the variation of the special symbol, and quick command processing is possible.
<< Control mode related to update of pending storage >>

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the configuration in which the second game is prioritized is employed, and regularity is provided in the execution order of the first and second plurality of games. Are performed in order for each second game or each first game. Accordingly, if only the information stored on hold is updated for each second game or first game, the update of information stored on hold is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which priority is given to the first game, or a configuration in which the reserved memory is digested in the order in which the start winnings are generated and stored in a reserved manner, instead of giving priority to any game is adopted. Is possible. Among these, in the case of adopting the configuration in which the reserved memory is digested in the order in which the start winnings are generated, the reserved memory information is updated according to the digestion, the total number of pending games is updated, and the winning order is stored. As a result, the information stored on hold can be updated as a whole.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to notify the sub-main board 301 that the reserved memory has been updated, the symbol memory number command (symbol 1 memory number command or symbol 2 memory number command) is requested as described above. By including both the symbol 1 memory number command and the symbol 2 memory number command in one command, the necessary program and memory capacity can be reduced.
<< Control mode related to variation pattern lottery >>

  Next, various aspects related to the variation pattern lottery will be described. Any one of the variation pattern determination modes described here may be selected and applied in one pachinko gaming machine 10 or may be used in combination as appropriate. And when using a some aspect together, it is possible to use an aspect properly, for example based on elements, such as a success / failure result.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the determination of the variation pattern includes the result of success / failure, the number of reserved balls, a special symbol (which may be a symbol group), and a variation pattern selection state (special symbol status information). Although used as an element, a variation pattern corresponding to a combination of these determining elements is selected. Then, with the determination of the variation pattern, the variation time associated with the variation pattern is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the determination of the variation pattern, the determination elements are different depending on whether the result of the success / failure lottery is a big hit or not. In other words, in the case of a big hit, a variation pattern is selected from among the performance patterns (such as special symbol status information), the special symbol group, and the random number of success / failure, which are linked to them. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, a variation pattern is selected from among those linked to these based on the production state, the number of reserved balls, and the random number of success / failure. Of these, in the case of a big win, for the variation pattern that gives the re-lottery time in the production, the re-lottery time is given based on the production state (whether there is a specific production, etc.) and the special symbol group. The presence / absence is determined, and the determined result is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301.

  Further, when determining the variation pattern and the variation time, it is possible to determine the subsequent variation time according to the determined effect pattern number (in other words, the contents of the effect pattern). For example, when the selected variation pattern corresponds to the limited frequency pattern effect, it is conceivable that the extension of the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is determined afterwards.

  In addition, as described above, by setting a variable additional information command as a command at the start of special symbol variation, it is added later to the previously determined variation time in relation to factors such as gaming state and winning symbol. An effect of adding time can be performed. When determining the total variation time in this manner, it is possible to create various variation patterns while reducing the number of variation patterns provided in advance as follows. That is, considering the case of performing the above-described pseudo continuous notice (so-called “pseudo sequence”), if the variation pattern of the pseudo sequence is simply set individually, the same number of variation patterns as the number of types of effects are provided in advance. It is necessary to keep. When all the production patterns are prepared individually as described above, the total number of variation patterns becomes large, for example, reaching a number exceeding 256. For this reason, in order to provide an identifiable code for a large number of variation patterns, it is necessary to increase the number of bits and the number of bytes for representing the code as compared with the conventional case.

  However, by using fluctuation additional information (fluctuation addition pattern), it is possible to connect the fluctuation additional information drawn by random numbers, for example, to a relatively small number of basic fluctuation patterns and form a fluctuation pattern afterwards. It is. As a result, a new variation pattern can be formed by combining the variation patterns, so that a variety of variation patterns can be created without excessively increasing the number of variation patterns provided in advance. Note that the random value related to the variation additional information can also be transmitted as a pre-reading effect command from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 when the start winning is generated. In addition, when the limited frequency pattern effect is executed, it is also possible to set the appearance probability of the variation addition pattern so that the variation addition information is easily added. In addition, to further give an example of using variation additional information, when “777”, which is a probable variation symbol, is displayed from the beginning as the combination of the production symbol 190, the variation additional information is not set and the combination of the production symbol 190 is used. Once “666”, which is a non-probable variable symbol, is displayed, an effect until the result of whether or not to promote it to “777” is displayed (for example, an effect of fluctuation fluctuation or development of a fluctuation mode). For example, an effect to express) is performed by setting variable additional information.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is determined using the number of reserved balls as an element, and the variation pattern table to be referenced differs depending on the number of reserved balls. The variation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0-4. The reason why the variation pattern table corresponding to the hold 4 is provided in addition to the four holds 0 to 3 is as follows. For example, consider a case where a new variation display is started from a situation where the number of held balls is four and the number of held balls is three. A state in which the number of reserved balls is 3 at the stage where the control process during the game progress interrupt process being executed at that time does not yet lead to the determination of the variation pattern which is the process during the subsequent game progress interrupt process When a new start win occurs, the number of reserved balls is added to 4 when the variation pattern is determined. Therefore, a fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4 so that such a situation can also be used as an element for determining the fluctuation pattern.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table may be provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0-3. In this case, in the control processing, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the start winnings during the period from the number of reserved balls 3 to the determination of the variation pattern are not added. Note that any aspect can be applied to a pachinko gaming machine of a type in which a maximum number of reserves (for example, 8) other than four is set.

Further, the variation pattern random number acquisition timing can be the variation pattern lottery time. In other words, the fluctuation pattern random number is not a random number related to the operation of an accessory such as a special electric accessory. The need to provide constraints is reduced. Therefore, it is conceivable that the fluctuation pattern random number is not acquired at the time of starting winning, but for example, the fluctuation pattern random number is acquired and stored at the time of the fluctuation pattern lottery as a separately provided timing. By doing so, the number of pieces of information to be stored at the time of starting winning a prize can be reduced, and the capacity of the program and memory can be reduced.
<< Control mode related to design designation >>

In the lottery of symbols, the symbol determination table to be used is determined based on the value of the upper byte of the code indicating the symbol random number, and then the symbol is determined from the determined symbol determination table based on the value of the lower byte of the symbol random number. Is also possible. In this embodiment, since the numerical range of the design random number is set to “0 to 999”, the binary code code of these numerical values can be used. By doing so, the capacity of the memory and program can be reduced. In addition, the game state such as the number of rounds and the number of times reduced is assigned to the winning symbol (which may be a symbol group), and the number of subsequent rounds and the number of reduced times are determined according to the winning symbol. May be. By doing so, it is not necessary to store and control data unique to the gaming state, and the capacity of the memory and program can be reduced. Furthermore, information (game state designation information) that conveys the game state to a command that conveys a symbol or the like from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 (for example, each command of the symbol 1 effect pattern and the symbol 2 effect pattern in this embodiment). ) Can also be added. This command is not sent to the sub-main board 301 immediately after being created, but is created and temporarily stored, and is sent to the sub-main board 301 after waiting for a predetermined timing.
<< Relationship between special design and production design variation time >>

  As described above, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and the production symbol 190 corresponding to the special symbol are controlled to start and stop changing in synchronization with each other. Depending on the situation, the variation time of the effect symbol 190 can be shortened to some extent with respect to the variation time of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol).

  That is, when the change of the special symbol or the variation pattern is determined and the variation of the special symbol is started, an effect symbol change start command (command at the start of change) is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. However, the time required for transmission and reception of a predetermined command (for example, the first command at the start of fluctuation) and the command buffer (in this embodiment, the ring buffer type is used) are set and waited. Depending on the time until all the commands (first-in command) are sent out, it is conceivable that the start of variation of the effect symbol will be delayed from that of the special symbol. Further, at the time of stoppage of variation of the special symbol, a variation stop command (command for determining the symbol of the special symbol) is transmitted to the sub-main board 301, but a predetermined command (for example, the first command of the command at the start of variation when determining the symbol) ) May be delayed due to the time required for transmission and reception and the degree of command buffer congestion (the number of commands waiting for transmission).

In this way, the variation time of the effect symbol can be shortened to some extent with respect to the variation time of the special symbol, the effect symbol starts to change after the special symbol starts to change, and the effect symbol after the special symbol stops changing Can happen to stop fluctuating. Note that the degree of delay between the start of change and the stop of change of the production symbol is usually relatively large at the start of change and relatively low at the stop. The degree of delay is considered to be small (less) compared to the time of starting the fluctuation.
<Main configuration and various control modes related to main control display device>

Subsequently, the main configuration and various control modes related to the above-described main control display device 53 will be described. Here, first, each digit (DIG1) provided in the main control display device 53 based on FIG. To DIG5) will be described. Then, after that, selection of each digit, circuit configuration for turning on / off each LED segment (hereinafter simply referred to as “segment”) provided in each digit, and control processing will be described.
<< Configuration of each digit >>

  The main control display device 53 is provided with five digits (DIG1 to DIG5). In this embodiment, each digit (DIG1 to DIG5) includes a plurality of segments which are light emitting elements, and each digit includes an individual group (light emitting element) including a plurality of (eight or four) light emitting elements. Element group).

  Each segment in each digit is designated to be turned on / off by 1-byte (8-bit) segment data (also referred to as segment data or segment output data). A plurality of segments in each digit form a group for each digit. A group of segments in each digit can be referred to as an “identification display unit element group”, for example. In the following, each bit of 1-byte segment data is represented by eight codes from the least significant bit D0 to the most significant bit D7.

  Regarding the above-mentioned segment data, among the digits 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 16B, in the digit 1 which is the first digit, in the order from D0 shown at the right end to D7 shown at the left end in the order of normal symbols 1st LED for memory display (A), 2nd LED for normal symbol memory display (B), normal symbol display LED (C), 3rd state indicator lamp D, 4th status indicator lamp E, right-handed indicator lamp F, 1st A first segment 231a for status indicators and a second segment 231b for first status indicators are allocated.

  Further, for digit 2 shown in the lower part of digit 1, four of D0 to D3 among D0 to D7 are not used. Then, the first special symbol memory display first LED (O), the first special symbol memory display second LED (P), the second special symbol memory display first LED (Y), the second LED in order from D4 to D7. A second LED (Z) for special symbol memory display is assigned.

  Moreover, about the digit 3, LED indicator light GN which comprises the 1st special symbol display part 70 is allocated in order of D0-D7, and about the digit 4, it is 2nd special symbol in order of D0-D7. LED indicator lights Q to X constituting the display unit 71 are assigned. Further, for the digit 5, in order of D0 to D7, seven segments from the first segment 232a for the second status indicator lamp to the seventh segment 232g for the second status indicator lamp constituting the second status indicator lamp 232, A control error indicator lamp 233 (233a) is assigned.

  These digits 1 to 5 are selected in sequence each time an interrupt process with a predetermined period (here, a game progress interrupt process with a period of 4 ms) is executed. That is, the digits 1 to 5 are selected in every digit selection period of 20 ms (4 ms × 5). The digits 1 to 5 are controlled to light up instantaneously every 20 ms, but are visually recognized by the player as if they are always on.

  For example, when the memory display related to the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is performed, the least significant bit associated with D0 and D1 in 1-byte data in the game progress interruption cycle in which the digit 1 is selected (Bit 0) and bit 1 are values of “00B”, “01B”, “10B”, and “11B” for storing and displaying ordinary symbols. Then, the segment corresponding to the bit whose segment data value is “1B” is turned on (lights on), and the segment corresponding to the bit whose value is “0B” is turned off (lights off).

  Further, for example, when the round display relating to the big hit or the like is performed using the first status indicator lamps 231a and 231b and the second status indicator lamps 232a to 232g shown in FIG. After the game progress interrupt process in which the digit 1 including the segment of the indicator light 231 is selected, the game progress interrupt process is performed three times after the game progress interrupt process in which the digits 2 to 4 are selected. The digit 5 including the segment of the status indicator lamp 232 is selected.

  In the present embodiment, either 16R or 4R is displayed in the round display related to the big hit. Furthermore, the round display is not performed in the form of Arabic numerals indicating the number of rounds, but is performed using encrypted symbols. And in a present Example, when 16R display is performed among each number of rounds displayed, as shown to Fig.16 (a) and FIG.17 (a), the 1st of the 1st status indicator lamp 231 is shown. The first segment 231a for the status indicator lamp and the four segments of the second status indicator lamp 232 (the first segment 232a, the third segment 232c, the fifth segment 232e, and the sixth segment 232f) are driven to light. ing. Here, in FIG. 17A, the lit segments are shown hatched.

  Further, when the display of 16R is performed as described above, the segment data relating to bit 6 (first status indicator first segment 231a) of the selected digit 1 is “1B” and bit 7 (first The segment data relating to the second segment 231b) for status indicators is “0B”. The segment data from the least significant bit (bit 0) to bit 7 of the selected digit 5 is “0110101B”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when 4R display is performed, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 17A, the second segment 231b for the first status indicator lamp 231 of the first status indicator lamp 231 is used. The five segments (the first segment 232a, the third segment 232c, the fifth segment 232e, the sixth segment 232f, and the seventh segment 232g) of the second status indicator lamp 232 are driven to be lit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hit display is performed, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 17A, the first segment for the first status indicator lamp 231 of the first status indicator lamp 231 is used. 231a and five segments of the second status indicator lamp 232 (the first segment 232a, the third segment 232c, the fifth segment 232e, the sixth segment 232f, and the seventh segment 232g) are driven to be lit. .

  In addition, FIG. 17B shows a hold display related to the first special symbol (special figure 1 hold display), a hold display related to the second special symbol (special figure 2 hold display), and a hold display related to the normal symbol (common figure). The display mode for each number of holds related to (hold display) is shown. That is, the special figure 1 hold display is performed using the first special symbol memory display first LED (O) and the first special symbol memory display second LED (P) included in the digit 2 described above. The hold display in FIG. 2 is performed using the second special symbol memory display first LED (Y) and the second special symbol memory display second LED (Z) that are also included in the digit 2 described above. Further, the general symbol hold display is performed by using the normal symbol memory display first LED (A) and the normal symbol memory display second LED (B) included in the digit 1 described above.

  Furthermore, in the special figure 1 hold display, as shown in FIG. 17B, when there is no hold (when there is no hold), both the LED indicator lamp O and the LED indicator lamp P are turned off. When the number of holdings is 1 (holding 1), the LED indicator light O is turned on and the LED indicator light P is turned off. When the number of holdings is 2 (holding 2), the LED indicator light O and the LED indicator light P are turned off. However, both lights up. Further, when the number of holds is 3 (hold 3), the LED indicator O blinks and the LED indicator P is lit. When the number of holds is 4 (hold 4), the LED indicator O and the LED indicator P But both flash.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode similar to that of the special figure 1 hold display is adopted for both the special figure 2 hold display and the general figure hold display. In the case of the hold 1, the LED indicator Y (or LED indicator A) is turned on, and the LED indicator Z (or LED indicator B) is turned off. In the case of the hold 2, the LED indicator lamp Y (or LED indicator lamp A) and the LED indicator lamp Z (or LED indicator lamp B) are both turned on. In the case of the hold 3, the LED indicator lamp Y ( Alternatively, the LED indicator lamp A) blinks and the LED indicator lamp Z (or LED indicator lamp B) is turned on. Furthermore, in the case of the hold 4, the LED indicator lamp Y (or LED indicator lamp A) and the LED indicator lamp Z (or LED indicator lamp B) both flash.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the above-described third state indicator lamp (LED indicator lamp D) is turned off when the probability variation function related to the special symbol is not activated, and is lit when activated. The third state indicator lamp (D) is turned on only when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on. Further, the above-described fourth status indicator lamp (LED indicator lamp E) is turned off when the probability variation function related to the normal symbol is not activated, and is lit when activated. Further, the right-handed indicator lamp (LED indicator lamp F) is turned off when left-handed and turned on when right-handed. Here, the display mode has been described by taking a part of the LED indicator as an example, but details of the control mode for digit selection and segment driving will be described later.
<< Circuit Configuration Related to LED Output >>

  Next, the selection of the above-described digits 1 to 5 and the circuit configuration for outputting segment data will be described. FIG. 18 shows a main control LED drive circuit unit (hereinafter referred to as “drive circuit unit”) 201 for turning on / off various segments of the main control display device 53. The drive circuit unit 201 is formed on the main substrate 102 (see FIG. 4). In FIG. 4, the drive circuit unit 201 is not shown, but the drive circuit unit 201 includes a digit output IC 202 and a segment output IC 203 as shown in FIG. 18.

  Of these, the digit output IC 202 has a function of selecting the digit 1 to the digit 5 described above, and the segment output IC 203 has a function of individually turning on / off the segments included in the selected digit. doing. The digit output IC 202 is connected to the output port (not shown) of the main CPU 501 shown in FIG. 4 via the data bus 204, and the main control display via the input / output port 505 of the main board 102. It is connected to the symbol display board 256 of the device 53. Here, in FIG. 18, illustration of the input / output port 505 and the like of the main board 102 is omitted. In FIG. 18, “DIG1” to “DIG5” in the symbol display board 256 are the five digits 1 to 5 described above.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of (for example, about 5 or more) the same package IC parts having the function of D flip-flops are mounted on the main board 102, and as shown in FIG. One is used as the digit output IC 202, and the other predetermined one is used as the segment output IC 203. The package IC components used as the digit output IC 202 and the segment output IC 203 each have 20 terminals, and among these terminals, there are 8 terminals for data input (data input terminals). D1 to D8), eight terminals for data output (data output terminals Y1 to Y8), one terminal for clock input (CLK terminal), one terminal for clear input (CLR terminal), and the like. .

  In FIG. 18, a terminal (in this case, a Y1 terminal to a Y8 terminal or a CLR terminal) having a signal input or output in negative logic is indicated by adding “−” to the upper part of the symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the description will be made by describing the sign of each terminal without distinguishing between positive logic and negative logic.

  As shown in FIG. 18, a reset signal (RESET signal) is input to each CLR terminal of the digit output IC 202 and the segment output IC 203. This RESET signal is output from the main CPU 501 (see FIG. 4). Further, a chip select signal (XCS0 or XCS4) is input to each CLK terminal of the digit output IC 202 and the segment output IC 203 as shown in FIG. This chip select signal (XCS0 or XCS4) is also output from the main CPU 501 (see FIG. 4).

The data input terminals D1 to D8 of the digit output IC 202 and the segment output IC 203 are connected to the data bus 204. The data bus 204 is connected to a predetermined data output terminal of the main CPU 501 (see FIG. 4), and output data of the main CPU 501 is input to the digit output IC 202 and the segment output IC 203 via the data bus 204. It has become so.
<<< Signal output in digit output IC >>>

  Among the digit output IC 202 and the segment output IC 203 as described above, the data output terminals Y1 to Y5 provided in the digit output IC 202 are connected to the digit via transistor circuits 206 to 210 as shown in FIG. 1 (DIG1) to digit 5 (DIG5). The digit output IC 202 then outputs a common signal (digit selection signal, digit data, etc.) with a predetermined cycle (digit selection cycle) for each digit (DIG1 to DIG5) based on the output data (digit selection data) of the main CPU 501. (Also called).

  As described above, the digit selection via the digit output IC 202 is performed for one digit for each game progress interrupt process described above. That is, for each game progress interrupt, digit 1 to digit 5 to be selected are switched, and each digit is sequentially selected once for every five game progress interrupts. Each digit is selected periodically, and its cycle (digit selection cycle) is 20 (= 4 × 5) ms in this embodiment.

  Each digit 1 (DIG1) to digit 5 (DIG5) is assigned a predetermined number of segments (eight or four) as described above. In the present embodiment, the number of segments allocated to the four digits of digit 1 (DIG1) and digit 3 (DIG3) to digit 5 (DIG5) is 8 (32 in total), The number of segments allocated to digit 2 (DIG2) is four. In the following, the segments provided for each digit may be represented by segment A (SEGA) to segment H (SEGH), which is a maximum of eight segment names.

  Each of the aforementioned transistor circuits 206 to 210 provided between each digit (DIG1 to DIG5) and the digit output IC 202 is a composite transistor in which a bias resistor is incorporated into the transistor to form a single chip. The data output terminals Y1 to Y5 of the digit output IC 202 are connected to the base terminals of the transistor circuits 206 to 210. The collector terminals of the transistor circuits 206 to 210 are connected to the digit 1 (GIG1). 5 (DIG5) is connected. Furthermore, the emitter terminals of the respective transistor circuits 206 to 210 are pulled up to a power source unit having a predetermined voltage (+12 V in this case). Each of the transistor circuits 206 to 210 is provided with resistors R1 and R2. In this embodiment, the resistance value of the resistor R1 connected in series to the base terminal is 1 kΩ and connected in parallel to the base terminal. The resistance value of the resistor R2 is 22 kΩ.

Further, functions other than driving of the main control display device 53 are assigned to the data output terminals Y6 and Y7 of the digit output IC 202. In this embodiment, the data output terminal Y6 of the digit output IC 202 is used to output a firing prohibition / permission signal as described above. The data output terminal Y7 of the digit output IC 202 is used for the effect data strobe signal output to the sub-main board 301.
<<< Signal output in segment output IC >>>

  On the other hand, the data output terminals (Y1 to Y8) of the segment output IC 203 are connected to the segments (SEGA to SEGH) in the digits (DIG1 to DIG5). The segment output IC 203 is based on the output data from the main CPU 501, and a drive signal corresponding to the segment to be driven in the digit selected at that time (also referred to as “dynamic lighting signal”, “segment data”, etc.). Is output. The drive signal turns on the segment by the HI level voltage and turns off the segment by the LOW level voltage. Although not shown in the figure, a predetermined value (here 1 kΩ) is provided between the data output terminals (Y1 to Y8) of the segment output IC 203 and each segment (SEGA to SEGH). A resistor is provided.

  For example, if there are three segments to be driven at a certain timing, segment A, segment D, and segment F of digit 3, the segment output IC 203 is based on the output data of the main CPU 501, and the three data output terminals Y1, Y1, A drive signal is output from Y4 and Y6. At this time, the digit output (digit selection signal) is output from the data output terminal Y3 connected to the digit 3 in the digit output IC 202 described above.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a predetermined segment in a predetermined digit can be turned on by a combination of digit data for selecting a digit and segment data for instructing the operation state of the segment. Yes. For this reason, the CPU 501 can drive the main control display device 53 by one 8-bit output port. For example, the output is less than that using five output ports corresponding to each digit. The main control display device 53 can be controlled by the number of ports.

The digit output IC 202, the segment output IC 203, and the connection to each digit (DIG1 to DIG5) may be in any form of an anode common and a cathode common.
<< digit data table used for digit selection >>

  Next, main tables used for LED output of the main control display device 53 will be described. Tables used for LED output include the digit data table (see FIG. 19A) related to the selection of the five digits (DIG1 to DIG5) described above, and the maximum of eight segments (SEGA to SEGH) described above. There is a segment table related to / off.

  Among these, the address (address) of the digit data table relating to the digit selection is “11BDH” as shown in the chart of FIG. The total area of the digit data table is 10 (bytes) from “11BDH” to “11C6H”. In each area, the bit data for the digits 1 to 5 (the above-mentioned digit data) and the segment data table are stored. Data related to the calculated address values are assigned in order.

  The names of the bit data for the digits 1 to 5 are “digit 1 bit data” to “digit 5 bit data” as shown in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 19A, the names of the calculated address values of the segment data table for the digits 1 to 5 are changed from “the calculated address value of the digit 1 segment data table” to “the digit 5 segment data table. Address calculation value ".

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the digit data table is arranged with the address of the bit data and the address of the segment data table successively for each digit. The address of the digit 1-bit data is “11BDH”, and the address of the calculated value of the digit 1 segment data table is “11BEH” corresponding to the next address.

  The address of the digit 2-bit data is “11BFH”, and the address of the calculated address value of the digit 2-segment data table is “11C0H” following “11BFH”. Furthermore, the address of the digit 3 bit data is “11C1H”, and the address of the calculated address value of the digit 3 segment data table is “11C2H”. The address of the digit 4 bit data is “11C3H”, and the address of the calculated address value of the digit 4 segment data table is “11C4H”. Furthermore, the address of the digit 5 bit data is “11C5H”, and the address of the calculated address value of the digit 5 segment data table is “11C6H”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, the value stored in the digit 1-bit data area (11BDH) is “01H” and stored in the address calculation value area (11BEH) of the digit 1 segment data table. The value obtained is “09H”. Further, the value stored in the digit 2 bit data area (11BFH) is “02H”, and the value stored in the address calculation value area (11C0H) of the digit 2 segment data table is “18H”.

The value stored in the address area (11C1H) of the digit 3 bit data is “04H”, and the value stored in the address calculation value area (11C2H) of the digit 3 segment data table is “1BH”. . Further, the value stored in the digit 4 bit data area (11C3H) is “08H”, and the value stored in the address calculation value area (11C4H) of the digit 4 segment data table is “1CH”. The value stored in the digit 5 bit data area (11C5H) is “10H”, and the value stored in the address calculated value area (11C6H) of the digit 5 segment data table is “1DH”.
<< Segment table used for segment driving >>

Next, the segment table will be described. As shown in FIG. 19B, the segment table includes “digit 1 segment table” to “digit 5 segment table” corresponding to the digit 1. As other segment tables, as shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, a normal symbol storage segment table, a normal symbol segment table, a gaming state segment table 1, a gaming state segment table 2, an error state segment table 1, a special electricity Operating frequency segment table 1, small hit segment table 1, strike segment table, special figure 1 storage segment table, special figure 2 storage segment table, error status segment table 2, error status segment table 3, special electrical operation frequency segment table 2, There are a small hit segment table 2 and a special symbol segment table.
<<< digit 1 segment table >>>

  Of these, the digit 1 segment table is a table for displaying information using the digit 1 described above. In this embodiment, the normal symbol, the number of balls on which the normal symbol is held, the gaming state, the error state, the special electric combination This is used to display the number of times that an object is continuously operated, the special electric accessory operating state when the accessory continuous operating device is not operated, and the classification.

  Of the various information described above, normal symbols are displayed using D2 (bit 2) when digit 1 is selected, as shown in the uppermost row in FIG. The above-mentioned number of the reserved balls for the normal symbol is displayed using D0 and D1 (bit 0 and bit 1), and the above-mentioned gaming state and error state are displayed as D3 and D4 (bit 3 and bit 4). It is done using. Further, D6 and D7 (bit 6 and bit 7) are used to display the number of times that the above-mentioned special electric accessory is continuously operated and the special electric accessory operating state when the above-mentioned accessory continuous operation device is not operated. The display of the above-mentioned classification is performed using D5 (bit 5).

  Further, an area of addresses “11C7H” to “11D7H” is allocated to the digit 1 segment table, and the total area is “17”. As shown in FIG. 19B, “11C7H” is an “inspection count” area, and the value stored in this area is “08H” representing 8 times.

  The “number of inspections” described above is a “number of times” corresponding to the number of pieces of information displayed in one digit, as will be described in detail later. Then, in order to output the segment data related to each information, the “number of times” “inspection” defined in the segment table is performed. In this embodiment, in each segment table corresponding to each digit, the data indicating the display contents and the area for designating the table to be used are displayed according to the number of types of information to be displayed. It is arranged after that.

  It should be noted that the numerical values (“1” to “8”, “1” to “2”, etc.) shown below the notation of “number of inspections” in FIG. 19 do not directly indicate the order of inspection. Rather, it simply indicates the number assigned to the item related to the display number of the normal symbol and the item related to the display of the normal symbol. And about the inspection using the table in which the number of inspections is set to a plurality of times, the items with the above-mentioned numerical values (“1” to “8”, “1” to “2”, etc.) in FIG. To be done. For this reason, as described above, the inspection using the table in which the number of inspections is set to 8 is performed for each item of the numbers “8” to “1” described under “Number of inspections” in FIG. It is performed while counting down like “8”, “7”, “6”,..., “2”, “1”.

  In the digit 1 segment table described above, an area “11C8H” following “11CFH” of “number of inspections” is an area of “subordinate address of the number of reserved balls for normal use”, and the value thereof is “B2H”. . Further, “11C9H” following “11C8H” is an area of “address calculation value of address-1 of normal symbol storage segment table”, and its value is “22H”.

  In other words, in the digit 1 segment table, the number of examinations “8” is assigned to the item related to the memory display of the normal symbol, and “the lower address of the number-of-holding ball number display number” related to the memory display of the normal symbol, The “ordinary symbol storage segment table address-1 (11EBH) calculated value” is an area referred to when the number of inspections is “8”. Then, the inspection order referring to the region of the inspection number “8” is the first.

  In the digit 1 segment table, the number of inspections “7” is assigned to the item related to the display of the regular symbols. Then, “11CAH” associated with the number of inspections “7” is an area of “lower address of the common symbol display number”, and its value is “ABH”. Further, “11CBH”, which is also associated with the number of inspections “7”, is an area of “address calculation value of address-1 in the normal symbol segment table”, and its value is “29H”. Then, the inspection order referring to the region of the inspection number “7” is the second.

  The number of inspections “6” is assigned to the item related to the display of the normal symbol state (mode). “11CCH” associated with the number of examinations “6” is an area of “lower address of the normal symbol mode flag”, and its value is “9AH”. Furthermore, “11CDH”, which is also associated with the number of examinations “6”, is an area of “address calculation value of address-1 in gaming state segment table 1”, and its value is “28H”. Then, the inspection order referring to the region of the inspection number “6” is the third.

  Further, the number of inspections “5” is assigned to an item relating to the display of the gaming state. Then, “11CEH” associated with the number of inspections “5” is an area of “lower address of gaming state display number 2”, and its value is “9EH”. Furthermore, “11CFH” that is also associated with the number of inspections “5” is an area of “address calculation value of address-1 in gaming state segment table 2”, and its value is “27H”. Then, the order of inspection referring to the region of the inspection number “5” is the fourth.

  In addition, the number of inspections “4” is assigned to display an error state. Then, “11D0H” associated with the number of inspections “4” is an area of “lower address of error state display number 1”, and its value is “ACH”. Furthermore, “11D1H”, which is also associated with the number of inspections “4”, is an area of “address calculated value of address-1 in error state segment table 1”, and its value is “26H”. Then, the order of inspection referring to the region of the number of inspections “4” is the fifth.

  Further, the number of inspections “3” is assigned to the display of the number of operations (number of rounds) of the special electric accessory. Then, “11D2H” associated with the number of inspections “3” is an area of “subordinate address of special electric operation number display number”, and the value thereof is “AEH”. Furthermore, “11D3H”, which is also associated with the number of inspections “3”, is an area of “address calculation value of address-1 in the special operation frequency segment table 1”, and the value thereof is “25H”. Then, the order of inspection referring to the region of the inspection number “3” is the sixth.

  In addition, the number of inspections “2” is assigned to the small hit display. Then, “11D4H” associated with the number of inspections “2” is an area of “lower address of the small hit display number”, and its value is “AFH”. Further, “11D5H”, which is also associated with the number of inspections “2”, is an area of “address calculation value of address-1 of the small hit segment table 1”, and its value is “25H”. Then, the order of inspection referring to the area of the number of inspections “2” is the seventh.

In addition, the number of inspections “1” is assigned to the display of the sorting state. Then, “11D6H” associated with the number of inspections “1” is an area of “lower address of the allocation state flag”, and its value is “DCH”. Furthermore, “11D7H”, which is also associated with the number of inspections “1”, is an area of “address calculated value of address-1 in the divided segment table 1”, and its value is “24H”. Then, the order of inspection referring to the area of the number of inspections “1” is the eighth.
<<< Digit 2 segment table >>>

  The digit 2 segment table shown in FIG. 19 (b) is a table for displaying information using the above-mentioned digit 2, and in this embodiment, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 (first special symbol), And it is used for the display of the number of operation reservation balls of special symbol 2 (2nd special symbol).

  Among the various information described above, the display of the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 shows D4 and D5 (bit 4 and bit 5) when digit 2 is selected, as shown in FIG. 16 (b). Done with. In addition, the display of the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is performed using D6 and D7 (bit 6 and bit 7).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, areas of addresses “11D8H” to “11DCH” are allocated to the digit 2 segment table, and the total area is “5”. “11D8H” is an area of “number of inspections”, and the value stored in this area is “02H” representing two times.

  In this digit 2 segment table, the area of “11D9H” following “11D8H” of “number of inspections” is the area of “lower address of special figure 1 reserved ball number display number”, and its value is “B5H”. . Further, “11DAH” following “11D9H” is an area of “address calculation value of address-1 in the special figure 1 storage segment table”, and its value is “22H”. That is, in the digit 2 segment table, the number of inspections “2” is assigned to the item related to the memory display of FIG. The “address” and the “address-calculated value of address-1 in the special figure 1 storage segment table” are areas to be referred to when the number of inspections is “2”. Then, the inspection order referring to the region of the inspection number “2” is the first.

In the digit 2 segment table, the number of inspections “1” is assigned to the item relating to the storage display of FIG. Then, “11DBH” associated with the number of inspections “1” is an area of “lower address of special figure 2 reserved ball number display number”, and its value is “B8H”. Furthermore, “11DCH”, which is also associated with the number of inspections “1”, is an area of “address calculation value of address-1 in the special figure 2 storage segment table”, and its value is “29H”. Then, the inspection order referring to the region of the inspection number “1” is the second.
<<< digit 3 segment table >>>

  The digit 3 segment table shown in FIG. 19B is a table for displaying information using the digit 3 described above, and is used for displaying the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) in this embodiment. The special symbol 1 is displayed using D0 to D7 (bit 0 to bit 7) when the digit 3 is selected, as shown in FIG. 16 (b).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, an area with addresses “11DDH” to “11DFH” is assigned to the digit 3 segment table, and the total area is “3”. “11DDH” is an “inspection count” area, and the value stored in this area is “01H” representing one time.

In this digit 3 segment table, an area of “11DEH” following “11DDH” of “number of inspections” is an area of “lower address of special figure 1 display number”, and its value is “3EH”. Furthermore, “11DFH” following “11DEH” is an area of “address calculation value of address-1 of special symbol segment table”, and its value is “34H”. That is, in the digit 3 segment table, the number of inspections “1” is assigned to the display of the special figure 1, and the “lower address of the special figure 1 display number” and the “special symbol segment table” related to the display of the special figure 1 "Address-1 calculated value of address -1" is an area referred to when the number of inspections is "1". The digit 3 segment table is used only for the display of FIG. 1, and the number of inspections is only once.
<<< digit 4 segment table >>>

  The digit 4 segment table shown in FIG. 19B is a table for displaying information using the above-described digit 4, and is used for displaying special symbol 2 (second special symbol) in this embodiment. The special symbol 2 is displayed using D0 to D7 (bit 0 to bit 7) when the digit 4 is selected as shown in FIG. 16 (b).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, areas of addresses “11E0H” to “11E2H” are allocated to the digit 4 segment table, and the total area is “3”. “11E0H” is an “inspection count” area, and the value stored in this area is “01H” representing one time.

In this digit 4-segment table, the area of “11E1H” following “11E0H” of “number of inspections” is the area of “lower address of special figure 2 display number”, and its value is “62H”. Further, “11E2H” following “11E1H” is an area of “address calculation value of address-1 of special symbol segment table”, and its value is “31H”. That is, in the digit 4 segment table, the number of inspections “1” is assigned to the display of the special figure 2, and the “lower address of the special figure 2 display number” and the “special symbol segment table” related to the display of the special figure 2. "Address-1 calculated value of address -1" is an area referred to when the number of inspections is "1". The digit 4 segment table is used only for displaying the special figure 2, and the number of inspections is only one.
<<< digit 5 segment table >>>

  The digit 5 segment table shown in FIG. 19B is a table for displaying information using the digit 5 described above. In this embodiment, the error state, the number of times that the special electric accessory is continuously operated, And it is used for display of the special electric accessory operating state when the accessory continuous operating device is not operating.

  Of the various information described above, the error status is displayed using D7 (bit 7) when the digit 5 is selected, as shown in FIG. The number of times that the special electric accessory is continuously operated and the special electric accessory operating state when the accessory continuous operation device is not operated are displayed using D0 to D6 (bit 0 to bit 6). .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, areas of addresses “11E3H” to “11EBH” are allocated to the digit 5 segment table, and the total area is “9”. “11E3H” is an “inspection count” area, and the value stored in this area is “04H” representing 4 times.

  In this digit 5-segment table, an area “11E4H” following “11E3H” of “number of inspections” is an area of “lower address of error state display number 1”, and its value is “ACH”. Further, “11E5H” following “11E4H” is an area of “address calculated value of address-1 in error state segment table 2”, and its value is “29H”. That is, in the digit 5 segment table, the number of inspections “4” is assigned to the item relating to the display of the error state, and “lower address of error state display number 1” or “error state segment” relating to the display of the error state. The “address-calculated value of address-1 in Table 2” is an area referred to when the number of inspections is “4”. Then, the order of inspection referring to the region of the inspection number “4” is the first.

  In the digit 5-segment table, the number of inspections “3” is also assigned to the item relating to the display of the error state. Then, “11E6H” associated with the number of inspections “3” is an area of “lower address of error state display number 2”, and its value is “ADH”. Further, “11E7H”, which is also associated with the number of inspections “3”, is an area of “address calculated value of address-1 in error state segment table 2”, and its value is “28H”. Then, the inspection order referring to the region of the inspection number “3” is the second.

  Further, in the digit 5-segment table, the number of inspections “2” is assigned to an item relating to the display of the number of operations (number of rounds) of the special electric accessory. Then, “11E8H” associated with the number of inspections “2” is an area of “subordinate address of special electric operation number display number”, and the value thereof is “AEH”. Furthermore, “11E9H”, which is also associated with the number of inspections “2”, is an area of “address calculation value of address-1 in the special electric power operation number segment table 2”, and its value is “27H”. Then, the inspection order referring to the region of the inspection number “2” is the third.

In the digit 5-segment table, the number of inspections “1” is assigned to the item related to the small hit display. Then, “11EAH” associated with the number of inspections “1” is an area of “lower address of the small hit display number”, and its value is “AFH”. Furthermore, “11EBH”, which is also associated with the number of inspections “1”, is an area of “address calculation value of address-1 in the small hit segment table 2”, and its value is “27H”. Then, the order of inspection referring to the area of the number of inspections “1” is the fourth.

  As described above, in the digit 5 segment table, in the “lower address of error status display number 1” of the inspection count “4”, the “error status display number” of the inspection count “4” in the digit 1 segment table is displayed. The same name as “1 lower address” is given, and the content (ACH) is also common. Similarly, in the digit 5 segment table, each area of “low-order address of special electric operation number display number” of inspection number “2” and “low-order address of small hit display number” of inspection number “1” is also digit 1 segment. In the table, the same name is assigned to each area of “low-order address of special electricity operation number display number” of inspection number “3” and “low-order address of small hit display number” of inspection number “2” (AEH). And AFH) are common.

For this reason, during one cycle (digit selection cycle) in which digits 1 to 5 are sequentially selected, “lower address of error status display number 1”, “lower address of special operation count display number”, “small hit display” The data stored in the address that is a combination of the “lower address of the number” and the fixed upper address “F0” is referred to twice. As described above, when the data indicating the lower address is shared, when the lighting data to be input to the segment output port is generated at each digit lighting timing, the segment table for each light emitting element is referred to. The value used as the offset is the value stored in the same area in the RWM work area.
<<<< Normal symbol memory segment table >>>>

  Next, the above-described normal symbol storage segment table shown in FIG. 20 is a table for normal symbol hold display, and is used for the segment drive of the digit 1 D0 and D1 (bit 0 and bit 1). Further, in this normal symbol storage segment table, areas of addresses “11ECH” to “11F4H” are allocated, and the total area is “9”. As shown in FIG. 20, “11 ECH” is an area of “ordinary symbol storage display LED extinguishing data”, and the value stored in this area is “00H”. Then, the values of bit 0 and bit 1 become “00B” by data “00H”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20, “11EDH” and “11EEH” are areas of “normal symbol storage display LED lighting data 1”, and the value stored in this area is “01H”. Then, with the data “01H”, the values of bit 0 and bit 1 become “01B”, and the segment (in this case, LED-A in FIG. 6) corresponding to the bit that has become “1B” is driven to light. Further, “11EFH” to “11F1H” are areas of “normal symbol storage display LED lighting data 2”, and the value stored in this area is “03H”. Then, with data “03H”, the values of bit 0 and bit 1 become “11B” (data for turning on LED-A and LEDB). “11F2H” is an area of “normal symbol storage display LED lighting data 3”, and the value stored in this area is “02H”. Then, the data “02H” causes the values of bit 0 and bit 1 to be “10B”.

  Further, “11F3H” is also an area of “ordinary symbol storage display LED lighting data 2”, and the value stored in this area is “03H”. “11F4H” is an area of “ordinary symbol storage display LED extinguishing data”, and the value stored in this area is “00H”.

  The data in the normal symbol storage segment table as described above will be further described. ECH in the above-mentioned “11 ECH” is data for turning off. Further, the aforementioned 11EDH and 11EEH are data for holding one, and EFH and F0H are data for holding two. Further, the aforementioned F1H and F2H are data for when 3 pieces are held, and the aforementioned F3H and F4H are data for when 4 pieces are held.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, there are cases where blinking display is performed in the normal symbol storage display, but the offset amount may or may not be incremented by +1 by blinking switching for blinking display. There are two lighting pattern data for each reserved number. That is, when the number of holdings is 0, even if the number of holdings is 0, “1” is stored as an offset value in the RWM area (the area of the general-purpose holding ball number display number (F0B2H) described later) by blinking switching. Therefore, 0 data is arranged at the head. When the above-described F0B2H data is 0, the predetermined process (S125) in the LED output process (see FIG. 13), which will be described later, becomes YES. , D1 (bit 1) remains 0.
<<< Normal symbol segment table >>>

Subsequently, the above-described normal symbol segment table shown in FIG. 20 is a table for displaying a normal symbol and is used for driving the segment of D2 (bit 2) of digit 1. Furthermore, the area of the address “11F5H” is allocated to this normal symbol segment table, and the total area is “1”. As shown in FIG. 20, “11F5H” is an “ordinary symbol lighting data” area, and the value stored in this area is “04H”. The value of bit 2 becomes “1B” from the data “04H”.
<<< Game State Segment Table 1 >>>

Subsequently, the above-described gaming state segment table 1 shown in FIG. 20 is a table for displaying the fourth state indicator lamp (E), and is used for driving the segment of D4 (bit 4) of the digit 1. Furthermore, an area with an address of “11F6H” is allocated to the game state segment table 1, and the total area is “1”. As shown in FIG. 20, “11F6H” is an area of “status indicator light 4 lighting data” corresponding to the fourth status indicator (E), and the value stored in this area is “10H”. It is. The value of bit 4 is “1B” due to the data “10H”.
<<< Game State Segment Table 2 >>>

Subsequently, the above-described gaming state segment table 2 shown in FIG. 20 is a table for displaying the third state indicator lamp (D), and is used for driving the segment of D3 (bit 3) of the digit 1. Furthermore, an area with an address of “11F7H” is allocated to the game state segment table 2, and the total area is “1”. As shown in FIG. 20, “11F7H” is an area of “status indicator 3 lighting data” corresponding to the third status indicator (D), and the value stored in this area is “08H”. It is. The value of bit 3 is “1B” due to the data “08H”.
<<< Error status segment table 1 >>>

Subsequently, the above-described error state segment table 1 shown in FIG. 20 is a table for displaying the first segment 231a and the second segment 231b for the first state indicator lamp, and D6 and D7 of the digit 1 are displayed. Used for segment driving (bit 6 and bit 7). Further, the error state segment table 1 is assigned with an area of “11F8H”, and the total area is “1”. As shown in FIG. 20, “11F8H” is an area of “status indicator 1 lighting data” corresponding to the first status indicator 231 and the value stored in this area is “C0H”. . Then, the values of bit 6 and bit 7 become “11B” by the data “C0H”.
<<< Special Electric Operation Frequency Segment Table 1 >>>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned special electric operation frequency segment table 1 shown in FIG. 20 is a table for displaying the operation frequency relating to the special electric accessory, and the segments of D6 and D7 (bit 6 and bit 7) of the digit 1 are displayed. Used for driving. Further, the error status segment table 1 is assigned with an area of addresses “11F9H” to “11FAH”, and the total area is “2”. As shown in FIG. 20, “11F9H” is an area of “status indicator lamp 1 lighting data 1” corresponding to the second segment 231b for the first indicator lamp, and the value stored in this area is “80H”. The value of bit 7 is “1B” due to the data “80H”. Further, “11FAH” is an area of “status display lamp 1 lighting data 2” corresponding to the first segment 231a for the first status indicator lamp, and the value stored in this area is “40H”. Then, the value of bit 6 becomes “1B” by the data “40H”.
<<< small hits segment table 1 >>>

Subsequently, the aforementioned small hitting segment table 1 shown in FIG. 20 is a table for displaying the small hitting and is used for the segment driving of D6 (bit 6) of the digit 1. Furthermore, an area with an address of “11FBH” is assigned to the small hit segment table 1, and the total area is “1”. As shown in FIG. 20, “11FBH” is an area of “status indicator 1 lighting data 2” corresponding to the first segment 231a for the first indicator lamp, and the value stored in this area is “40H”. Then, the value of bit 6 becomes “1B” by the data “40H”.
<<< Distinguished Segment Table >>>

Next, the aforementioned divided segment table shown in FIG. 20 is a table for displaying a left strike and a right strike, and is used for driving the segment of D5 (bit 5) of the digit 1. Furthermore, an area with an address of “11FCH” is assigned to this divided segment table, and the total area is “1”. As shown in FIG. 20, “11FCH” is an area of “right-handed indicator light lighting data”, and a value stored in this area is “20H”. The value of bit 5 is “1B” due to the data “20H”.
<<< Special Figure 1 Storage Segment Table >>>

  Next, the above-mentioned special figure 1 storage segment table shown in FIG. 20 is a table for holding display of the first special symbol, and is used for the segment drive of digits D4 and D5 (bits 4 and 5). It is done. Further, in this special figure 1 storage segment table, areas of addresses “11FDH” to “1205H” are allocated, and the total area is “9”. As shown in FIG. 20, “11FDH” is an area of “special symbol memory display 1 LED extinction data”, and the value stored in this area is “00H”. The values of bit 4 and bit 5 become “00B” by data “00H”.

  As shown in FIG. 20, “11FEH” and “11FFH” are areas of “special symbol memory display 1 LED lighting data 1”, and the value stored in this area is “10H”. Then, with the data “10H”, the values of bit 4 and bit 5 become “10B”, and the segment corresponding to the bit that becomes “1B” is driven to light. Further, “1200H” to “1202H” are areas of “special symbol storage display 1 LED lighting data 2”, and the value stored in this area is “30H”. The values of bit 4 and bit 5 are “11B” due to data “30H”. “11F2H” is an area of “special symbol storage display 1 display LED lighting data 3”, and the value stored in this area is “20H”. The values of bit 4 and bit 5 are “10B” due to data “20H”.

Further, “1204H” is also an area of “special symbol storage display 1 LED lighting data 2”, and the value stored in this area is “30H”. Further, “1205H” is an area of “special symbol memory display 1 LED extinguishing data”, and the value stored in this area is “00H”. Note that the special figure 1 storage segment table also has the same circumstances as the blinking switching in the normal symbol storage segment table described above, since the LED display lights (O, P) blink display is included in the hold display pattern. , One of nine patterns (pattern data) is selected.
<<< Special Figure 2 Storage Segment Table >>>

  Next, the above-mentioned special figure 2 storage segment table shown in FIG. 20 is a table for holding display of the second special symbol, and is used for driving the segments of D6 and D7 (bit 6 and bit 7) of digit 2. It is done. Further, in this special figure 2 storage segment table, areas of addresses “1206H” to “120EH” are allocated, and the total area is “9”. As shown in FIG. 20, “1206H” is an area of “special symbol memory display 2LED extinction data”, and the value stored in this area is “00H”. Then, the values of bit 6 and bit 7 are “00B” based on the data “00H”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20, “1207H” and “1208H” are areas of “special symbol memory display 2LED lighting data 1”, and the value stored in this area is “40H”. Then, with the data “40H”, the values of bit 6 and bit 7 become “01B”, and the segment corresponding to the bit that has become “1B” is driven to light. Further, “1209H” to “120BH” are areas of “special symbol storage display 2LED lighting data 2”, and the value stored in this area is “C0H”. Then, the values of bit 6 and bit 7 become “11B” by the data “C0H”. “110CH” is an area of “special symbol storage display 2 display LED lighting data 3”, and the value stored in this area is “80H”. The values of bit 6 and bit 7 are “10B” due to the data “80H”.

Furthermore, “120DH” is also an area of “special symbol memory display 2 LED lighting data 2”, and the value stored in this area is “C0H”. Further, “120EH” is an area of “special symbol storage display 2LED extinction data”, and the value stored in this area is “00H”. As for the special figure 2 storage segment table, the blinking display of the LED indicator lamps (Y, Z) is included in the hold display pattern, so the blinking in the normal symbol storage segment table and the special figure 1 storage segment table described above. There is the same situation as switching, and one is selected from nine patterns (pattern data).
<<< Error status segment table 2 >>>

Subsequently, the above-described error state segment table 2 shown in FIG. 20 is a table for displaying the second state indicator lamp 232, and is used for driving the digit 5 from D0 to D6 (bit 0 to bit 6). It is done. Further, the error status segment table 2 is assigned with an area of “120FH”, and the total area is “1”. As shown in FIG. 20, “120FH” is an area of “status indicator lamp 2 lighting data” corresponding to the second segment indicator lamp 232a to the second segment indicator lamp 232g. Yes, the value stored in this area is “7FH”. Then, from data “7FH”, bit 0 to bit 6 become “1111111B”.
<<< Error status segment table 3 >>>

Subsequently, the above-described error state segment table 3 shown in FIG. 20 is a table for displaying the main control error indicator lamp 233, and is used for the segment drive of D7 (bit 7) of the digit 5. Furthermore, an area with an address “1210H” is allocated to the error state segment table 3, and the total area is “1”. As shown in FIG. 20, “1210H” is an area of “main control error display lamp lighting data” corresponding to the main control error display lamp 233, and the value stored in this area is “80H”. is there. Then, bit 7 becomes “1B” by data “80H”.
<<< Special Electric Operation Frequency Segment Table 2 >>>

  20 is a table for displaying the number of times of operation related to the special electric accessory, and from the first segment 232a for the second status indicator lamp of the digit 5. This is used for the segment driving of D0 to D6 (bit 0 to bit 6) corresponding to the second segment 232g for the second status indicator lamp. Furthermore, in this special electric power operation frequency segment table 2, areas of addresses “1211H” to “1212H” are allocated, and the total area is “2”. As shown in FIG. 20, “1211H” is an area of “status indicator light 2 lighting data 2”, and a value stored in this area is “75H”. “1212H” is an area of “status indicator lamp 2 lighting data 3”, and a value stored in this area is “35H”.

Bits 0 to 6 (D0 to D6) are changed to “1110101B” by “75H” related to the “status indicator 2 lighting data 2”. Also, bits “0” to “6” become “0110101B” due to “35H” related to the “status indicator 2 lighting data 3” described above. That is, “status indicator 2 lighting data 2” is an area for designating the display mode of the second status indicator 232 in the round number display per 4R large, and “status indicator 2 lighting data 3” is 16R. This is an area for designating the display mode of the second status indicator lamp 232 in the big hit round number display. In this embodiment, only when the 16R round number display is performed and when the 4R round number display is performed, only the presence / absence of lighting of the D6 (bit 6) segment in the digit 5 is different. It has become.
<<< small hits segment table 2 >>>

Subsequently, the above-described small hitting segment table 2 shown in FIG. 20 is a table for displaying the small hitting, and the digit 5 of the second status indicating lamp first segment 232a to the second status indicating lamp No. 2 is displayed. This is used for segment driving of D0 to D6 (bit 0 to bit 6) corresponding to 7 segments. Furthermore, an area with an address of “1213H” is allocated to the small hit segment table 2, and the total area is “1”. As shown in FIG. 20, “1213H” is an area of “status indicator 2 lighting data 2”, and the value stored in this area is “75H” as described above. In the present embodiment, the display mode of the second status indicator lamp 232 (corresponding to D0 to D6) in the case of small hit is the same as the display mode of the second status indicator lamp 232 in the case of the aforementioned 4R big hit ( 1110101B).
<<< Special Symbol Segment Table >>>

  Next, the above-described special symbol segment table shown in FIG. 21 is a table for displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the digit 3 D0 to D7 (bit 0 to bit 7) segment drive is performed. Used for. Furthermore, in this special symbol segment table, areas with addresses “1214H” to “1244H” are allocated, and the total area is “49”. As shown in FIG. 21, names from “special symbol“ symbol 1 ”segment data” to “special symbol“ symbol 49 ”segment data” are assigned to the areas “1214H” to “1244H”. The data stored in each area is “C0H”, “E0H”, “7FH”, “BFH”, “DFH”, “EFH”, “F7H”, “3FH”, “5FH” in order. , “AFH”, “37H”, “9BH”, “6BH”, “B3H”, “6DH”, “D5H”, “B6H”, “DAH”, “2BH”, “8DH”, “55H”, “55H”, 69H "," A6H "," 5AH "," B2H "," CCH "," 1AH "," 67H "," 5BH "," ABH "," D3H "," ADH "," B5H "," D9H " , “D6H”, “B4H”, “53H” “35H”, “4BH”, “95H”, “6AH”, “C6H”, “ACH”, “16H”, “26H”, “46H”, “4AH”, “32H”, “52H” Yes.

Here, while the special symbol is changing, two LEDs, D6 (bit 6) and D7 (bit 7), are switched by switching whether to refer to the contents (C0H) of the leading address 1214H by switching blinking. Control to turn on / off. The other addresses are controlled so that, when the symbol is stopped, the address to be referred to is switched based on the value determined according to the symbol lottery based on the symbol random number, and the corresponding LED is turned on. In addition, while it is fluctuating, blinking is displayed depending on whether only the top address is referenced, but it is assumed that the plurality of addresses are sequentially switched from the top and the plurality of LEDs are sequentially lit to change the state. You may make it express. The content of 1214H (C0H) is a symbol that is selected when the winning lottery is out of date, but it may be displayed in a blinking manner with a symbol that is not out of place, or one of a plurality of outlier symbols may blink May be expressed as
<< Working area of RWM related to LED output >>

  Next, a work area of the RWM 503 used for LED output of the main control display device 53 will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, the RWM 503 of the main board 102 is set as a work area from a predetermined address and the head area is used as a checksum area. This checksum area is an area for storing the checksum (checksum data) of the RWM 503 excluding the checksum area when the power is turned off. The address of the checksum area is F000H, and the total area is “1”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the work area F03DH is an area of the special figure 1 display timer. This special figure 1 display timer is an area for storing a timer for managing a time (display switching time) for switching the special symbol 1 displayed during the fluctuation of the special symbol 1. The total area of the special figure 1 display timer is “1”, and the stored data is any one of 25 data of 00H to 18H (decimal numbers 0 to 24).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the work area F03EH is an area of the special figure 1 display number. The special symbol 1 display number is an area for storing a special symbol number used for displaying the special symbol 1. The total area of the special figure 1 display number is “1”, and the stored data is 00H to 12H, 1BH to 23H, 2CH to 31H, and the maximum value (MAX value) is 31H (= 49) 34 One of the data.

  Further, F061H of the work area is a special figure 2 display timer area. This special figure 2 display timer is an area for storing a timer for managing a time (display switching time) for switching the special symbol 2 displayed during the fluctuation of the special symbol 2. The total area of the special figure 2 display timer is “1”, and the stored data is any one of 25 data of 00H to 18H (decimal numbers 0 to 24).

  Further, F062H of the work area is a special figure 2 display number area. This special figure 2 display number is an area for storing a special symbol number used for displaying the special symbol 2. The total area of the special figure 2 display number is “1”, and the stored data is any one of 24 data of 00H, 01H, 03H to 07H, 0AH, 13H to 1AH, and 24H to 2BH.

  The work area F09AH is a normal symbol mode flag area. The normal symbol mode flag stores a different value depending on the state (mode) of the normal symbol display device that performs the function for displaying the normal symbol, and the total area is “1”. . The normal symbol mode flag value is “00H” when the normal symbol display device has a low lottery probability, when the normal symbol display device does not operate the variable time reduction function, and when the normal electric accessory is not activated. The normal symbol mode flag value is “01H” when the normal symbol display device has a high probability of lottery, when the normal symbol display device operates the variable time reduction function, and when the normal electric accessory opening extension function is activated. Is. Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the above-described three gaming states operate simultaneously, the value of the normal symbol mode flag is set to 00H or 01H. However, if the data of the normal symbol mode flag is set to eight, for example, 00H to 07H, the presence / absence of normal figure accuracy, the presence / absence of normal figure time / shortness, and the presence / absence of the normal figure release extension function operation may be expressed as separate data. It becomes possible. In this case, it is necessary to change the LED and digit assignment.

  Also, F09EH in the work area is an area for game state display number 2. This game state display number 2 is an area used for informing a predetermined state of a special symbol display device that performs a function for displaying a special symbol by data of “00H” or “01H”. Is “1”. Examples of the predetermined state notified using the game state display number 2 include a state in which the special symbol display device is in operation at the time of power-off recovery after power-on, and at the time of power-off recovery after power-on To the state until the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol display device is completed, and the operation state of the probability variation function of the special symbol display device.

  Although not shown, F0A8H in the work area is a buffer area such as the aforementioned digit. This digit buffer is an area for storing digit data to be output to an output port such as a digit, a launch permission signal, and an effect data strobe. This is an area for storing the normal symbol number (00H or 01H) used to display the buffer normal symbol, and the total area is “1”. The least significant bit (bit 0) to bit 4 of the buffer such as a digit is data representing the selected digit.

  That is, data (00001B) in which bit 0 is “1” and other bits are “0” indicates that digit 1 is selected, bit 1 is “1”, and other bits are “0”. Data (00010B) indicating that the digit 2 is selected. Further, data (00100B) in which bit 2 is “1” and other bits are “0” indicates that digit 3 is selected, bit 3 is “1”, and other bits are “0”. Data (01000B) indicating that digit 4 has been selected. Data (10000B) in which bit 4 is “1” and the other bits are “0” indicates that digit 5 has been selected.

  Further, bit 5 of the digit buffer indicates whether or not the launch is permitted. When bit 5 is “0”, launch is prohibited, and when bit 5 is “1”, launch is permitted. Bit 6 of the digit buffer is “1” only when a command is transmitted to the sub-main board 301, and bit 7, which is the most significant bit, has a fixed value of “0”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the work area F0A9H is an area of a digit counter. This digit counter is an area for selecting each digit described above, and the total area is "1". When the normal symbol, the normal symbol operation hold ball number, the status display, the error display, and the right-handed instruction display request are made (when the digit 1 is selected), the digit counter data is “00H”. .

  In addition, when a display request for the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls and the number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls is made (when digit 2 is selected), the data of the digit counter is “01H”. Furthermore, when a special symbol 1 display request is made (when digit 3 is selected), the digit counter data is “02H”, and when a special symbol 2 display request is made (when digit 4 is selected). Becomes “03H”. When a display request for status display and error display is made (when digit 5 is selected), the data of the digit counter is “04H”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22, the work area F0AAH is a normal symbol display timer area. The normal symbol display timer is an area for storing a timer for managing the time for switching the normal symbol to be displayed during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the total area is “1”. The data stored in the normal symbol display timer is one of 00H to 18H data. The normal symbol display timer data (00H to 18H) is used for switching the normal symbol segment table (see FIG. 20).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 22, F0ABH in the work area is an area for normal symbol display numbers. This normal symbol display number is an area for storing a normal symbol number (00H or 01H) used for displaying a normal symbol, and the total area is “1”. When a normal symbol is expressed by a plurality of lights such as two lights, if the number of LEDs is N, data of 0 to 2 ^ (N-1) can be stored. In this case, it is necessary to change the assignment of digits and LED indicators in accordance with the data mode.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22, F0ACH in the work area is an area of error state display number 1. This error status display number 1 is an area for storing a display request for displaying the RWM initialization by the first status indicator 231 and the second status indicator 232 described above. The area is “1”. The data of the error status display number when there is no display request for RWM initialization is “00H”, and the data when there is a display request for RWM initialization is “01H”.

  Further, F0ADH of the work area is an area of error state display number 2. The error status display number 2 is an area for storing a display request for displaying the error status display with the main control error indicator lamp 233 described above, and the total area is “1”. The data of the error status display number 2 when there is no error display request is “00H”, and the data when there is an error display request is “01H”. When the RWM is initialized, the RWM initialization display (lighting) is performed for about 30 seconds as described above, so that the data becomes “01H”.

  Further, F0AEH in the work area is an area for the special electric operation number display number. This special electric operation number display number is an area for round display at the time of big hit, and the total area is “1”. And the data of the special electric operation number display number in the case of no continuous operation number display (no round display) of the special electric accessory is “00H”. Furthermore, the data when the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory is 4 times (with 4R display) is “01H”, and when the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory is 16 times (with the 16R indication) The data is “02H”.

  Further, F0AFH of the work area is an area of the small hit display number. This small hit display number is an area for display related to the small hit, and the total area is “1”. The data of the small hit display number when there is no special electric accessory operation display (no small hit) when the accessory continuous operating device is not operated is “00H”, and the special electric when the accessory continuous operating device is not operated is “00H”. The data in the case of the accessory operation display (with small hit) is “01H”.

  In addition, F0B0H of the work area is an area of the usual reserved ball number blinking timer. This normal figure holding ball number blinking timer is an area for storing a timer for managing the time for switching the display of the normal symbol memory display LED (LED indicator lamps A and B) for displaying the normal symbol operation holding ball number, The total area is “1”. Then, the data stored in the usual reserved ball number blinking timer is one of the data of 00H to 18H.

  In addition, F0B1H of the work area is an area of the usual number of reserved balls blinking. The flashing number for the usual reserved ball number is an area for blinking display related to the number of the usual reserved balls, and the total area is “1”. When the normal symbol memory display LED (LED indicator lamps A and B) has no display switching request (no flashing switching), the data of the number of the reserved figure blinking numbers is “00H”, and there is a display switching request (flashing). In the case of switching), the data is “01H”.

  In addition, F0B2H of the work area is an area for the usual number of reserved balls. This general-purpose reserved ball number display number is an area for storing an offset for setting segment data of normal symbol storage display LEDs (LED indicator lamps A and B), and the total area is “1”. The data stored in the general-purpose reserved ball number display number is one of data 00H to 09H. In addition, when the above-mentioned usual figure reserved ball number blinking number (F0B1H) is blinking switched, the value of the offset for setting the segment data of the normal symbol storage display LEDs (LED indicator lamps A and B) is “hold”. “Number of spheres × 2 + 1”, and when there is no blink switching, “number of spheres held × 2”.

  Further, F0B3H in the work area is an area of the special figure 1 reserved ball number blinking timer. This special figure 1 reserved ball number flashing timer is an area for storing a timer for managing the time for switching the display of the special symbol memory display 1 LED (LED indicator lamps O, P) for displaying the special symbol 1 operation reserved ball number. Yes, the total area is “1”. The data stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball number blinking timer is one of data 00H to 18H.

  Further, F0B4H in the work area is an area for the special figure 1 reserved ball number flashing number. The special figure 1 reserved ball number blinking number is an area for blinking display related to the special figure 1 reserved ball number, and the total area is “1”. And, when there is no special symbol memory display 1 LED (LED indicator lights O, P) display switching request (no flashing switching), the data of the special figure 1 reserved ball number flashing number is “00H”, and there is a display switching request ( Data in the case of blinking switching) is “01H”.

  Further, F0B5H in the work area is an area for the special figure 1 reserved ball number display number. This special figure 1 reserved ball number display number is an area for storing an offset for setting the segment data of the special symbol memory display 1 LED (LED indicator lights O, P), and the total area is “1”. . The data stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball number display number is one of data 00H to 09H.

  Also, F0B6H in the work area is an area for the special figure 2 reserved ball number blinking timer. This special figure 2 reserved ball number flashing timer is an area for storing a timer for managing the time for switching the display of the special symbol memory display 2LED (LED indicator lamps Y, Z) for displaying the special symbol 2 operation reserved ball number. Yes, the total area is “1”. The data stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball number blinking timer is one of data 00H to 18H.

  Further, F0B7H of the work area is an area of the special figure 2 reserved ball number flashing number. The special figure 2 reserved ball number blinking number is an area for blinking display related to the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the total area is “1”. The special symbol memory display 2 LED (LED indicator lamps Y, Z) display switching request data when there is no display switching request (no flashing switching) is “00H”, and there is a display switching request ( Data in the case of blinking switching) is “01H”.

  Further, F0B8H in the work area is an area for the special figure 2 reserved ball number display number. This special figure 2 reserved ball number display number is an area for storing an offset for setting the segment data of the special symbol memory display 2LED (LED indicator lamps Y, Z), and the total area is "1". . The data stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball number display number is one of data 00H to 09H.

  In addition, F0DCH in the work area is an area for the assignment status flag. The hit state flag is an area for display related to the right-handed indicator lamp (LED indicator lamp F) described above, and the total area is “1”. The data of the hit state flag when there is a right turn instruction lamp turn-off request is “00H”, and the data when there is a right turn instruction lamp turn-on request is “01H”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22, F16AH to F1EBH in the work area are unused areas, and F1ECH to F1FFH including the last address (F1FFH) are restored when power is cut off during power interruption processing. This is a stack area for storing information (program address, etc.) for returning.
<< Specific Mode of LED Output Processing >>

  Next, a specific mode of the above-described LED output process (see S65 in FIG. 13), which is a process for driving these digits and segments, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the LED output process, clear data (00H) is set (S101), and this clear data is output to the segment output port (S102).

  The segment output port is an output port for output to the segment output IC 203 in the main CPU 501, and is specified by a predetermined address value (0F4H in this embodiment) related to the RWM 503. The CPU 501 of the main board 102 outputs the data existing in the storage area indicating the segment output port for driving the segment in the digit selected as described above. In the present embodiment, as described above (see FIG. 16B), one segment is allocated for each bit, and the data output of “00H” is allocated to the digit selected at that time. All the LED segments are reliably turned off (extinguished) regardless of the previous state.

  The process related to the clear data (S101 to S102) is the data output in the previous game progress interrupt process in the game progress interrupt process (also called the current game progress interrupt process) at that time, in other words, the previous time If there is data for which the LED segment is turned on continuously from the game progress interruption process, the data is erased. In other words, the process related to the clear data (S101 to S102) deletes the data being output for the LED segment, turns off the LED segment that is driven to light by the previous game progress interrupt process, and lights the current game progress interrupt process. The data is cleared to prevent the reflection of light on the LED segment in the digit to be played, and the environment for driving the LED segment is prepared in the current game progress interrupt process.

  Subsequently, the address of the digit counter is set (S103). This digit counter is provided at a predetermined address (see F0A9H in FIG. 22) in the RWM 503 of the main board 102. The digit counter has a value from “0000B” to “0100B” depending on the situation. In other words, any one of the five values from decimal “0” to “4” is stored. Then, in the subsequent processing of S104, it is determined whether or not the digit counter value is less than 4. If the digit counter value is less than 4, the contents of the digit counter are updated by one, and the digit counter value is updated. If the value is 4 or more, “0” is stored in the digit counter (S104).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the digits for outputting the display data are classified into five types, digit 1 (DIG1) to digit 5 (DIG5), and the digit counter starts counting from “0”. When the counter value reaches “4”, the digit counter value is returned to “0”. The digit counter value “0” corresponds to digit 1 (DIG1), and the digit counter values “1” to “4” correspond to digit 2 (DIG2) to digit 5 (DIG5), respectively. ing.

  In the processes of S103 to S104, the digit (digit information) corresponding to the data to be displayed is stored in order to switch the digit to be lit (lit digit) or the segment (lit segment). .

  Subsequently, the contents of the aforementioned digit counter are loaded as 1-byte data (S105), and the address of the digit counter is set (S106). Further, the above 1-byte data is doubled (S107), and the address of the digit data table is set as the base address stored in a predetermined register (S108). Then, the result doubled in S107 is added to the base address (S109). In these processes of S105 to S109, in order to obtain digit output data (described later), the double value of the digit counter and the address of the digit data table are added, and the contents stored in the address of the result of the addition are added. This is digit output data.

  That is, in the process of S105 described above, the value of the digit counter at that time is loaded. Further, the 1-byte data of the digit counter has any value from “0000B” to “0100B” described above, and the 1-byte data at this time is doubled (S107). For example, if the value of the digit counter in the previous game progress interrupt is 2 (0010B) and digit 2 (DIG2) is specified, in the LED output process in the current game progress interrupt process, it is doubled in S107. The value obtained in this way is 4 (0100B).

  Furthermore, in S108, the address of the digit data table set as the base address in S108 is “11BDH” described above. Then, the base address is updated by adding the value obtained by doubling in S107 to this base address (S109). For example, taking the case where the value obtained in S107 is 4 (0100B) as an example, the value obtained by adding in S109 is the address of the above-described digit 3-bit data (see FIG. 19A). 11C1H ".

  In the above example, the value “11C1H” obtained in S109 indicates the address of “digit 3 bit data” in the digit data table (see FIG. 19A). The data stored in the “digit 3-bit data” is “04H” (= 00000100B) as shown in FIG. When the digit 3 is selected in the current game progress interrupt process, the value of the lower 5 bits of the “04H” is stored in the digit buffer set at a predetermined address (F0A8H in this embodiment). The lower 5 bits are stored as lower 5 bits of data.

  As described above, the above-mentioned digit buffer is an RWM area capable of storing 2-byte data including information related to digit selection. From the 8-bit information constituting 2 bytes, the least significant bit 0 is used. The lower 5 bits of bit 4 represent the digit data to be output (corresponding to the digit output data described above). Further, bit 5 is data representing prohibition / permission of launch, and the other bits 6 and 7 are fixed values of 0.

  In addition, as described above, the digit data (digit output data) represented by bit 0 to bit 4 of the digit buffer is “1” corresponding to the digit to be lit and driven in this game progress interruption process. The other bits are “0”. That is, when the digit data (digit output data) is “00001B” whose least significant bit is “1B”, digit 1 (DIG1) is selected. In addition, when the digit data (digit output data) is “00010B” in which bit 1 is “1B”, digit 2 (DIG2) is selected, and “00100B” in which bit 2 is “1B”. In this case, digit 3 (DIG3) is selected. Further, when bit 3 is “01000B” which is “1B”, digit 4 (DIG4) is selected, and when bit 4 is “10000B” which is “1B”, digit 5 (DIG5) is set. Will be selected.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23, the above-described digit buffer address (F0A8H in this embodiment) is set (S110), and the digit buffer value is loaded (S111). The value of the buffer such as a digit is 8-bit data representing the digit selected by the lower 5 bits as described above. In the above example in which the digit 3 (DIG3) is selected in the current game progress interruption process, the lower 5 bits in the value of the buffer such as the digit is “00100B”.

  Further, the logical product of the loaded value and the digit clear bit data (here, 0010000B) is calculated (S112). For example, when the loaded value is “00100010B” indicating the state of permission for launch and the selection of digit 2, the logical operation result is “00100000B”, and the information of the lower 5 bits related to the digit selection is cleared. Is done.

  Subsequently, the logical sum of the logical product result and the contents of the base address is taken (S113), and the logical sum result is stored in a buffer such as a digit (S114). In the case of the above-described example, the base address when the above-described S113 is executed is “11C1H” obtained by the addition in S109. The address “11C1H” includes the address “11C1H” in FIG. As shown, “04H” is stored. For this reason, the value stored in S114 is “00100100B”, which is the logical sum of the above-mentioned “00100000B” and “004H” that is “04H”.

  The value calculated in S113 is stored in the digit output port (0F0H) in S115, and the lower 5 bits of the 1-byte data in the digit output port is the digit selected in the current game progress interrupt process. (In this case, digit 3). The address of the digit output port (0F0H here) is 12-bit data, but this uses an area (I / O map) that is different from the memory map area (work area) used in game programs and the like. It is what.

  As described above, in the above-described processing of S110 to S115, the newly acquired output data is output while holding the signal other than the digit output to the digit output port (0F0H). The logical product of the clear bit data (00100000B) is calculated (S110 to S112). Then, the logical sum of the logical product and the acquired output data is calculated (S113), and the logical sum is output to the digit output port (0F0H) (S115). The logical sum is stored in a buffer such as a digit (S114).

  Of these, the processes of S113 to S115 described above designate the digit selected in the current game progress interrupt process. In addition, the processing of S110 to S115 including S113 to S115 corresponds to the processing for starting output to each segment, but clear data is output to each segment by S101 to S102 described above. Yes. Therefore, at this stage, there is only data output for turning off each segment (data output with a value of “0B”), and data output for turning on each segment (data output with a value of “1B”) Absent.

  Subsequently, in S116 and subsequent steps in FIG. 23, data for segment output in the current game progress interrupt process is created, and the created data is stored in the RWM area (the above-described digit output port) at the address of the segment output port (0F4H). The process for turning on the segment to be stored and stored in the I / 0 area) is executed. First, the base address is incremented by 1 (S116), and the contents of the base address are loaded (S117). Further, the loaded value is added to the base address (S118).

  In the processes of S116 to S118, the base address is transferred from the digit data table to each segment table (see FIG. 19B) related to each digit. Each segment table relating to each digit refers to the digit 1 segment table to the digit 5 segment table relating to the digit 1 to the digit 5. Each segment table related to each digit can also be referred to as a “digit N segment table”. Here, “N” in the “digit N segment table” represents a natural number of 1 to 5.

  In this game progress interruption process, for example, when the transition to the segment table related to the digit 3 is performed, the address (11C1H) of the digit 3 bit data which is the base address at this time is incremented by 1 in S116. The updated base address is “11C2H”. The value of “11C2H” corresponds to the address of “calculated value of the digit 3 segment table” relating to the digit 3 in FIG.

  In step S117, “1BH”, which is data stored in the base address (11C2H), is loaded. In S118, “1BH” is added to the base address (11C2H) to calculate “11DDH”. “11DDH” obtained here is the head address of the digit 3 segment table shown in FIG. This “11DDH” represents an RWM address that stores the number of inspections (see FIG. 19B) for creating the segment data of the digit 3 as will be described later.

  Further, the contents of the base address are loaded as the number of inspections described above (S119), and clear data (00H) is set as segment data (S120). In the above example, the base address in S119 is “11DDH”, and the content is “01H” as shown in FIG. The clear data set in S120 described above is performed over S101 described above, and is a process of resetting output data remaining from the previous game progress interrupt process to an initial value.

  Subsequently, as shown in S121 in FIG. 23, the base address is incremented by +1, the content of the base address is loaded as the RWM lower address, the base address is incremented by 1, and the content of the base address is loaded as an offset (S121). That is, in S121, with respect to the base address before the start of processing, the content indicated by the base address +1 is set as the RWM lower address, and the content indicated by the base address +2 is set as the address calculation value.

  The above-mentioned RWM lower address (1 byte data) is a lower address for referring to the RWM work area, and the upper address is a fixed value of “F0”. Then, in combination with the upper address (F0), 2-byte data indicating an RWM address in which data indicating whether or not a segment is lit is stored. Further, in S121, the data having a value obtained by adding 1 to the base address is the RWM address data (address storing the segment data) used in S124 described later, and is then stored in the address obtained by adding the base address + 1. The data of the value that is stored is the calculated value up to the RWM area (−1) that stores the segment table.

  In the case of the above example (example in which digit 3 is selected in the current game progress interruption process), as described above, the base address is changed from the digit data table (11BDH to 11C6H in FIG. 19A) to the digit 3 segment table. The process of setting to the head address (11DDH) of (11DDH to 11DFH in FIG. 19B) has been performed by the above-described S118. In the process of S121, the base address (11DDH = inspection count data storage address) is incremented by 1, and the base address becomes “11DEH”.

  This “11DEH” is the address of “Special Figure 1 Display Number Address (Lower Level)” in FIG. 19B, in which data “3EH” is stored. The upper address of “3EH” is “F0H” which is a fixed value. Then, “F03EH”, which is the content of the base address (here, the data of “Special Figure 1 Display Number Address (Lower Level)”) is read.

  Further, in S121, the base address is further incremented by +1. By this calculation, the base address becomes “11DFH”. This “11DFH” is an address of “address calculation value of special symbol segment table address-1” shown in FIG. This “calculated value of special symbol segment table address-1” is an area that stores an operation value for changing the base address, and its content is “34H”. Then, the value of “34H” is loaded by the “load the contents of the base address as an offset” process in S121.

  Subsequently, the base address is saved (S122), and an offset is added to the base address (S123). The save in S122 described above is to store the same value in another predetermined area (here, a predetermined register) while leaving the value at that time in the base address.

  In the example in which the segment 3 is selected for the above-described S123, the base address at this stage is “11DFH”, and the offset value is “34H”. For this reason, the value obtained by the addition processing in S123 is “1213H”. This “1213H” is a value obtained by subtracting “1214H”, which is the start address of the “special symbol segment table” shown in FIG. 21, and in this embodiment, the “special symbol segment table” This matches the address of the “small hit segment table 2” arranged before.

  Subsequently, the contents of the RWM address (RWM lower address) are loaded (S124). If the value loaded in S124 is not 0 (S125: NO), the loaded value is added to the base address (S126). Then, the contents of the base address and the result of the logical sum of the segment data are set in the segment data (S127), and the base address is restored (S128).

  The above-described S124 is an address (for each lighting data) composed of the value read as the RWM lower address in S121 (data stored in the address obtained by adding +1) and the upper address data “F0”. The RWM work area) loads data indicating whether or not each segment is lit. The data loaded in S124 is used in S125 described above.

  In the example of selecting the digit 3 described above, the value loaded in S124 described above and used in S125 is any of the data stored in the address “F03EH”. As shown in FIG. 22, the address “F03EH” is “special figure 1 display number”, and the data stored therein is “00H to 12H, 1BH to 23H, 2CH to 31H”. For this reason, the “loaded value” used in S125 and S126 is one of these 34 1-byte data. In S126, the “base address” is an address obtained by adding “loaded value” to “1213H” obtained in S123.

  In S127, the “segment data” is a value to be output from the segment output port at the current interruption, and is the value stored in the base address obtained in S126 until the number of inspections becomes zero (“base data”). The contents of the address ") are data that are logically ORed with the data stored so far each time S121 to S129 are circulated.

  Here, when digit 3 is selected, as shown in the column of “digit 3 segment table” in FIG. 19B, the number of inspections is 1, so the segment data used is 1 Only the one corresponding to the type of information. In this embodiment, the “segment data” in S127 matches the clear data set in S120.

  On the other hand, in the case where the digit 1 is selected in this game progress interruption process, as shown in the column of “digit 1 segment table” in FIG. Because of this, eight types of information are output. Then, the processes of S121 to S127 are repeated so that the bits corresponding to the segment table data referred to for each output type are overwritten and updated, and data is overwritten as needed. Here, since there are eight types of output, the segment data is not updated on and off bit by bit, but for example, two or more bits are updated with one type of data, such as ordinary map storage (general map hold). In some cases. Depending on the type of output, the same bits as other types may be shared. More specifically, the digit 1 shares a bit in order to turn on the LED (the first status indicator lamp 231) having the same number of special operation times and the number of small hits. In the case of the digit 5 or the like, the bit is shared when it is desired to light all the LEDs at the time of an error or the like.

  For this reason, for example, when the digit 1 is selected by repeating the above-described processing, for example, in S127, for example, the content of the base address (00001000B) is logically added to the segment data (00000111B), and a new one is obtained. For example, (00001111B) may be set as the segment data. This means that in S129, which will be described later, it is determined whether or not the result of decrementing the number of inspections by −1 satisfies the condition “≠ 0”, and if the condition is satisfied, there is a process of returning to S121. Based on.

  As described above, S127 is based on the segment data (old segment data) created and stored as segment output data up to now as new segment data (new segment data) and the data of the work area (see FIG. 22). The logical sum of the data extracted (calculated) and stored in the base address is calculated, and the obtained result is updated and stored.

  On the other hand, if the loaded value is 0 (00H) in S125 described above (S125: YES), the process proceeds to S128 without performing S126 (addition to the base address) and S127 (segment data setting) described above. The base address that has been transferred and saved in S122 is restored. For example, when the number of inspections is one, such as the digit 3, the return process is not performed.

Further, in S129 described above, the number of inspections is decremented by 1, and if the result is 0 (S129: NO), segment data is set as output data (S130). Then, output data is output to the segment output port (0F4H) (S131), and the LED output process is exited. That is, the value set in S130 is data representing a segment to be lit in the selected segment. In S129, if the result of subtracting the number of inspections by -1 is not 0 (S129: YES), the process returns to S121 (loading an offset) to generate output data having a number of types corresponding to the number of inspections. Is called.
<< Display number switching process >>

  Next, processing that is performed to switch the display pattern according to whether or not the main control display device 53 should be turned on when each segment blinks will be described. The display switching of each segment is performed by a display number switching process as shown in FIG. This display number switching process includes the above-described gaming state display process (see S63 in FIG. 13), special symbol variation processing (sub-module called in S57), and normal symbol variation processing (sub-call in S54). Module). Further, in the display number switching process, when it is determined that the display switching timer is updated and the display pattern number is updated, the display pattern number is updated. The above-described special symbol variation processing and normal symbol variation processing will be described later.

  Details of the display number switching process will be described below based on the flowchart of FIG. First, in order to update the display switching timer, the RWM head upper address (F0H) is set (input) as the RWM upper address (S151). Further, in S152, the content of the RWM address is compared with the LED display switching time (for example, 25) -1. If the comparison result is less than the LED display switching time -1, the content of the RWM address is incremented by one. When the comparison result is LED display switching time −1 or more, 0 is stored in the RWM address, and RWM is cleared to 0.

  In addition, the RWM lower address is held in the process in which the display number switching process is called. For example, in the normal symbol variation display process, when the process is called, “AAH” is already held. According to this, the RWM address is “F0AAH”, which is the RWM address of the normal symbol display timer in the RWM work area. Further, in the case of the special symbol variation processing, 3DH or 61H is held as the lower address depending on either the variation in the special diagram 1 or the special diagram 2.

  Further, in S152, the content of the RWM address is compared with the LED display switching time (for example, 25) -1. If the comparison result is less than the LED display switching time -1, the content of the RWM address is incremented by one. When the comparison result is LED display switching time −1 or more, 0 is stored in the RWM address, and RWM is cleared to 0.

  Subsequently, the RWM address is incremented by 1 (S153). Then, in order to update the display pattern number, if the result of the comparison before updating the content of the RWM address in S152 satisfies the condition of the content of the RWM address ≧ the LED display switching time−1 (S154: NO), the display number Return to the process before starting the switching process. On the other hand, when the comparison result does not satisfy the condition of the content of the RWM address ≧ the LED display switching time−1 (S154: YES), the process proceeds to the next step S155. In S155, the content of the RWM address set in S153 is confirmed. If the content of the 0th bit is “0”, the 0th bit is set to “1”, and if the content of the 0th bit is “1”, Processing to set the 0th bit to “1” is performed.

In the above example, “25” is set as the LED display switching time of the display switching timer. The RWM address (which holds any of 00H to 18H as the contents) storing various display switching timers is designated as the RWM address in S152. Then, the content of the RWM address is compared with the comparison value (24 = 25−1) of the LED display switching time for each interrupt. , 0 is set to the contents of the RWM address. According to this, when the RWM address is updated for each interrupt and 25 updates are performed from 0, the content of the RWM address reaches 25 and becomes longer than the LED display switching time. In the present embodiment, the period of the game progress interruption process is set to about 4 ms. Therefore, by setting the LED display switching time to “25”, the LED display switching time becomes 100 ms (4 ms × 25). For example, when the normal symbol lighting time and extinguishing time are set to 100 ms, the display time is managed by setting the LED display switching time to “25” as described above. Note that the display switching timer value (25 in this case) may be subtracted by one from “25”, for example, and counted to “0”. In addition, the RWM work area and the RWM are changed for each type of timer that performs the switching determination so that the comparison value varies depending on the timer value that performs the switching determination, and further the comparison value varies depending on the gaming state. You may make it call from a table area.
<< Special symbol variation processing >>

  Next, the special symbol variation processing described above will be described. When the special symbol changing process is determined to be changing in the special symbol control process of S57 according to the progress state of the special figure game (RWM work storing special figure 1 game status, special figure 2 game status) This is a submodule program that is executed when the value of the area is changing). After the special symbol change start process, the special symbol change process monitors the special symbol change time, and if it is determined that the special symbol change time has ended, the transition to the special symbol change stop process is performed. It is for setting. In the special symbol variation described above, the display number switching process is executed using the RWM address to be combined with S151 as an argument in order to perform the special symbol variation.

  In the above-described special symbol variation time monitoring, a special symbol game timer (F029H in the RWM work area) in which the special symbol variation time determined based on the variation pattern random number is updated by subtracting the monitoring progress by one for each interrupt. * Execute by confirming (not shown). If the value of the special figure game timer is 0 as a result of the execution, it is determined that the special symbol variation time has ended.

  In the setting of the transition to the special symbol variation stop process described above, the special symbol stop symbol setting, the display effect end setting, and the special symbol game progress state are updated to stop display. Among these, in the setting of the special symbol stop symbol, the special symbol 1 is used to display the special symbol based on the symbol random number and to store the stop symbol information in the RWM work area. The contents of the number (F03BH * not shown) or the special figure 2 number (F05FH * not shown) are updated.

  Furthermore, in the setting of the display effect end described above, MODE (band lamp information) data (8FH) and EVENT (band lamp) are used to end the effect instructed to the effect control board (sub-main board 301) at the start of fluctuation. The command request setting process is executed with the information) data (50H) as an argument. Then, the command request setting process is executed with the contents indicated by the input RWM base address + table offset 2 (2) and the EVENT (design effect pattern stop) data (55H) as arguments.

  In addition, in the above-described special symbol game progress state setting, the special symbol 1 game status (F03AH * not shown) or special diagram in the RWM work area is displayed in order to set the special symbol game progress state to the special symbol stop symbol display. 2. The value of the game status (F05EH * not shown) is updated to a value indicating that the stop symbol is being displayed.

Thus, in the special symbol fluctuation processing, the timers related to the special symbol fluctuation display (special figure 1 display timer, special figure 2 display timer) are updated, and this timer is used to update the special symbol during fluctuation. The display mode of the symbols changes sequentially.
<< Normal symbol variation processing >>

  Next, the above-described normal symbol changing process will be described. The normal symbol changing process is a sub-module program that is executed when the normal symbol status (F01DH * RWM work area not shown) is a value indicating that the variable is changing in the normal symbol control process of S54. Further, in the normal symbol variation processing, the value of the timer (counter) for blinking control is confirmed, and processing for switching (or updating) the reference position of the lighting pattern in the RWM work area at the current interruption is performed. Then, after changing the normal symbol, the normal symbol change time is monitored by the normal symbol changing process, and when it is judged that the normal symbol change time has ended, the transition to the normal symbol change stop display state is set. Is to do. In the normal symbol variation described above, the normal symbol variation is performed. Therefore, the display number switching process is executed with the lower address (AAH) of the normal symbol display timer as an argument.

  In the above-described normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring, the normal symbol timer (F01EH * RWM work area not shown) is subtracted and updated by 1 for each interrupt in order to monitor the normal symbol fluctuation time. Determine whether or not. As a result of the execution, when the value of the normal symbol timer is 0, it is determined that the variation time of the normal symbol has ended.

  In the above-described normal symbol variation stop setting, the normal symbol variation stop setting is performed, so that the normal symbol stop symbol setting and the normal symbol status stop setting are performed. Among these, in setting the stop symbol of the normal symbol, the value of the normal symbol combination number determined by the random number related to the normal symbol is stored in the area of the normal symbol display number in order to make the display of the normal symbol stop.

In the normal symbol fluctuation processing, the timer (normal symbol display timer) related to the normal symbol fluctuation display (blinking display) is updated, and this timer (normal symbol display timer) is used to update the normal symbol during fluctuation. The display mode is sequentially changed.
<< All round display lights when clearing RWM >>

  Next, another example of the display mode in the main control display device 53 will be described. As described above, the first status indicator lamp 231 and the second status indicator lamp 232 of the main control display device 53 are used as round indicator lamps for displaying the number of rounds of a special game when a big hit is made. The main control error indicator lamp 233 is used when an error relating to the main board 102 occurs.

  And in addition to these uses, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the RWM is cleared (in the case of S5: YES, S6: NO, or S8: NO in FIG. 11), the first state Control is performed so that all nine segments constituting the indicator lamp 231 and the second status indicator lamp 232 and the main control error indicator lamp 233 are all lit (all lit). Specifically, after the RAM clear (S24) shown in FIG. 12, in the initial setting (S25) of the RWM, the first status indicator lamp 231, the second status indicator lamp 232, and the main control error indicator lamp 233 are set. Set the data for all lighting (set F0ACH of RWM work area to “01H”). Furthermore, after interruption permission (S31), LED display output (S65) is performed in the first game progress interruption process (see FIG. 13). Based on the process of S65, the first status indicator lamp 231, The second status indicator lamp 232 and the main control error indicator lamp 233 are all lit. In this embodiment, the total lighting time of the first status indicator lamp 231 and the second status indicator lamp 232 is 3 seconds (750 interrupts), and the total lighting time of the main control error indicator lamp 233 is 30 seconds (7500 interrupts). It has become.

  Such control is performed when the main control display device 53 is employed in a plurality of models having different game characteristics, such as different round numbers at the time of big hit, for example, the first status indicator lamp 231 and the second status indicator lamp This is to prevent a segment that is not used due to game characteristics from occurring for H.232 and the main control error indicator lamp 233.

  That is, the first status indicator lamp 231 includes a first segment 231a for the first status indicator lamp and a second segment 231b for the first status indicator lamp, and the second status indicator lamp 232 includes the second status indicator lamp 231b. The first segment 232a for the second state to the seventh segment 232g for the second status indicator lamp (see FIG. 16A). Further, the main control error indicator lamp 233 is composed of main control error indicator lamp dots 233a.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the number of rounds related to the special game is 4R or 16R. As shown in FIG. However, there are LED indicators that are not used (here, the second segment 232b and the fourth segment 232d of the second status indicator 232). In addition, by displaying all the lights including the segments that are not normally used in this way, it is conspicuous and prevents misidentification with game information (the number “18” is displayed at the time of all lights). Since it can be understood that this is different from the running round display “1” to “16” during the big hit, it has the effect of improving discrimination in fraud prevention and tests by public institutions.

  In addition, when the round number is displayed in the form of “16” or “4” in Arabic numerals, when the number of winning big rounds is 4R, the second status indicator 232 By lighting the second segment 232b, the third segment 232c, the sixth segment 232f, and the seventh segment 232g, the number “4” can be displayed. In addition, when the number of winning big hits is 16R, the six segments excluding the first segment 231a, the second segment 231b, and the second segment 232b of the second status indicator 232 of the first status indicator 231 The number “16” can be displayed by lighting the segments (232a, 232c to 232g). That is, all the segments of the first status indicator lamp 231 and the second status indicator lamp 232 can be used for displaying the numbers “4” and “16” relating to the number of rounds.

  Furthermore, as described above, when the round number is displayed in the form of Arabic numerals, which of the big hits and the small hits is won, and in the case of the big wins, which type of big hit Information such as whether or not the player has won is clarified only by visually recognizing the first status indicator lamp 231 and the second status indicator lamp 232. For this reason, for example, when an effect in which the probability state cannot be determined is employed, such an effect cannot be fully utilized.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined case (here, when the RWM is cleared) is determined in advance, and in this predetermined case, the first state indicator 231, the second state indicator 232, the main control error display By turning all the lights 233 on, regardless of the number of rounds of the game, by performing RWM clear (for example, by operating the initialization switch 544 (see FIG. 4)) Without waiting for the occurrence, it becomes clear that the first status indicator lamp 231, the second status indicator lamp 232, and the main control error indicator lamp 233 are being used. In this embodiment, since the main control error indicator lamp 233 is also fully lit when the RWM is cleared, it is easy to confirm that the main control error indicator lamp 233 is not an equipment that is not used without waiting for an error to occur. Can do.

In addition, the number of rounds displayed by an irregular symbol having no numerical continuity may be displayed by a symbol such as “H”, “Γ”, “Ξ”, etc. in addition to the display mode shown in FIG. Is possible. And even when adopting such display modes, depending on the usage mode of the segment, there may be a segment that is not used for round display etc., so by lighting all the target segments, It will perform the same function as described above.
<< Optimization of all lamp hours when RWM is cleared >>>>

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the RWM is cleared, the first status indicator lamp 231, the second status indicator lamp 232, and the main control error indicator lamp 233 are all controlled, and the first status indicator lamp 231 and the second status indicator lamp 231 The total lamp time of the status indicator lamp 232 is set to 3 seconds, and the total lamp time of the main control error indicator lamp 233 is set to 30 seconds. Among these, regarding the total lighting time of the first status indicator lamp 231 and the second status indicator lamp 232, for example, when the power is turned on with RWM clear, a big hit may occur at an early stage. In this case, the round display immediately starts and the round display immediately after the power is turned on is delayed, or the display of the running round display after finishing the display is prevented from being displayed. ing. That is, as described above, an optimal time is determined as a time for making both unused segment generation and a quick start of the round display after power interruption return compatible.

  Further, the total lighting time of the main control error indicator lamp 233 (30 seconds in this case) is combined with the prevention of unused segments, the confirmation of the information related to the RWM clear notification, and the external notification. It is something that balances clarification. That is, in this embodiment, if there is RWM clear as described above, a command (error command or the like) at the time of RWM clear is transmitted to the sub-main board 301, and the accompanying display is performed on the effect display device 60. It is like that. Since the error display on the effect display device 60 continues for 30 seconds, the total lighting time of the main control error display lamp 233 and the error display period on the effect display device 60 are related to each other, During the entire lighting time period of the control error display lamp 233, it is possible to always check against the effect display device 60 by a game shop clerk or the like.

  In addition, the main control error indicator lamp 233 alone can secure a long time as the total lighting time period, thereby clarifying the distinction from the lighting time of several seconds in other cases (in the case of errors), and clearing the RWM. You can check what happened without missing. Thus, it is easy to confirm information related to RWM clear.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described regarding the external information output process (see S70 in FIG. 13), when the above-described security information is output to the external information output port and RWM is cleared, This has come to appear in security information. The security information output period related to RWM clear is associated with the total lighting time of the main control error indicator lamp 233, which is the same 30 seconds in this embodiment. This security information output assumes that the hall computer of the amusement store can be used to make notifications related to security information. A sufficiently long period is secured so as not to be overlooked.
<< Change of LED display switching time >>

  In the above-described display number switching process (see FIG. 24), the display switching time includes the LED display switching time value (for example, 25) related to the display switching timer and the game progress interrupt processing cycle (here, 4 ms). Is determined by the product of For this reason, it is possible to change the display time of various information by changing the value of LED display switching time. In this embodiment, when the value of the LED display switching time related to the display switching timer is set to 20, for example, a display time of 80 ms can be set, and for example, a display time of 40 ms can be set. Further, a display time of 20 ms can be set by setting the value of the LED display switching time to 5, for example.

  Furthermore, if the LED display switching time is changed by referring to the required data from the RWM according to the gaming state, for example, the normal symbol variation time depends on the gaming state (whether the normal symbol variation time shortening function is activated). It becomes possible to change. Therefore, in order to change the value of the LED display switching time, a table for the display switching timer having each value (5, 10, 20, 25, etc.) is individually provided for the LED display switching time. Can be considered. And by providing a table individually, in the process of S152 and S154 in the above-mentioned display number switching process (refer FIG. 24), it respond | corresponds from several types of display switching timers according to the information used as a display object. It is possible to select and use a display switching timer related to time.

In addition to providing a table and varying the LED display switching time, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of types of control modules for the above-described display number switching processing (see FIG. 24) in accordance with each display time. It is also possible to select and use the display number switching process related to the corresponding time from among a plurality of types of display number switching processes according to the information to be displayed.
<Operational effects of the invention according to the present embodiment>

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, 36 segments (light emitting elements) are grouped into 5 digits (light emitting element groups) for LED output to the main control display device 53. Each digit is selected in turn for each period of the game progress interruption process. The number of segments that make up a group with each digit is 8 at the maximum, and the 8-bit segment data indicating the on / off information of each segment provides the necessary segments according to the gaming state. The lighting is driven during the execution period of the game progress interruption process.

  In addition, a timer (display switching timer) that counts time based on the game progress interrupt processing cycle (here 4 ms) is configured, and the segment lighting period is set to the game progress interrupt processing cycle using the display switching timer. Secured by timekeeping based. In addition, the same digit is selected at every digit selection cycle (20 ms) obtained by the product of the cycle of the game progress interrupt process (here 4 ms) and the number of digits (here 5), and the above-described display switching Information display for a predetermined period by the timer is realized. That is, for example, when a predetermined segment is to be visually recognized as being lit for a period of 100 ms, 4 ms lighting driving is repeated five times at 20 ms intervals.

  Therefore, the number of bits of the segment data can be reduced (8 bits in this embodiment) compared to the case where the segment data is always output for all the segments of the main control display device 53, and the main CPU 501 has a small output. Many segments can be controlled by the number of ports (one in this embodiment). In this embodiment, the selected digit is switched every game progress interruption process, but the display of predetermined information is repeated every digit selection period of 20 ms. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player, the game shop clerk, and the like that the predetermined information display is continuously performed, and the visibility of the information display is not impaired. Thus, the main control display device 53 can be efficiently controlled with high visibility.

  Further, according to the invention according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the amount of information of segment data output in one game progress interrupt process, and it is possible to save a storage area used for outputting segment data. . Furthermore, the number of segments that are driven to be lit at the same time can be suppressed, and power consumption can be reduced (energy saving).

  Depending on the relationship between the game progress interrupt processing cycle, the number of digits, the brightness of the segment that is lit, etc., the visibility may be reduced. In other words, if the digit selection cycle is excessively long, the duty ratio (ratio between lighting time and extinguishing time) will decrease, and even if the segment is normally lit, it will appear blinking or appear relatively dark There is. In such a case, the number of output ports of the main CPU 501 is increased to, for example, two, and segment data is output in a total of 16 bits of 8 bits and 8 bits to ensure an appropriate digit selection cycle. Good.

  Further, according to the invention according to the present embodiment, the special figure 1 display number (F03EH), the special figure 2 display number (which becomes the lighting pattern selection information storage area) in the predetermined work area (see FIG. 22) in the RWM 503 (see FIG. 22). F062H), game state display number 2 (F09EH), normal symbol display number (F0ABH), general-purpose reserved ball number display number (F0B1H), special figure 1 hold number display number (F0B5H), special figure 2 hold number display number ( Various areas such as “F0B7H) whose name includes“ display number ”are provided. In these lighting pattern selection information storage areas, for example, in the case of the special figure 1 display number, various data (lighting pattern selection information) such as 00H to 12H, 1BH to 23H, and 2CH to 31H are stored. These data are used as an offset for designating the operation state of the segment.

  These data (lighting pattern selection information) can also be updated based on game state transitions such as game progress and game parameter changes (start of fluctuation or occurrence of hold due to entering the starting gate). is there. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently display information related to various gaming states with high visibility as described above.

  More specifically, it can be said that the game state is different for each of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol at the time of holding, at the time of change, and at the time of change stop. In addition, for example, it can be understood that the elapsed time as the game parameter is changed and the gaming state is transitioned with the passage of time even when the special symbol 1 is on hold. The same applies to the special symbol 1 when it fluctuates or stops, when the special symbol 2 or normal symbol is held, when it fluctuates, when it fluctuates.

  In addition, the various areas provided in the work area (see FIG. 22) can be said to be secured by differences in the game state, the progress of the game, the game parameters, and the like, and are stored in each area. The various types of data to be obtained can also be said to have different values depending on differences in game state, game progress, game parameters, and the like.

  Further, according to the invention according to the present embodiment, in the interrupt process in which the display switching timer serving as the timer storage area is updated and the number of updates becomes a predetermined value (for example, 25), the work area serving as the lighting pattern selection information storage area Information (data) is updated, and a plurality of lighting pattern tables (tables used in the processing from the digit N segment table to S121 to S129) are referred to in one game progress interruption process. Then, the lighting pattern (extracted one unit data string) is read from one of a plurality of lighting pattern tables using the data string of lighting pattern selection information (work area data) as an offset, and the read values are sequentially processed in the previous process. By performing a logical sum operation with the segment data created so far, segment data to be output to the main control display device 53 is generated (see S127 in FIG. 23).

  Here, the above “extracted 1 unit data string” means that the above-described offset value (the contents of the lighting pattern selection information) is the “XX segment table address in the digit N segment table in FIG. 19B. When the base address is “−1”, the value is stored in the RWM address obtained by adding the offset value to the base address.

  For example, taking the digit 1 segment table as an example, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, when a right-handed game is recommended (ordinary symbol variation time shortening gaming state), when the normal symbol probability variation function is activated, when two ordinary symbols hold on, In the case where symbols per symbol are displayed, big hit / small hit is not activated, and no error occurs, the above-mentioned “extracted one unit data string” is “00000011 (hold 2) obtained for each gaming state. ”000100 (ordinary symbols are being displayed)”, “00010000 (ordinary figures are changing)”, “00001000 (special figures are changing)”, “00000000 (no error)”, “00000000” (Non-special gaming state) ”,“ 00000000 (non-small hit gaming state) ”,“ 00100000 (right-handed recommended gaming state) ”When the logical sum of these “extracted 1 unit data string” is taken, data “00111111” is set in the segment output port.

  Furthermore, when the digit 3 segment table for displaying the special figure 1 is taken as an example, the lighting pattern is selected with reference to the special symbol segment table (1214H ~) shown in FIG. Is “03H”, a value of 7FH (01111111B) stored in “1216H (1213H + 03H)”, which is one address of the special symbol segment table, is “extracted one unit data”. In the case of FIG. 1 shown as an example, the logical sum is not performed because there is one table to be referred to. Further, “one unit” may be 2-byte data when the processing mode and the data amount are different from those of the present embodiment.

  Further, as segment data output to the main control display device 53, lighting pattern tables (such as various segment tables) referred to in order to extract the above-described 1 unit data string used in the above-described OR operation (see S127) are as follows. The combination is determined in advance based on the information stored in the digit counter which is the group designation data storage area (information on the selected digit).

  That is, the above-mentioned “refer to a plurality of lighting pattern tables in one game progress interruption process” more specifically, for example, in the game progress interruption process in which the digit 1 is selected, the digit 1 Normal symbol storage segment table, normal symbol segment table, gaming state segment table 1, gaming state segment table 2, error state segment table 1, special electric power determined for each number of inspections “1” to “8” in the segment table This refers to referring to the eight segment tables of the operation frequency segment table 1, the small hit segment table 1, and the hitting segment table.

  When the digit 2 segment table is used, it corresponds to referencing the two segment tables of the special figure 1 storage segment table and the special figure 2 storage segment table. Furthermore, when the digit 5 segment table is used, the four segment tables of the error state segment table 2, the error state segment table 3, the special operation number of times segment table 2, and the small hit segment table 2 can be referred to. Applicable.

  Then, the above-mentioned “lighting pattern table (various segment tables, etc.) is determined in advance based on the information stored in the digit counter that is the group designation data storage area (information on the selected digit)” Indicates that a combination of a plurality of lighting pattern tables is determined in the digit 1 segment table, the digit 2 segment table, and the digit 5 segment table.

  Therefore, according to the invention according to the present embodiment, predetermined information display for each of a plurality of light emitting element groups (digits) can be performed more efficiently.

  Further, according to the invention according to the present embodiment, in the game progress interruption process in which the timer storage area (display switching timer) is updated and the number of updates becomes a predetermined value (for example, 25), the work that becomes the lighting pattern selection information storage area Update area information. Then, regarding the update of the information in the lighting pattern selection information storage area, a plurality of different values (for example, 25 and 10) as the predetermined values are set as initial values in the timer storage area, and the display time is set to the gaming state (main game In the embodiment, it is possible to switch according to whether or not the normal symbol variation time reduction function is activated.

  In this way, for example, information display using a predetermined segment can be performed over different times depending on the gaming state, and predetermined information display ( It is possible to efficiently perform normal symbol variation display). For example, a game function is adopted in which a shortening function is activated when a predetermined condition is satisfied for a variation time of a normal symbol, and a state in which the variation time of the normal symbol is continued for a predetermined period is adopted. The predetermined information display (in this case, the normal symbol variation display) can be changed according to the gaming state and performed efficiently while ensuring the diversity.

  Further, according to the invention according to the present embodiment, the plurality of initial values described above relate to the first initial value (for example, 25) related to switching of the variable display related to the special symbol and the switching of the variable display related to the normal symbol. The second initial value (for example, 10) is included, and the number of times the timer storage area is updated in the interrupt processing required until the second initial value becomes a predetermined value is smaller than the first initial value. This also makes it possible to efficiently perform predetermined information display (in this case, normal symbol variation display) while ensuring diversity of games.

  Further, according to the invention of the present embodiment, the lighting pattern table (digit) referred to when the value of the digit counter serving as the group designation data storage area is a predetermined first value (for example, a value indicating digit 1). Various segment tables calculated from the 1 segment table) and a lighting pattern table (calculated from the digit 5 segment table) to be referred to when the second value is different from the first value (for example, a value indicating the digit 5). The various segment tables are provided with segment tables that use common lighting pattern selection information (for example, error status display number 1, special operation number display number, small hit display number) as an offset value for generating segment data. Common data (for example, ACH, AEH, AFH) is included.

  Therefore, by using a plurality of timings in one cycle and using common data in a common segment table to design segment data, it is possible to display information that is common multiple times in one cycle. Can do. In addition, by assigning digit light emitting elements so that the LEDs that perform segment output are shared, it is possible to perform highlighting that brightens the corresponding information display, further improving the visibility of the corresponding information display can do. The common data (for example, ACH, AEH, AFH) described above is output as segment data relating to different light emitting elements (segments) in different execution periods of the game interrupt process in this embodiment.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the special electric operation number display number AEH, the small hit display number AFH, and the error state display number 1 ACH (“01H” for 30 seconds from the time of RWM clear) are obtained from the above-mentioned common segment. If it is output, different game states (normal time and RWM initialization) are used properly. In the normal state, the special electric operation number display number and the small hit display number are displayed at the digits 1 and 5, but at the initialization of the RWM, the special electric operation number display number and the small number are displayed at the digits 1 and 5. The segment common to the display of the hit display number is overwritten so as to be always turned on by the segment data created from the error state display number 1 and the error state segment tables 1 and 2. By continuing this lighting state for a predetermined time (3 seconds or 30 seconds in this embodiment), information display relating to RWM initialization is performed. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently display information related to different gaming states using common data.

  Furthermore, according to the invention according to the present embodiment, when the RWM is cleared (in the case of S5: YES, S6: NO, or S8: NO in FIG. 11), the first state indicator 231 and the second state indicator 232 are displayed. Are controlled so as to turn on all the segments and the main control error indicator lamps 233 (all lights up). For this reason, it can prevent that the segment which is not used by game property arises, and clarification of a component structure is attained.

  Further, according to the present invention, when the RWM is cleared, as described above, the first status indicator lamp 231, the second status indicator lamp 232, and the main control error indicator lamp 233 are all controlled and The total lighting time of the first status indicator lamp 231 and the second status indicator lamp 232 is set to 3 seconds, and the total lighting time of the main control error indicator lamp 233 is set to 30 seconds. For this reason, it is possible to achieve both the prevention of an unused segment as described above and the quick start of the round display after the return from power interruption. In addition to making sure that the total lighting time of the main control error indicator lamp 233 does not cause an unused segment, both confirmation of RWM clear notification information and clarification of external output are compatible. It can be made to. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the confirmation of the information related to the RWM clear notification facilitates the confirmation of the RWM clear notification in the relationship with the effect display device 60 and the hall computer as described above. Yes. When the hold is “0”, the variation pattern of the special figure to be executed is set to continue for 3 seconds or more regardless of whether the result of the success / failure lottery is out of place or winning. There is no possibility that the round display when the big hit or the small hit occurs immediately after clearing the RWM is interrupted even for a short time.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications can be made. For example, as described above, when an effect display device 60 using a plurality of liquid crystal displays or the like is employed, the effect design 190 is displayed on a predetermined display, and the other displays are It is possible to display a 1-hold number display unit 196, a second hold-number display unit 197, and the like. Moreover, it is also possible to move a display object (a character, an effect design, a hold number display part, etc.) between the screens of a some display.

  In addition, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit, the jackpot symbol, presence / absence of probability change, absence / shortening of time, presence / absence of extended extension of the ordinary electric accessory, various start demonstration start times, various end demonstration times, special electric accessory It is possible to determine the operation pattern and the like, and to refer to the results, not separately, but separately at various timings as needed during various control processes that require such information.

  In addition, after the start of a special game, for example, when a game ball has passed a specific area, whether there is a certain change, whether there is a short time, whether there is an open extension of a normal electric accessory, an operation pattern of a special electric accessory, etc. For pachinko machines of the type that decides at least one of them (also called “ball accuracy specs”), for example, the time required for the big hit end demo depends on the gaming state, whether it is probabilistic or non-probable (normal) When it is determined that the jackpot is ended, it is possible to execute the jackpot end demo at a time corresponding to the determined gaming state at the start of the jackpot end demo.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is other than the big hit, the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is waiting for the change, and the number of operation suspension balls of the special symbol to be changed is 0. The second game using the second start winning opening 63 is prioritized over the first game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that prioritizes the first game or a configuration that does not prioritize any game but digests the stored memory in the order in which the start winnings are generated and stored. Etc. can also be adopted. Among these, in the latter type in which the symbols are changed in order of winning, it is confirmed that, for example, the success / failure determination order matches the digestion order (winning order) in addition to the above-described change start conditions. It can be set as one of the fluctuation start conditions that it has been confirmed that it has done.

  Furthermore, in the type in which the symbol variation of the first game and the second game is performed in the winning order as described above, when one game is won, it is possible not to determine whether or not the other game is successful. Is possible. Here, as a mode in which the determination of whether or not the other game is successful is not performed, a mode in which the success determination of the subsequent game is not performed until the big hit game of the previous game is completed, or the start winning of the subsequent game is, for example, For example, an invalid mode may be considered. That is, as in these various aspects, it is possible to appropriately set the condition for starting the variation of the symbols in accordance with the circumstances such as the contents of the game when a plurality of starting holes are used.

  In addition, it is possible to set an appropriate aspect for the order of storing the game state after the operation of the condition device is completed. For example, it is possible to set in order of the time of the opening pattern of the special electric accessory, the selection state of the fluctuation pattern (including the limited frequency pattern), the start demonstration and the end demonstration, such as the probability variation of the special symbol, the opening extension function, etc. .

  In this embodiment, as described above, a standby demonstration display request is made on the main board 102, and a customer waiting demonstration command is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. As a mode, the timer is set at a predetermined timing such as when the big hit ends (when the end demo ends) or when the special symbol fluctuation stops, and the timer value is subtracted while waiting for the special symbol fluctuation. It is conceivable that a standby demo command is transmitted when becomes 0. Furthermore, a standby demo command may be transmitted to the sub-main board 301 only when there is no special symbol hold storage. As described above, with regard to the command transmission of the standby demonstration, it is possible to use the jackpot end or the symbol fluctuation stop as a reference for timing, or change the presence / absence of command transmission depending on the number of reserved balls. In addition, the customer wait demo command is not transmitted / received from the main board 102, for example, the timer measurement is performed after the variable stop command is received by the sub main board 301, and the control for displaying the customer wait demo is performed after a predetermined time elapses. May be.

  In this embodiment, a value obtained by adding a soft random number to a built-in random number is used as a go / no-go random number used in jackpot determination. However, the use condition of the go / no-go random number composed of the built-in random number and the soft random number depends on the game situation. It is also possible to determine. For example, if it is determined that there is a start opening prize and the number of balls held at that time has not reached the maximum value, a pass / fail random number composed of a built-in random number and a soft random number is used for the go / no-go determination, and the hold at that time When the number of balls has reached the maximum value, for example, it is conceivable to use only a soft random number (or only a built-in random number) as the success / failure random number. In the present embodiment, the storage of the various random numbers obtained is performed for the random number, the design random number, and the variation pattern random number. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, depending on the presence or absence of the prefetch effect function. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the fluctuation pattern random number is not stored according to necessity.

  Further, if the control process related to the start winning in the first game and the second game is given as an example, the basic configuration of the control process can be the same although there is a difference in the control contents based on being different games. . For this reason, in this embodiment, on the control program, the used storage area of the RWM 503 is offset to make it different, and other program contents are shared in many parts, so that the first game and the second game are shared. Control is in progress. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the program. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control modules may be created separately as completely different processing. In this case, the speed of the control process can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the priority order of the symbol variation of the first game and the second game is determined, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is used for monitoring the operating state of the special symbol. Is checking whether or not is waiting for change. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine of the type that can simultaneously change the special symbols of the first game and the second game in parallel, the first game and the second game. It is not necessary to confirm whether or not the game is waiting for a change in symbols of two games. In this case, it is desirable to create the control processing modules separately so that the special symbols of the first game and the second game can be varied independently of each other.

Further, in the game area 52, components such as the first start winning opening 62, the second starting winning opening 63, the first large winning opening 91, the second large winning opening 92, the left operation opening 68a, and the right operation opening 68b are provided. The arrangement is determined according to the game characteristics adopted in the pachinko gaming machine 10. In the present embodiment, the arrangement as described above (see FIG. 1) is adopted. However, in the case where the game characteristics are different, for example, the second start winning opening 63 is provided in the game area 52. It is also possible to arrange it on the right side and above the second big prize opening 92. Further, in this case, the second start winning opening 63 is of a type provided with only one blade (one blade), or an opening / closing plate that moves horizontally in the front and rear without using the blade type. It can be of the type provided, or it can be of a lodging type (attacker type). Furthermore, it is also possible to provide only one big prize opening (second big prize opening 92 in the figure) without providing the first big prize opening 91.
<< Second Example of Displaying Normal Symbols >>

  Next, a second embodiment relating to the display of ordinary symbols will be described. In addition, the same number is attached | subjected about the part similar to the pachinko game machine 10 which concerns on 1st Example, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In the above-described embodiment, the normal symbol display unit 59 of the main control display device 53 is configured by one LED indicator (C), and the normal symbol is displayed using one segment. However, it is possible to configure the normal symbol display unit 59 with a plurality of LED indicator lights, and to perform normal symbol variation display and stop display by a combination of on / off patterns of the plurality of LED indicator lights. And by increasing the number of LED indicator lamps to be used, it is possible to give diversity to the display of ordinary symbols.

  In FIG. 25, (a) to (c) each surrounded by a rectangular frame are displayed on the main control display device 53 with two LED indicators (“LED1”, “LED2”) for displaying normal symbols. In this case, the embodiment is provided. Also, (a1), (a2) in FIG. 25 (a), (b1), (b2) in FIG. 25 (b), and (c11) to (c32) in FIG. Each display mode in the form is shown by a timing chart.

  Furthermore, in each figure (a1, a2, b1, b2, c11 to c32) in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c), the hatched belt-like figure is represented by each LED indicator light constituting the normal symbol display section. It indicates that the light is on. As described in the first embodiment, the individual LED indicators (segments) used for the respective digits 1 to 5 of the main control display device 53 are controlled every digit selection period (20 ms in this case). Since the on / off state is specified for each segment, each segment is lit for 4 ms within the hatched area (for 20 ms). The display number switching process called in the normal symbol changing process is a dedicated “normal symbol display number switching process” in which the reference value for switching is “5” (or “5” and “10” are variable). Yes. Then, the LED output process (see FIG. 13) in the game progress interruption process in which the digit including the two LED indicator lights (LED1 and LED2) constituting the normal symbol display unit 59 is selected corresponds to the LED1 and the LED2. Segment data will be input.

  Each of (a) to (c) in FIG. 25 performs change display in a time significantly shorter than the change time of the normal symbol in the first embodiment. 25 (a) to 25 (c), the display mode of (a) shown at the top is a normal symbol variation time (ordinary symbol variation time) of 64 ms, and a normal symbol stop fixed time (hereinafter “design”). The fixed time is called 20 ms. Also, (b) shown in the middle row shows that the normal symbol variation time is 44 ms and the symbol fixed time is 20 ms, and (c) shown in the lower row shows that the normal symbol variation time is 84 ms and the symbol fixed time is 20 ms. Yes.

  Among these, when the display of fluctuations (ordinary fluctuations) related to the normal symbols is started for the display modes of (a1) and (a2) in FIG. 25 (a), as shown in the figure, LED2, LED1 In this order, alternating lighting every 20 ms is regularly repeated.

  That is, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 25 (a), LED1 and LED2 are alternately turned on every 20 ms, which is the digit selection cycle, to indicate that the normal symbol display unit 59 is not in a constant state. Such a display mode is set as a display mode of the variable display related to the normal symbol. In the figure, the normal variation time and the symbol fixing time are indicated by the length of the arrow. In the variation time of 64 ms, the LED1 and LED2 are turned on three times or more in total. ing. Therefore, switching between lighting and blinking is ensured a plurality of times (here, three times) during the normal fluctuation time.

  Further, although illustration is omitted, if the result of the general drawing lottery is out of order, for example, if there is a hold related to the normal symbol, the display of the mode shown in (a1) is executed and then the next general drawing is continued. Figure variation starts. If the result of the regular drawing lottery is a win, the LED indicator lamp (LED1 in the example of FIG. 25A) that is lit at the end of the symbol fixing time (20 ms) is continuously lit. The lighting at the time of hitting is continued in accordance with the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory. For example, when the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory is 5 seconds, the lighting at the hitting time is continued for 5 seconds.

  Here, in FIG. 25A, (a1) and (a2), the drawing is described so that the start timing and the end timing of the normal diagram change time and the symbol fixed time are different. This is to show that the on / off timing for the lamp does not necessarily match the timing at which the LED indicator lamp actually starts or ends.

  That is, in the segment data input to the main control display device 53, even if the bit data corresponding to a predetermined LED indicator light changes from, for example, “1” to “0”, the LED display is caused by a slight afterglow. There will be some delay before the lamp goes off. For this reason, even if the segment data for the current variation display is output to the main control display device 53 after the previous variation display ends and the symbol fixed time elapses in terms of control, the fixed time At the same timing as the lapse of time, the brightness of the LED 1 is not necessarily in a state of 0 (a state in which it can be perceived that the LED 1 is visually turned off). Therefore, theoretical ones are adopted as the lighting state and the extinguishing state shown in the band shape in each figure in FIG. 25 so that the description is not complicated.

  Further, as described in the first embodiment, in the game progress interruption process (see FIG. 13), the control module of the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S55) for monitoring the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol is the normal symbol display device. It arrange | positions after the normal symbol control process (S54) which performs the process which concerns. For this reason, the processing content determined in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S55) during the predetermined game progress interrupt process is the normal in the game progress interrupt process (also referred to as “the game progress interrupt process”) at that time. After the symbol control process (S54), it is not reflected and is executed in the next game progress interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, the LED output process (S65) described above is arranged after the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S55). In the LED output process (S65), the processing result in the normal symbol control process (S54) is used in the LED output process (S65). For this reason, in the game progress interruption process, the normal symbol is output to the LED output. The processing result of the fluctuation start monitoring process (S55) is not reflected. The arrangement and correspondence of the control modules as described above are also a factor that affects the on / off timing of the LED indicator lamp, the timing at which the LED indicator lamp actually starts lighting, and the timing at which lighting ends. It has become. That is, since the fluctuation display is delayed by one interrupt by the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process, the fluctuation time is set to a value of n times +4 ms of one digit switching period in FIGS.

  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 25 (a), in both display modes (a1) and (a2), the two LED indicator lamps (LED1 and LED2) are turned on / off at the end of the previous symbol fixing time. The change display of this time is started by taking over the off state.

  Then, due to various circumstances as described above, as described above, the fluctuation start timing in control and the lighting start timing of the LED indicator lamp on the visual side are different. Furthermore, of the two LED indicator lamps (LED1 and LED2), the LED indicator lamp that is lit at the start of fluctuation is indeterminate and is not necessarily determined as one of them. It should be noted that even when the variable display, the start time of the symbol fixed time, and the like differ due to various circumstances as described above, it can be said that they are different display modes in a broad sense.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 25 (a), in any of the display modes of (a1) and (a2), the change time is a multiple of the digit selection period (20 ms) (here 60 ms), and the game progress interrupt It is set to a value (in this case, 64 ms) to which a processing cycle (4 ms) is added. For this reason, as shown in (a2) in FIG. 25 (a), even when the start timing of the variable display coincides with the timing of the start of lighting of the LED indicator lamp (here, LED2), the symbol is fixed. The time (20 ms) starts when the LED indicator lamp (LED indicator lamp 1 in this case) is lit as shown in (a1) and (a2) in FIG.

  It should be noted that the various circumstances as described above also apply to the control related to other display units in the main control display device 53. Further, not only the present embodiment but also the first embodiment has the same situation. Further, the variation time of the invention according to the first embodiment can be added with the period of the game progress interruption processing as in this embodiment.

  Although illustration is omitted, depending on the aspect of the ordinary symbol that has been selected, both the LED 1 and the LED 2 may be turned on or turned off at the end of the previous operation of the ordinary electric utility. In such a case, it is possible to temporarily turn off only one LED indicator lamp for a predetermined time (for example, 20 ms).

  Here, in order to represent the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the blinking of the LED indicator lamp, it is considered necessary to be sure that the blinking can be surely recognized in order to clarify the fluctuation display. In addition, it is considered that it is necessary to visually recognize blinking within a predetermined variation time in order to display the variation of the normal symbol. Furthermore, at the time of winning, it is considered that the total display time including the display time of the winning symbol needs to be a sufficiently long time (for example, 500 ms or more). Further, at the time of disconnection, it is considered necessary that the symbol fixing time is a sufficiently long time (for example, 500 ms or more).

  As described above, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 25 (a), the variable display time is a numerical value (such as 60 ms) that is a multiple of the digit selection period (20 ms), and the game progress interrupt processing period ( 4ms), even if there are various circumstances that make the fluctuation start time uncertain as described above, a fluctuation time that is surely a multiple of the digit selection cycle is ensured. it can.

  Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 25A, the basic display mode is that the LEDs 1 and 2 are turned on and off, and are turned on alternately. Furthermore, since the variation time is 64 ms, the variation display can be completed in a period shorter than the variation display time of the first embodiment. And by shortening the change display switching time of the normal symbol, it becomes possible to display the change related to the normal symbol in a short time.

  In particular, the speeding up of fluctuations related to the normal symbol can be achieved by extending the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory (for example, about 5 seconds) or reducing the number of prize balls for winning the second start winning opening 63 (for example, one). )), Both the theoretical value and the actual measurement value can appropriately increase the number of big hits and the big hit frequency without excessively increasing the total number of winning balls per predetermined time. Then, by adopting such game characteristics, it is possible to improve the taste of the pachinko gaming machine 10.

  In addition, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as described above, the number of times of lighting and display switching is reduced, and it may be difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation. However, as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 25 (a), the display switching during the variable display time is performed in a shortened period. Therefore, by securing the display switching a plurality of times (here, three times), It becomes easy for a person who looks at the normal symbol display unit 59 to recognize a change in luminance between the two LED indicators. As a result, it is possible to ensure visibility regarding the fluctuation display of the LED indicator lamp.

  In (a1) and (a2) in FIG. 25 (a), the operation mode of the LED 2 during the symbol fixed time is different, indicating whether or not the display switching timer is changed during the symbol fixed time. Because. That is, when the display switching timer is changed during the symbol fixed time, the symbol display is updated during the symbol fixed time as shown in (a1) in FIG. May switch. However, when the display switching timer is not changed during the symbol fixing time, the operation mode of the LEDs 1 and 2 is maintained without being switched during the symbol fixing time, as indicated by (a2) in FIG. It will be.

  Next, the embodiment shown in FIG. 25B will be described. Note that a description of the same parts as those in the embodiment shown in FIG. In the normal symbol display mode shown in FIG. 25 (b), as described above, the normal symbol variation time is set to 40 ms, which is twice the digit selection cycle (20 ms), and the game progress interrupt processing cycle (4 ms) is set. 44 ms added. Furthermore, the fixed time after the variable display is set to 20 ms which is the same as the digit selection period (20 ms).

  Also, (b1) and (b2) are shown in FIG. 25 (b), as in the case of FIG. 25 (a), depending on whether or not the display switching timer is changed during the symbol fixed time. This is to show that the symbol display can be updated during the symbol fixing time as shown in (b1).

  When the variation display (ordinary variation) related to the normal symbol is started, as shown in (b1) and (b2) in FIG. 25 (b), the LEDs 1 and 2 are alternately turned on in the order of 20 ms. Repeat. In the display mode shown in FIG. 25 (b), for both (b1) and (b2), the LED1 and LED2 are lit twice or more in total in a variation time of 44 ms. It has become.

  In the display mode shown in (b1) of FIG. 25 (b), the normal symbol variation time starts at the same timing as the start of lighting of LED1. Then, at the end of the normal symbol variation time, the re-lit LED 1 continues to be lit, and the lit LED indicator lamp is switched to the LED 2 during the symbol fixing time. Furthermore, in the display mode shown in (b2) in FIG. 25 (b), the normal symbol variation time is started while the LED 2 is lit. Then, at the same timing as the end of the normal symbol variation time, the re-illuminated LED 2 has been turned on for 20 ms, but the subsequent lighting related to the LED 2 continues for 20 ms even during the symbol fixing time.

  According to such an embodiment, in addition to the same effects as the embodiment of FIG. 25 (a), the suspension of the normal symbol can be digested in a shorter time by further shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. It becomes possible.

  Next, the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 25C will be described. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted suitably about the part similar to embodiment shown to Fig.25 (a), (b) mentioned above. In the embodiment of FIG. 25 (c), the six display modes (c11), (c12), (c21), (c22), (c31), and (c32) are all normal symbols as described above. Is changed to 80 ms, which is four times the digit selection cycle (20 ms), and the game progress interrupt processing cycle (4 ms) is added to 84 ms. Furthermore, the fixed time after the variable display is set to 20 ms which is the same as the digit selection period (20 ms).

  Also, (c11) and (c12) in FIG. 25 (c) show display modes in which the lighting times of the LEDs 1 and 2 are different from each other. And (c11) in FIG. 25 (c) shows a display mode in which one LED lighting time is 20 ms, and (c12) in FIG. 25 (c) is one LED lighting time of 40 ms. The display mode is shown. Furthermore, (c11) in FIG. 25 (c) shows an example of the display mode when the display switching timer is changed during the symbol fixed time, and (c12) in FIG. The display mode in which the display switching timer is not changed during the symbol fixed time is shown.

  Moreover, in the display mode according to (c12) in FIG. 25 (c), by setting the switching reference value to “10” in the normal symbol variation switching process, LED1 and LED2 can turn on 20 ms twice. Continued. Then, the LED1 and the LED2 are alternately turned on every 40 ms, and the LED1 and the LED2 are turned on twice or more in total in a variation time of 84 ms. Thus, by lengthening the lighting time and the turning-off time of the LED, it is possible to prevent the blinking display from becoming difficult to visually recognize due to the influence of afterglow. The display mode of (c12) is the processing when the normal symbol variation time shortening function is not operated, and (c11) is the processing when the normal symbol variation time shortening function is activated, and the reference value You may control to switch.

  Subsequently, (c21) and (c22) in FIG. 25 (c) and (c31) and (c32) in FIG. 25 (c) have different variation start times in the variation display control of (c11) and (c12). An example is shown.

  Moreover, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, the display mode during the variable display or the fixed display may be determined according to the mode of the win symbol. In this case, for example, a fluctuation pattern is set so that the symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and the value of the normal symbol timer used in the normal symbol display switching process and the normal symbol display number are set at the start of the fluctuation. For example, it is possible to reset the display to an arbitrary initial value and, in the case of winning, select the variation pattern and display the variation.

  Further, by changing the reference value of the normal symbol display switching process for variable display, either LED1 or LED2 is regularly turned on and off alternately every 20 ms or every 40 ms. It is also possible to adopt a relatively irregular display mode such that the other LED is turned on for 20 ms, turned off for 20 ms, turned on for 40 ms, and turned off for 40 ms.

  Moreover, when performing the fluctuation | variation display and stop display of a normal symbol using a some LED indicator light, it is possible to use the same symbol for a fluctuation | variation display and a stop display. That is, it is possible to perform a variable display by blinking each LED indicator lamp in a pattern form in which the display is stopped thereafter. This also applies to special symbols.

Furthermore, for example, it is also possible to perform control so that the normal symbol display switching process is not executed during a period in which the normal electric accessory is in a long open state (during normal time and specific game). Further, even if the lit segments have the same display pattern, the display mode in which highlighting is brightly displayed as described above and the display mode in which highlighting is not performed are distinguished as different display patterns to increase the display mode. It is also possible.
<Second Embodiment of the Invention Related to Control Processing of Main Board at Power Off>

  Next, a second embodiment of the invention related to the control process of the main board when the power is turned off will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, the same number is attached | subjected about the part similar to the above-mentioned 1st Example, The description is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a power interruption signal is input to a non-maskable interrupt terminal (not shown) of the CPU 501 mounted on the main board 102, the CPU 501 finishes a predetermined control process and finally supplies a supply voltage. The control process is looped until the voltage falls below the operable voltage, and these points are common to the above-described embodiment. However, in this embodiment, characteristic control processing is included from when the power interruption signal is input to the non-maskable interrupt terminal of the CPU 501 to the loop processing.

  That is, the main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment is the control start processing (including power-off processing) shown in FIG. 11 (using the diagram according to the first embodiment described above) and FIG. Similar to FIG. 11, the game progress interruption processing and the power-off confirmation information setting processing shown in FIG. 13 that are diverted, and these are executed in the main board 102.

  In the control start process shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 26, after executing the settings (S1 to S4) required when the power is turned on, the operation state of the initialization switch 544 (S5), the power interruption status confirmation process (S6 to S8) Corresponding to the value of the power-off information flag and the addition result (checksum data) of the RWM area, processing at the time of power-off recovery (S9 to S17), processing at initialization of the RWM (S24 to S26), game Processing for time keeping setting for progress interruption (S27), circulation processing (S33 (S28 to S32)), processing for setting power-off confirmation information (S301 to S307), and the like are executed.

Among these, the processes from S1 to S29 are almost the same as those in the first embodiment described above, but the process at the time of power-off recovery (S9 to S17) functions as a restart preparation process. This is different from the above-described embodiment in that the process proceeds to the time setting processing (S27) for game progress interruption. Further, after the process of setting a predetermined value as the first recursive information in the interrupt processing time monitoring means clear register (S29), it is determined whether or not the power-off confirmation information is set by the power-off confirmation information determination process. (S30), if set (S30: Yes), also differs from the above-described embodiment also in that it shifts to power-off processing (S301 to S307) described later. Note that S31 (initial value random number update processing) and S32 (interrupt permission processing) in FIG. 26 respectively correspond to S30 and S31 in FIG. 12 according to the above-described embodiment.
<<< Circulation >>>

  Subsequently, the circulation process (S33 (S28 to S32)) which is one of the main differences from the first embodiment will be described. In the circulation process (S33 (S28 to S32)), in order to manage gaming machines, interrupts are first prohibited (S28). Further, in preparation for recurring the interrupt processing time monitoring means, a predetermined value as the first recursion information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means clear register (S29). The first recursive information is a predetermined value such as 55H. Further, it is determined whether or not the power-off confirmation information is set (S30). If it is set (S30: Yes), the process proceeds to power-off processing (S301 to S307) described later.

  If it is determined that the power-off confirmation information is set (S30), if it is not set (S30: No), an initial value random number update process is executed (S31). The initial value random number per symbol, the initial symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Thereafter, after permitting the interrupt (S32), the process returns to the interrupt prohibition (S28) process again, and the subsequent processes (S28 to S32) are sequentially repeated to circulate the control process.

Each time the interrupt permission (S28) is executed, the above-described game progress interrupt becomes possible, and the game progress interrupt process is repeated every predetermined period (here, 4ms period) based on the period information set in S27. .
<< Power-off process >>

  If it is determined in the determination (S30) whether the power-off confirmation information is set (S30: Yes), the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursion unit and sets the 22nd recursion information. (S301), the monitoring time of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the time is recurred. When the power supply is resumed by setting the second recursive information forcibly (S301), the control process is started with the monitoring time recursed. In other words, by forcibly recurring the monitoring timing when the power is cut off, the control processing can be prevented from proceeding without recurring monitoring timing in the control processing immediately after the power supply is resumed. It has become.

  Subsequently, the address of the power-on information flag (power-off information flag) is set, the value of the power-off information flag is read, and it is determined whether the information at the time of power-on is stored normally (S302). If the information at the time of power-on is normally stored (S302: Yes), power-off normal data (55H in this case) is set (S304), and the RWM checksum at the time of power-off is set. Calculated (S305), checksum data is created. Then, access prohibition is set (S306), and the power-off loop processing (S307) waits for the supply voltage to become a predetermined value or less and power-off.

In the determination of whether or not the information at the time of power-on is normally stored (S302), if the determination result is not normally stored (S302: No), the power failure error data is set. After (S303), the process proceeds to the aforementioned access prohibition process (S306).
<< Power-off confirmation information setting process >>

  Next, the control process when setting the power-off confirmation information determined in S30 described above will be described. First, after the power is turned on, a control start process (see FIG. 11 and FIG. 26) is started through a predetermined process, and a time setting process for a game progress interruption executed during the control start process (FIG. 26). The loop process (S33) is started through the process (shown in S27). This loop process corresponds to the circulation process (S32) in FIG.

  When the start timing of the game progress interrupt process comes after the start of the loop process, the game progress interrupt process shown in FIG. 13 is executed. Thereafter, when a power supply voltage drop occurs during the game progress interrupt process, the control process jumps to a predetermined address (address 0066H here) in accordance with the non-maskable interrupt process (NMI process). Then, the power-off confirmation information indicating that the NMI processing has occurred is set, and the power-off confirmation information setting process for setting the power-off confirmation information is returned to the return, and when power interruption occurs during the game progress interruption processing Return to the process. Then, all the remaining processes to be executed in the game progress interruption process in the cycle are completed, the process returns to the return, and the process returns to the control start process (here, the loop process (S33) in FIG. 26).

  If a power supply voltage drop occurs during the loop process, the control process shifts to a predetermined address (0066H) in the same way as described above with the NMI process. Then, the power-off confirmation information is set, the process returns to the return, and the process returns to the control start process (here, the loop process (S33)).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the power-off confirmation information is set as described above (S30 in FIG. 26). Here, if the power-off confirmation information is not set, the process proceeds to a loop process start process and the circulation process (S33 in FIG. 26) is continued. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation information is set, the power-off process (corresponding to S301 to S307 described above) is executed, and the power is turned off after the power-off process is completed.

  In this embodiment, when a non-maskable interrupt occurs, the instruction being executed is completed in units of instructions. For example, if a non-maskable interrupt occurs during the execution of the control process indicated by reference numeral 552 in FIG. 27 (here, the LD (load) instruction), the control process 552 is continued during the execution of the instruction, and the execution of the LD instruction is executed. After the above is completed, the power-off confirmation information is set. That is, the setting time of the power-off confirmation information is determined by the control processing in units of instructions, and the power-off confirmation information is set after completing such an instruction.

  Here, the control processing including the above-described command includes control processing for each program module (in this embodiment, for example, control start processing (see FIGS. 11 and 26), game progress interruption processing (see FIG. 13), It is not limited to value random number update processing (S31, S48), input processing (S45), and other processing), and includes control processing such as setting and calculation of various data (S1 to S10, S41 to S44, etc.). It is a concept. That is, taking the game progress interrupt process as an example, for example, when a non-maskable interrupt occurs during execution of a specific instruction constituting the control process of the second recursive information set (S43), execution of this specific instruction Power off confirmation information is set after ending. Then, the process for setting the power-off confirmation information for setting the power-off confirmation information is returned to the return, and the process returns to the process when the power interruption occurs during the game progress interruption process. Then, all the remaining processes to be executed in the game progress interruption process in the cycle are completed, the process returns to the return, the process returns to the control start process (loop process corresponding to S33 in FIG. 26), and the power-off process (described above) (Corresponding to S301 to S307) is executed.

  For example, when a non-maskable interrupt occurs during execution of a specific instruction in various random number update processes (S46), the power-off confirmation information is set after the execution of the specific instruction is completed. Then, the process for setting power-off confirmation information is returned to the return, the process returns to the process at the occurrence of power interruption during the game progress interrupt process, and all the remaining processes to be executed in the game progress interrupt process in the cycle are completed and controlled. Returning to the start process, the power-off process is executed in the same manner as described above.

  Such a control mode is the same when a non-maskable interrupt occurs in various situations during the game. For example, when a non-maskable interrupt occurs during the execution of a specific instruction from the start of a prize monitoring process (S51) described later to the end of the prize ball control process (S52), the execution of the specific instruction is finished. After that, the power-off confirmation information is set. Then, the process returns to the winning monitoring process (S51) or the winning ball control process (S52), and all the remaining processes to be executed in the game progress interruption process in the cycle are completed and the process returns to the return, and the control start process (FIG. 26). Returning to the loop processing corresponding to S33 in the middle), the power-off processing (corresponding to S301 to S307 described above) is executed.

  Further, other control processes in the game progress interruption process will be described. Special symbol control start process (S57) defining a control process related to special symbol fluctuation, special symbol fluctuation start monitoring including a process of performing a big hit lottery determination Even when a non-maskable interrupt occurs during execution of a specific command in the control processing (S60), the abnormality detection processing (S61) defining the control processing related to error detection and error notification, or other control processing, the command at that time After the execution of is completed, the power-off confirmation information is set, and the power-off process is executed after all the remaining processes to be executed in the game progress interruption process of the cycle are completed.

  In the present embodiment, the power-off required time, which is the time from when the power supply voltage decreases to a predetermined value until the power is turned off, is set by the power-off required time setting means. As the power-off required time setting means, for example, a device that controls discharge, such as a capacitor provided on the power supply board 251, can be used. As shown by the symbol M in FIG. 28, the power-off required time is a power-off signal output voltage that is a value at which the power-supply board 251 outputs a power-off signal when the power-supply voltage starts to gradually decrease from a normal value (for example, 30 V) This is the time required to reach 5V, which is the supply voltage input to the CPU 501 of the main board 102, after reaching (for example, 18V). In this embodiment, the power-off required time X is a time A required to complete the control start process, a time B required to complete the game progress interrupt process, a time C required to set the power-off confirmation information, and It is set so that the relationship of A + B + C + D <X is satisfied, which is larger than the total time D required to complete the power-off process.

Further, the power-off required time is set to end before the timing at which the sub-board 104 that receives various control commands depending on the main board 102 starts the power-off process. That is, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned off, not only the main board 102 but also the sub board 104 as the sub-control means executes the power-off process in preparation for power-off according to the contents of the control process. However, the start timing of the power-off process executed in the sub-board 104 is after the power-off required time has elapsed in the main board 102 and the power-off process is completed. In addition, not only the sub-board 104 but also the payout control board 103, for example, the power-off process may be started after the power-off required time has elapsed in the main board 102. Further, such a relationship between the power-off required time of the main board 102 and the start timing of the power-off process of the sub-control unit may be applied only to the payout control board 103. Further, in the case where sub-control means having a control function is provided in addition to the sub-board 104 and the payout control board 103, it is also possible to apply to the sub-control means.
<Effects of the invention according to the second embodiment of the control process of the main board at the time of power-off>

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power is cut off, the above-mentioned power-off confirmation information is set and stored, and thereafter, the control processing is continued until the game progress interruption processing of the current cycle is completed. After the progress interruption process is completed, the power-off process (S301 to S307) is executed to turn off the power. Therefore, when the power is cut off, it is possible to turn off the power after completing the game progress interrupt processing of the cycle, forcibly interrupting transmission / reception of commands set during the game progress interrupt processing, etc. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem caused by interrupting the game progress interruption process.

  More specifically, for example, taking the above-mentioned payout control input signal from the main board to the payout control board as an example, the winning ball control process (S52) ends from the start of the winning monitoring process (S51 in FIG. 13). In the meantime, even if a voltage drop that causes a power interruption occurs during the control process for transmitting the main control MODE command, the power-off confirmation information is set after the control process for each instruction is completed. (S111), and then the process returns to the game progress interrupt process, and the command transmission process is continued. Then, after the control processing for both the main control EVENT command and the main control MODE command is finished, and all necessary control processing during the game progress interrupt processing in the cycle is finished, the power-off processing is executed (S301 to S301). S307). Therefore, in the game progress interrupt processing unit, it is possible to facilitate the resumption of the control processing when the power is restored, without terminating the control processing in a halfway state and turning off the power. Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the power from being cut off during the game progress interrupt process, there is no need to save the used register and save the interrupt enabled / disabled state during the game progress interrupt process. .

  Also, for example, a special symbol control process (S57 in FIG. 13) that defines a control process related to the variation of the special symbol, a special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S60) including a process for performing a big hit lottery determination, error detection and Also in the abnormality detection process (S61) that defines the control process related to error notification, or other control processes, the control process of command transmission, etc. is completed after the power-off confirmation information is set. The power-off process is executed after the game progress interrupt process of the period, which is a typical control process, is completed. Therefore, in the next game progress interruption process, for example, the control process such as re-transmission of the latter half (lower part) of the command that should have been transmitted can be omitted, and the information communication can be stabilized and the burden of the control process can be reduced. Can be realized.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the power supply voltage decreases and reaches a predetermined value, there is provided a power-off required time setting means for setting a time until the power is turned off thereafter. The power-off required time X by the time setting means is a time A required to complete the control start process, a time B required to complete the game progress interrupt process, a time C required to set the power-off confirmation information, and It is set to be larger than the total time D required to complete the power-off process. Therefore, it is possible to terminate the control process when the power is cut off without being interrupted, and this also makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a malfunction when the power is turned off.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the start timing of the power-off processing of the sub-control means (sub-board 104, payout control board 103, etc.) is the control start processing, game progress interruption processing, power-off confirmation information of the main control means. The time required for the setting and the power-off process is taken into consideration.As a result, it is possible to strengthen the cooperation related to the power-off process between the main control means and the sub-control means, and from the main control means to the sub-control means. It becomes possible to complete the transmission of the control command.

Further, by contriving such a control process when the power is turned off, it is possible to restrict the control state when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off and the power is restored to a certain degree.
<Third embodiment of the invention relating to the control processing of the main board at the time of power-off>

  Next, a description will be given of a third embodiment relating to the control process of the main board when the power is turned off. In addition, the same number is attached | subjected about the part similar to each above-mentioned Example, The description is abbreviate | omitted. In the second embodiment related to the control process at the time of power interruption described above, the power interruption confirmation information is set when the power supply voltage decreases and a power interruption signal is input to the NMI terminal (not shown) of the CPU 501. However, in the third embodiment, even if a power interruption signal is input, the power interruption confirmation information is not set unless the input state of the power interruption signal satisfies a predetermined condition. Examples of the predetermined condition include the number of times the power interruption signal is input and the input period.

  For example, the power interruption signal is divided into a first power interruption signal and a second power interruption signal, and the first power interruption signal is the same as the power interruption signal of the second embodiment. Then, the first power interruption signal is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501. On the other hand, the second power interruption signal is output to the CPU 501 along with the output of the first power interruption signal. When the first power interruption signal is input to the CPU 501, the second power interruption signal is output to the CPU 501. To other input terminals. When the first power interruption signal is input to the NMI terminal, the CPU 501 completes the instruction being executed at that time in the same manner as in the second embodiment, and then executes a predetermined address (here, 0066H) defined on the control program. Control processing is jumped to (address). Further, the CPU 501 monitors the number of times of input of the second power interruption signal, and executes setting of power-off confirmation information if the number of times of input has reached, for example, five.

  Even when the second power interruption signal is not input five times or more, the CPU 501 shifts the control processing to the predetermined address (0066H) as the first power interruption signal is input to the NMI terminal. . However, although a transition to a predetermined address is performed, no other control processing for preparing for power-off is performed, and power-off confirmation information is not set. After the transition to the predetermined address (0066H), the process returns to the control process before the transition, for example, during the game progress interrupt process. That is, even if the input mode of the second power interruption signal does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the control process temporarily shifts to a predetermined address (0066H), but without performing any control process for setting the power interruption confirmation information or the like. Return to the control process before the transition.

  The number of times the second power interruption signal is input is added each time the game progress interruption process is repeated. That is, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the second power interruption signal is repeatedly input over five game progress interrupt processes.

  According to the third embodiment, when the power supply voltage is not lowered, even if there is a signal input to the NMI terminal due to the influence of noise or the like, the power-off confirmation information is only caused by the signal input. It can be prevented from being set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the power interruption process from being erroneously performed in a situation where it is not necessary to turn off the power and should not be turned off. Further, as in the present embodiment, after the control process is transferred to a predetermined address, the process immediately exits without setting the power-off confirmation information, so that the first power-off signal is accompanied by the input. It is possible to set power-off confirmation information more reliably while using the non-maskable interrupt function.

  That is, a CPU used for various control boards of a gaming machine generally has an NMI function that is a hardware interrupt, and the CPU has an input terminal and an electronic circuit part (logic logic) for the NMI function. Circuit). However, when control processing that ignores the signal input to the NMI terminal is performed, a design change for deleting the function of the NMI is necessary in the program and circuit design. In addition, when an NMI terminal or an electronic circuit part for the NMI is left and these are not used and, for example, grounding is taken, an unused (or unused) terminal or function is used. May remain and be used for fraud. On the other hand, the configuration for the NMI function is adopted by adopting a configuration in which the control process is shifted to a predetermined address (0066H) when the first power interruption signal is input to the NMI terminal as in the present embodiment. It is possible to take measures against noise and the like while minimizing the design change of the main board 102 while using without deleting.

In the present embodiment, five inputs are defined as the predetermined condition to be satisfied by the input mode of the second power interruption signal, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times other than five is determined. May be set. Moreover, it is not restricted to predetermined number of times, For example, it is good also as conditions on the input over a predetermined period. Further, in order to generate the second power interruption signal, the signal path of the first power interruption signal is branched and directly input to the CPU 501, or the branch signal of the first power interruption signal is input to the switching circuit. And so on. In addition, it is desirable that the first power interruption signal and the second power interruption signal are input in synchronization with the CPU 501, but the second power interruption signal is delayed within a range in which the operational effects of the present embodiment can be obtained. You may employ | adopt the structure to do. Further, the number of times of input of the second power interruption signal is added every time the game progress interrupt process is repeated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of times during one game progress interrupt process. You may count the frequency | count which becomes a predetermined condition based on the matter which can be counted.
<Application to enclosed game machines>

  The present invention also provides a pachinko gaming machine in which a game ball as a game medium acquired by a player is directly paid out to the player as described above so that the player can touch the prize ball. However, the present invention can be applied to, for example, a sealed circulation pachinko game machine. Examples of the enclosed circulation pachinko game machine include the following. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and demonstrated about the part similar to the pachinko game machine 10 of the above-mentioned Example.

  In other words, the enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine has a game ball as a game medium enclosed therein, and the player operates the launch handle 20 to drive the launch motor of the launch device, and the enclosed ball 1 It is configured so that a game can be played by driving into the game area 52 on the front of the game board 50 one by one. As the configuration of the gaming area 52, a configuration similar to a pachinko gaming machine of a type in which a game ball is handed over to a player like the pachinko gaming machine 10 described above can be adopted. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to hand over the game balls to the player, there is no need for the upper ball tray 18 and the lower ball tray 19 for temporarily collecting the game balls.

  The game balls won in the game area 52 and the game balls that have not won a prize are guided to a ball collecting basket formed on the set base 31 and are lifted by a lifting device (not shown). The lifting device has a built-in lifting screw that is rotated by a lifting motor, and the pachinko ball (game ball) is lifted by the rotation of the lifting screw. A polishing member for polishing the pachinko ball by contacting the pachinko ball in the middle of lifting is provided on the back of the lifting device, and the surface of the pachinko ball is polished while being lifted.

  A game ball detection switch is provided on the ball inlet side (lower side) and ball outlet side (upper side) of the lifting device, and the pachinko balls to be lifted are detected by these detection switches. A ball launching device is provided in the vicinity of the ball discharge port of the lifting device, and the game ball detected by the detection switch (upper side) after the lifting is supplied to the ball launching device by the ball feeding device. . The ball feeding device has a function of feeding the next game ball to the hit ball launch position every time the player operates the launch handle 20 to hit one game ball. Further, a game ball excess / deficiency detection switch is provided in the middle of the circulation path of the game balls, and detects whether or not the number of pachinko balls in the circulation path is a predetermined number (for example, 50).

  A card unit (CU) as an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko gaming machine at a side position on a predetermined side of the pachinko gaming machine. This is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 10 described above. The card unit is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or a member player who has registered as a member in the game hall. Pachinko machines that accept membership cards, which are game recording media, and use the game value (for example, card balance, number of balls held, number of balls stored, etc.) owned by the player specified by the record information of those cards It has a function for allowing the game to be performed by bullet firing the encapsulated ball. The visitor card and membership card are composed of IC cards.

  In this pachinko gaming machine, management of the current number of balls is performed by calculating fluctuations in the number of gaming balls on the pachinko gaming machine side on the card unit side. The pachinko game machine also calculates and stores the current number of game balls, but when the number of game balls reaches 0 on the pachinko game machine side, the pachinko game machine quickly launches the ball. It is a secondary thing used only for performing the control to stop. By doing this, the running cost of the game hall where the enclosed game machine is introduced by holding down the cost of the pachinko gaming machine side by providing the card unit side with the main management function regarding the number of game balls on the pachinko gaming machine side Can be reduced.

  When the power supply is turned on for the first time after the pachinko gaming machine and the CU are electrically connected after being installed in the amusement hall, the payout control board on the pachinko gaming machine side sends the main chip ID from the main board. The main chip ID is transmitted to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control board itself is transmitted to the card unit side. On the card unit side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the data of the connection time, that is, the time when the card unit side and the pachinko gaming machine side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the card unit side to the pachinko gaming machine side, and the pachinko gaming machine side transmits the data. Stores connection time.

  When the power is turned on thereafter, these three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine side to the card unit side.

  On the card unit side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated to determine whether or not the same pachinko gaming machine as the previous one is connected. The connection time data is sent from the card unit side to the pachinko gaming machine side when the communication between the card unit side and the pachinko gaming machine side is started each time the power is turned on. Connection time data is stored on the pachinko gaming machine side.

  The card unit requests the pachinko gaming machine to transmit the main chip ID and the like to the pachinko gaming machine, and the pachinko gaming machine transmits the main chip ID and the like to the card unit. Further, authentication is requested from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine, and the pachinko gaming machine is notified of acceptance of the authentication request from the card unit. Further, the card unit requests the pachinko gaming machine to transmit recovery information, and the pachinko gaming machine transmits the recovery information held in the pachinko gaming machine to the card unit. Subsequently, the card unit notifies the pachinko gaming machine that it is connected to the pachinko gaming machine, and the pachinko gaming machine notifies the card unit that it is connected. Also, the card unit requests the pachinko gaming machine to clear the recovery information and backs up the connection ID (communication start time). The pachinko gaming machine requests the card unit to clear the recovery information and connect the ID (communication). The end of backup at (start time) is notified.

  Further, various (gaming operations) are instructed from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine, and transmission of gaming machine information (addition / subtraction data, etc.) is requested. The card unit uses this command to periodically check the status of the game machine. The pachinko gaming machine is notified of the execution result of the gaming operation instruction and gaming machine information (addition / subtraction data, etc.) to the card unit. A command requesting connection of a communication connection is transmitted from the card unit to the pachinko gaming machine.

  Also, when it is detected that there is no game ball while playing a game with a pachinko machine, the payout control board automatically stops driving the ball launch motor and hits the ball into the game area. Control to a prohibited game state. It should be noted that if the variable display device is already in variable display at that stage, the variable display is continued only by stopping the hitting of the hit ball. If there is a storage of the number of balls held in the first start winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63 at the stage where the firing stop control is performed, the variable display control of the variable display device based on the storage is continued. .

  The main management of the number of game balls is performed in the card unit, but only on the pachinko game machine side when the game prohibition control (launching stop control) when the game ball number becomes 0 in the pachinko game machine is performed. It is determined that the number of game balls has become 0, and game prohibition control (launch stop control) is performed. Thereafter, as the operation response, final ball-related information is transmitted to the card unit, and the final number of game balls “0” is determined on the card unit side. The reason for controlling in this way is that it is necessary to perform the hitting stop control at the moment when the number of game balls becomes zero on the pachinko gaming machine side.

  For example, on the card unit side which mainly manages the number of game balls, the response of the action response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls when the number of game balls sent from the pachinko game machine side becomes 0 Waiting for reception, the final number of game balls is calculated on the card unit side, and when it becomes 0, a command for operation instruction with a prohibition request for prohibiting the game is transmitted to the pachinko game machine side, If the pachinko machine is controlled to stop hitting the ball for the first time after that, the pachinko ball may be shot and fired during the response and command transmission / reception, and a new number of subtraction balls may be generated during that time. On the pachinko machine side, a new subtraction ball number is generated even though the game ball number is already “0”, and the game ball number eventually becomes negative. Inconvenience say occurs. In order to prevent such inconvenience, only the batting launch stop control when the number of game balls becomes zero is controlled based on the number of game balls on the pachinko gaming machine side.

  In this way, the game control represented by the hitting ball stoppage control is performed based on the number of game balls stored in the pachinko game machine itself, and therefore based on the number of game balls managed and stored in the card unit. Compared with the case where such game control is performed, game control can be performed in real time in accordance with the fluctuation of the number of game balls.

  Here, an example is shown in which the payout control board performs the hitting shot stop control, but the main board may be configured to perform the hitting shot stop control. In this case, for example, the payout control board transmits a signal indicating that the number of game balls is 0 to the main board when the number of game balls is determined to be 0. The main board receives this signal and inhibits the driving of the firing motor.

  Such a game prohibition process by the card unit is also executed when the front frame 13 or the glass door 15 is opened or when a player returns a card. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine can respond to the refusal of refusal, and in the case where the front frame 13 or the glass door 15 cannot be opened, for example, due to some reason such as abnormality, the card unit instruction cannot be followed. The response of the prohibition rejection is transmitted to the card unit. The game prohibition includes not only prohibition of driving of the launch motor but also other game items such as ball rental.

  In addition, in such an enclosed circulation type pachinko game machine, ball lending is not performed for every predetermined amount (for example, 500 yen or 1000 yen), but lending for an input amount (for example, 10,000 yen) is performed collectively. It is also possible. Since it is not necessary to deliver the game ball to the player, it is possible to easily adapt to such a ball rental form.

In addition, in this invention, it is possible to grasp | ascertain comprehensively as a pachinko game machine also including the thing which attached the card unit.
<Application to slot machines>

  Further, the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines but can be applied to other types of gaming machines. An example of another type of gaming machine is a revolving type gaming machine (slot machine). Further, as the slot machine, although not shown, the following can be exemplified.

  That is, the slot machine displays a main board as a main game control means for managing the progress of the game, a sub board (sub-main board, sub-sub board) as a sub game control means for controlling the execution, and identification information for the main game. As a main game identification information display means for playing, a plurality of rows (for example, three rows) of reels each having a plurality of pieces of identification information arranged on the outer periphery, and a main game start that can be operated by the player and instruct the game start A start lever as instruction means, a stop button as main game progress instruction means that can be operated by the player and instruct the game progress, and the like are provided.

  Of these, the main board has a main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number when the start lever is operated, and one or more stop identifications based on the random numbers acquired by the main game random number acquisition means. Main game identification information display content determination means for tentatively determining information (for example, display content determination means for internally determining a winning combination such as a small role or a special game related feature), main game identification information display Based on one or a plurality of stop identification information provisionally determined by the content determination means and the operation timing of the stop button, control is performed so that one stop identification information is fixedly displayed on the reel which is the main game identification information display unit. Special information for controlling to shift to a special game when a predetermined mode is displayed as stop identification information on a reel which is a main game identification information display control means and a main game identification information display unit Technical execution control means has a main gaming random number acquisition unit main gaming side information transmission control means for transmitting information about the main gaming random number acquired in the sub-game control unit side, and the like.

  Among these, the identification information display content determination means for main game includes, for example, display content determination means for internally determining a winning combination such as a replay or a bonus or a special game related to a special game. . As the main game identification information display control means, for example, a reel control means for stopping the reel at a predetermined position based on the internally determined winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed can be cited. Furthermore, as the special game execution control means, for example, special bonus actuating means that actuates a special bonus when “777 etc.” are arranged on a predetermined effective line can be cited.

  In such a slot machine, whether or not an effect can be executed and an effect pattern are determined in the secondary game control unit when the start lever is operated or when the stop button is operated. Further, in the slot machine, a button effect is executed by lottery, and when the button effect is executed, in order to prompt the player to operate an operation button (sub game operation means) provided at a predetermined position of the housing. A promotion effect is executed. And the structure which concerns on each embodiment is applicable in determining the above-mentioned production pattern. In addition, the slot machine is provided with a setting change device for setting the winning probability in random number lottery.

  In the slot machine as described above, it is conceivable to perform the LED display control similar to that of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described above. For example, on the main board, a process for notifying the stop button operation order (so-called pressing order) is performed so that the player can arrange a predetermined combination of stop symbols. A plurality of LED indicator lamps provided in a control display device (not shown) can be turned on, turned off, and blinked.

10 Pachinko machines, 50 game boards, 52 game areas, 53 main control display devices,
59 Normal symbol display part, 62 1st start winning opening, 63 2nd starting winning opening,
68a left working port, 68b right working port, 70 first special symbol display section,
71 2nd special symbol display part, 91 1st grand prize opening, 92 2nd big prize opening,
102 main board, 104 sub board, 113 first success / failure judging means,
117 second win / fail judgment means, 120 special game control means, 231 first status indicator lamp,
232 Second status indicator lamp, 233 Main control error indicator lamp, 301 Sub main board,
302 Sub-sub board, 501 CPU of main board.

Claims (1)

Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
In accordance with the output of the main control means, a light-emitting display unit composed of a plurality of light-emitting elements that are turned on or off, respectively,
A game area where game media can flow down;
A first start area disposed in the game area and capable of detecting a game medium;
A second start-up area that is arranged in the game area and capable of detecting a game medium, and is capable of taking a closed state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and an open state that is more advantageous to the player than the closed state;
A third start area disposed in the game area and capable of detecting a game medium;
One or a plurality of variable winning openings that are arranged in the game area and can take a winning impossible state and a winning possible state,
The main control means includes
A first jackpot lottery for the first starting area is performed using a jackpot random value acquired based on the detection of the game medium in the first starting area, and a first jackpot lottery result for the first starting area is shown. When the special symbol is stopped after the variable display, and the result of the big win lottery related to the first starting area is a big win, the variable winning opening is in the state where the winning is possible after the stop display of the first special symbol And execute a special game
A second for performing a big hit lottery related to the second start area using the big hit random value obtained based on the detection of the game medium in the second start area, and showing a result of the big hit lottery related to the second start area When the special symbol is stopped after the variable display, and the result of the big win lottery related to the second start area is a big win, the variable winning opening is in the state where the winning is possible after the stop display of the second special symbol And execute a special game
If a predetermined special symbol variation start condition related to the first special symbol is not satisfied even if a game medium is detected in the first starting area, first special symbol hold storage information including the big hit random number value is predetermined. Memorize within the number,
Even if a game medium is detected in the second starting area, if the predetermined special symbol variation start condition relating to the second special symbol is not satisfied, the second special symbol hold storage information including the big hit random number value is predetermined. Memorize within the number,
Selecting a special symbol variation pattern that defines a variation time related to the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol by a special symbol variation pattern lottery,
A lottery for normal symbols is performed using a random number for normal symbols acquired based on the detection of the game medium in the third starting area, and the normal symbols for showing the results of the lottery for normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. If the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a win, the second starting area is set to the open state after the stop display of the normal symbol,
Even if a game medium is detected in the third starting area, the normal symbol hold storage information including the lottery for normal symbols is held within a predetermined number when the predetermined variation start condition for the normal symbols is not satisfied. Remember,
The light emitting display unit includes at least a light emitting element used as a special symbol display unit, a light emitting element used as a special symbol hold number display unit, a light emitting element used as a normal symbol display unit, and a normal symbol hold number display unit. And a light emitting element used as:
The main control means includes
A group designation data storage area for storing group designation data for designating a part of the light emitting element groups among the plurality of light emitting elements of the light emitting display section;
A lighting pattern table that stores a lighting pattern for each of the identification display unit element groups configured by one or a plurality of light emitting elements constituting the part of the light emitting element groups,
From the lighting pattern table, a lighting pattern selection information storage area storing lighting pattern selection information for determining a lighting pattern of the identification display unit element group,
The lighting pattern selection information of the identification display unit element group determined based on the information of the lighting pattern selection information storage area is turned on or off for a plurality of light emitting elements of the partial light emitting element group. A lighting state designation information storage area to be stored as information for instructing
A timer storage area for storing a counter value updated in an interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle by the main control unit;
Have
The main control means includes
Each time the interrupt process is performed, the value of the group designation data storage area is updated to a different value,
In the interrupt process in which the timer storage area is updated and the number of updates reaches a predetermined value, the information in the lighting pattern selection information storage area is updated to information for turning on or off the light emitting elements of the light emitting display unit. to, pachinko machines, characterized in that to enable the emission control in the blinking display mode.

Images